Embed Size (px)
Citation preview
BANK OF INDIA
HEAD OFFICE, PREMISES DEPARTMENT, STAR HOUSE, C-5, BLOCK G, 1ST
FLOOR, BANDRA KURLA COMPLEX, BANDRA (EAST), MUMBAI-400051.
TENDER DOCUMENT
FOR
“CONSTRUCTION OF BANK BUILDING ON PLOT NO.
770-771, T.P.S. IV, AT S.V. ROAD, ANDHERI (W),
MUMBAI-51.”
VOLUME – II
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
Issued To: ______________________________________________________________
1. Date of issue of Blank Tender :
2. Pre- Bid Meeting :
3. Date of Submission of tenders :
4. Date of Opening of Tender :
Tender Price: Rs. 10,000/- per set (Non-Refundable)
________________________________________________________________________
M/S. SHASHI PRABHU & ASSOCIATES 1
st Floor, Above Kanga Library,
Wankhede Stadium, Churchgate, Mumbai-400 020.
Email: - [email protected]
Tel:- 022-66199999 Fax: - 022-66199900
BANK OF INDIA HEAD OFFICE, PREMISES DEPARTMENT, STAR HOUSE, C-5, BLOCK G, 1
ST FLOOR, BANDRA
KURLA COMPLEX, BANDRA (EAST), MUMBAI-400051.
Project: “Construction Of Bank Building On Plot No. 770-771, T.P.S. Iv, At
S.V. Road, Andheri (W), Mumbai-51.”
INDEX Sr. No. Description Of Items Page No
SECTION -I CIVIL WORKS
PREAMBLE TO SPECIFICATIONS PRS 1-4
SECTION -II (A) EARTHWORK & METAL PACKING EW 1-6
SECTION –II (B) CONCRETE : PLAIN & REINFORCED RCC 1-18
SECTION –II (C) FORMWORK FW 1-8
SECTION -II (D) REINFORCEMENT REN 1-6
SECTION –II (E) STRUCTURAL STEEL WORKS ST 1-10
SECTION –II (F) Part-I MASONRY - BRICK WORK BW 1-7
SECTION –II (F) Part-II MASONRY - CONCRETE BLOCK WORK BCW 1-6
SECTION –II (G) PLASTERING AND POINTING PL 1-8
SECTION –II (H) FLOORING & WALL FINISHES FLW 1-12
SECTION –II (I) DOORS & WINDOWS DW 1-7
SECTION –II (J) WATER PROOFING WP 1 -6
SECTION –II (K) PAINTING & FINISHING. PF 1-4
SECTION –II (L) MISCELLANEOUS WORKS MIS 1-4
SECTION –II (M) PLUMBING SERVICES PS 1-26
SECTION -III ELECRICAL WORK ELECR 1-19
SECTION -IV FIRE FIGHTING WORK FFW 1-11
SECTION -V HVAC SYSTEM HVAC 1-30
SECTION -VI IBMS SYSTEM IBMS 1-32
SECTION –X APPROVED MAKES APM 1-12
Section - I
PREAMBLE TO SPECIFICATIONS & BILL OF QUANTITIES
1.1 GENERAL
All Works shall be measured net as completed or as fixed in place with no
allowance (unless specified for) for cuttings, wastage, joints, risks etc. No
allowance shall be made for large or small quantities, narrow widths, easy access
or difficult positions or other exceptional circumstances. Any work executed
over and above the dimensions given in drawings or sketches provided by the
Engineer in charge or written instructions by the Engineer in charge shall be
ignored, and no payment shall be made for such extra work. In other words,
payment shall be made for authorised Permanent Works only. Unless otherwise
specified measurements shall be taken as per the provisions of I.S. code 1200.
1.2 TOLERENCE.
The least count for the purpose of calculating quantities shall be as under. Linear
dimensions shall be measured correct to the 0.01 m. Area shall be worked out
correct to the 0.01 Sq.M., volume (Cubic contents) shall be worked out correct
to the 0.01 cubic metre and weight shall be worked out correct to 0.001 Tonne or
1 Kg. as applicable, and thickness to 1.0 mm unless otherwise specified.
1.3 TRANSPORT :
Distance shall be measured by the shortest practicable route as approved by
Engineer in charge.
1.4 FULL PROVISIONS :
The rates inserted by Contractor/tenderer against various items/amount of work
detailed in various parts of schedule shall be deemed to include every allowance
necessary, without extra measurement or charge for meeting the requirement of
various components/parts of the contract documents viz. Particular Specifications.
Standard Specifications of P.W.D. of Maharashtra & MCGM, item wise
specifications, Additional Special Conditions and Mandatory Instructions,
Preambles and Notes to Schedule Items, description of Schedule items, which
shall all be read together, and any or all of the following unless specifically
provided for to the contrary.
a) Compliance with all the conditions of contract including General
Conditions of Contract., Schedule of Quantities, Particular
Specifications, drawings including notes thereon, Specifications in
Standard Specifications and other Specification in this Contract of
P.W.D. Maharashtra State & MCGM, Relevant Indian Standard
Specifications, and other Specification in this Contract. All India Standard
Schedule of Rates 1986 "Standard Specifications" of Govt. of India as and
where applicable.
b) All labour, materials, tools and plant, equipment and transport (which
may be) required in preparation for and in the full and entire execution
and completion of the Works, including waste in materials, carriage and
cartage, carrying in, all leads and lifts. Hoisting, seating, fitting and fixing
in position.
c) Local Conditions: Nature of Works, local facilities for supply of labour
and materials, accessibilities to site, and all other matters affecting the
execution and completion of the Works.
d) Duties etc. : Payment of any Octroi, Terminal Tax, Turnover Tax, Toll
Tax, Contract Sales Tax, VAT, Ground Rent, Environmental Cess or
any other duties and levies on materials obtained for the Works and any
duties in respect of patent rights including Works contract sales tax etc.
e) Supervision : Competent supervision of the Works.
f) Labour: Reasonable terms and conditions of employment liabilities to pay
compensation, pay wages in accordance with payment of wages Act
wages as per statutory enactments, temporary accommodation, sanitation
etc. compliance with Contract Labour Act.
g) Water and Power: Provision of all water and power required including
temporary plumbing and electrical connections.
h) Temporary work-shops, stores, office, labour camps foundation for crane
etc. : Provision of such structures as required for efficient execution of the
work, removing and cleaning up site on completion of work.
i) Precautions against risk : Precautions to prevent loss or damage from all
or any risks, insurance of sheds or any temporary accommodation
provided by Client, watching and lighting and provisions pertaining to
these in General Conditions of Contract.
j) Notices, Fees etc. : Compliance with statutory provisions of regulations
and/or bye-laws of any local authority and/or any public service
company or authority affected by the Works.
k) Setting out the Works including all apparatus required.
l) Site Drainage : Removal at no extra cost of all water that may
accumulate due to springs, sub-soil water, rains, flood/tides and any other
causes on the site during the progress of the Works or in trenches and
excavations.
m) Execution of work in a workman like manner including providing
Facilities for inspection etc.
n) Rectification of bad work : Rectification or removal and reconstruction
of any work which (as decided by the engineer) has been executed with
unsound or imperfect material or unskilled or unsatisfactory workmanship
or a quality inferior to that contracted for, whether during construction
or prior to the expiry of the maintenance period.
o) Responsibility for damages and loss of all construction materials etc. at the
site until handed over to Client
p) Removal of Rubbish: Removal of rubbish and debris and cleaning of any
dirt before handing over to Client
q) Cleaning site and Works : Removal by the contractor, off the site any
temporary structure any tools, plant and materials and sweeping,
washing, cleaning joinery, removal of splashes of paint and lime wash
and leaving the whole structure neat and tidy.
r) Completion: Completion of the Works to the satisfaction of the Engineer
on or before the stipulated date of completion.
s) Difficult Positions: Accessibility or otherwise to site, easy or difficult
positions in work. Co-ordination with CLIENT/ MCGM /Any other
statutory body for obtaining permission for diversion of traffic or any
other facilities during execution of this project.
t) Errors : Rectification of all errors to the satisfaction of Engineer (e.g.
when excavation is carried out deeper than ordered or required level
shall be made up with concrete as specified for the foundation at no
extra cost.
u) Maker‟s instructions: Compliance with maker's instructions in the case of
proprietary articles.
v) Curved work etc. : Work of any quantity, size or shape, whether level,
inclined, curved, battered etc.
w) Waste : All wastes, laps, seams, joints (rough or fair cutting) cutting,
straight/raking, circular and making good.
x) Artificial Lights : To include for all lighting, kerosene or electric power
as the case may be, when need arises for use of lighting out Works.
y) Tests : Carrying out all tests at field laboratory and or any other
laboratory approved by Engineer as per relevant Indian Standards in
required frequencies.
__________________
Signature of Tenderer
Date:
PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION - A
EARTHWORK & METAL PACKING
A.1 Excavation for all Works and of materials required for filling shall be to the exact
width, length and depth shown on the drawings or as directed in writing by the
Engineer. If excavation is carried out to greater width, length, depth than
required, the Contractor shall make good, at his own cost, the extra depth by
sound masonry or concrete filling, and extra length or width filled in by well
consolidated earth or if the Engineer thinks it necessary for the stability of the
work, by masonry or concrete as he may direct.
A.2 Excavated material required for filling shall be stacked or dumped where
indicated by the Engineer. Excavated material not required for filling and any
surplus material shall be removed and spread on the site where and as directed by
the Engineer or carted away from the site as directed by the Engineer. Dumping
of this surplus material shall be in an orderly manner and according to the
levels/grades as indicated by the Engineer. The maximum radius for dumping of
this surplus material on site from excavations will be as noted in the bill of
quantities. The cost of such removal and spreading shall be borne by the
Contractor and held to be included in the Contract Rates.
A.3 The Contractor shall, at the Contract Rates make provision for all shoring,
pumping, dredging, bailing out or draining water whether subsoil or rain or other
water and the excavation shall be kept free of water while the masonry work or
concrete work is in progress and until the Engineer considers the work well set
(Refer IS:3764 Safety for Excavation Work). The sides of trenches shall be kept
vertical and the bottom horizontal and shall be run level throughout or properly
stepped as directed by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall effect and maintain during progress of Works temporary
fences around dangerous excavations.
A.4 Excavation in ordinary soil means excavation in marine clay saturated or
unsaturated with water or ordinary hard soil including stiff heavy clay, hard shale,
or compact soil or any material which can be removed by the ordinary
application of spades, picks and pick axes. This shall also include removal of
isolated boulders each having a volume not more than 0.05 cu.m.
A.5 Excavation in soft rock includes limestone, sandstone, laterite, etc. or other rock
which can be quarried or split with crowbars or wedges. This shall also
include excavation of tarred pavements, masonry work and rock boulders each
having a volume of not less than 0.05 cu.m and not more than 0.25 cu.m.
A.6 Excavation in hard rock includes any rock found in ledges or masses in its
original form or sheet rock or cement concrete, excavation of which in the
opinion of the Engineer requires the use of compressed air equipment, sledge
hammer and blasting.
A.7 In case of any difficulty concerning the interpretation of Clauses A.4, A.5
and A.6 above, the Engineer shall decide whether the excavation in a particular
material is in ordinary soil, soft rock or hard rock and his decision in this matter
shall be final and binding on the Contractor and without appeal.
A.8 The foundation trenches shall be inspected and passed by the Engineer before
such approval concrete or masonry work is commenced and the Contractor shall
hold an order in writing to this effect, otherwise the Contractor shall be liable
to have this work removed for inspection.
A.9 The earth/murrum for backfilling in foundation shall be got approved by the
Engineer. In the foundation the backfilling shall be done in layers not more
than 300 mm thick and shall be thoroughly watered and consolidated by
approved method. The rate for backfilling in foundation is deemed to have been
included in the excavation rate.
A.10 Murum Filling
A.10.1 The backfilling in plinth and other places which are required for levelling shall
be done in layers not more than 300 mm thick. The filling shall be watered and
thoroughly consolidated by vibratory roller of approved capacity in case of
platforms and by mechanical compactors in case of all buildings. The process
shall be repeated till the required level is achieved. After the backfilling is
completed the surface shall be uniformly dressed and levelled. Murum of
approved quality brought by the contractor from outside source having liquid
limit not more than 40 and platicity index not more than 20 and minimum dry
density not less than 1700 Kg. per m3 shall be used for filling and spread in layers
not more than 300mm, to the required line and grade, watered and compacted
with 8-10 tonnes power road roller so as to attain atleast 95% of modified proctor
dry density.
A.10.2 The work to be executed shall conform to clause Nos. 101 to 114,301 to 309 and
section 900 of the specification for road & bridge work of the ministry of surface
transort (road wing), Second revision 1988.
A.11 Metal Packing: Unless otherwise specified, stone for metal packing shall
consist of crushed or broken stone. It shall be hard, durable and free from
disintegrated particles, excessive dust and other objectionable matter.
Grading of coarse aggregates shall conform to one of the gradings given in the
following tables:
Grading Size Sieve desig- % by Remark
No range nation (IS.460) weight
in mm Passing
the sieve
1. 90mm 100mm 100 Suitable
to 40mm 80mm 65-85 for
63mm 25-60 100mm
40mm 0-15 consolidated
20mm 0-5 thickness
Grading Size Sieve desig- % by Remark
No range nation (IS.460) weight
in mm Passing
the sieve
2. 63mm 80mm 100 Suitable
to 40mm 63mm 90-100 for 75mm
50mm 35-70 consoli-
40mm 0-15 dated
20mm 0-5 thickness
3. 50mm 63mm 100 Suitable
to 20mm 50mm 95-100 for 65mm
40mm 35-70 consoli-
20mm 0-10 dated
10mm 0-5 thickness
Screening to fill the voids shall consist of the same material as coarse
aggregates and shall conform to the grading given below:
Classification Size of Sieve desig- % by weight
nation passing
A. 12.5mm 12.5mm 100
10.0mm 90-100
4.75mm 10-30
150 micron 0-8
B. 10.0mm 10.00mm 100
4.75mm 85-100
150 micron 10-30
The metal packing shall be done in layers not more than 100 mm compacted
thickness. For 150 mm compacted thickness, it shall be done in two layers each
of 75 mm compacted thickness.
After laying, each layer shall be compacted thoroughly by mechanical Compactor
in case of buildings & by vibrating roller in case of roads, as specified or by other
equivalent method approved by the Engineer. Slight sprinkling of water shall
be done at the time of rolling.
After rolling has been completed, screening shall be applied uniformly and
gradually to fill the interstices and the surface shall be dry rolled. In no case shall
screenings be dumped in a heap on the rolled surfaces. Rolling shall be
accompanied with brooming.
After application of screening and rolling, the surface shall be copiously
sprinkled with water and rolled. If necessary additional screening shall be
applied to fill the voids if any. Rolling shall be continued until the coarse
aggregates are well bonded. Care shall be taken that the base of subgrade does
not get damaged due to addition of excessive quantities of water during the
construction.
A.13 Measurements :
a) Measurements of excavation shall be solid measurements of the material
prior to its removal. Measurement shall be of exact length and width as
indicated in the drawings and depth measured vertically, according to the
drawings or Engineer‟s written instructions. Measurement shall be as
per drawing and dimensions of bed concrete net without any allowance
for increase in bulk. Extra excavation for working space and on account
of slips or falls shall not be measured and that rate will include cost of
inserting planking, strutting etc. and filling with selected soil after removal
of planking.
Rates of excavation shall include the following provision
a) Excavating either straight or curved or plain.
b) Bailing out by pumping or other measures all water which may
accumulate in excavations or sites or in trenches or in pits from rains,
springs, under ground water, tidal water, broken water mains, drains,
well or any other sources.
c) Setting out Works and all profiles, cross heads, boning rods, staves as
well as all tools and plants.
d) All materials and labour required for fencing in protecting against risk
of accident to open excavation etc. and for providing gangways with
handrail across open trenches etc. where necessary, during the progress
of Works.
e) Watching and lighting where necessary and as directed by the Engineer.
f) Forming “Tell Tales" or "Dead Men" in borrow pits and forming steps in
deep excavation for facility of recording measurement.
g) Planking and strutting of adequate strength to be designed by Contractor
and as directed by Engineer.
h) Excavation for insertion of planking and strutting and filling with soil after
removal of planking and strutting.
i) Removal of slips or falls in excavation.
j) Carting away spoil or falls in excavation separating useful soil fit for reuse
in filling.
k) Cleaning of irregular pockets and dewatering excavation.
l) Carting of all excavated stuff and disposing off within a lead of 0.5 Km. as
directed by Engineer.
Measurements for excavation of soft rock and hard rock (Clauses A5 & A6) when
section or trench measurement are absolutely not possible, stack measurement
with 40 percent void deduction shall be given provided reasonable care has been
taken to avoid deliberate hollows in the stack. The stacks of soft & hard rocks will
be laid seperately on an area as directed by Engineer-in-charge.
The measurement for murum filling shall be based on actual difference of levels
before filling and after filling, levelling and compacting.
The rate for metal packing shall be based on final compacted thickness and shall
include all labour, materials and the cost of rolling with road roller, or other
equivalent method to obtain full compaction, application of screening, watering
etc. complete. It shall be measured in cubic metres.
__________________
Signature of Tenderer
Date :
SECTION - B
CONCRETE : PLAIN & REINFORCED
B.1 Cement
The Cement used shall be of the following grade with the prior approval of the
Engineer shall be taken for any of the above brands. Proposed to be used in the
work.
a. Ordinary
Portland Cement ( Gr 53 ) IS:12269 --- Only for RCC work
(Only Birla Super, L&T,
Gujarat Ambuja, ACC of approved
source or any other approved brand
will be allowed to be used in
the work)
b. ----- do ---- (Gr 43) IS:12239 --- For works other than
RCC works.
c. Sulphate Resisting Cement IS:12330/1988
Use: Cement shall be used in the order in which it is received. Cement in bags
in storage for more than 3 months shall be retested before use.
Testing: Not withstanding test certificate given by manufacturer a sample shall be
tested from every batch of cement delivered on site or once for every 10000
bags whichever is more frequent. Tests shall be carried out for fineness, initial
and final setting time, and compressive strength (IS:4031) and the results
approved by the Engineer before use on receipt of the cement in permanent
Works. Samples shall be taken immediately of cement at site. The methods and
procedure of be in accordance with IS: 3535. The Engineer may specify other
forms of sampling and tests including chemical analysis, (IS:4032) if in his
opinion the cement is of doubtful quality; the costs of such additional tests shall
be borne by the Contractor.
B.2 Fine Aggregates (Sand)
1. It shall be river or pit sand conforming to IS: 383, obtained from sources
approved by the Engineer. These sands, if found too coarse, shall be
suitably blended with finer sand obtained from approved source to obtain
the desire grading. The provision of two types of sand and their stacking
separately and their mixing in the specified proportions shall be at the
Contractor‟s cost.
The sand shall not contain silt more than a total of 2% by weight or 7%by
volume and shale, clay, silt and other structurally weak particles. A
totaling to not more than 5% by weight. Chloride content in washed sand
shall not be greater than 0.04% by weight and salty water in sad shall be
thoroughly removed by washing sand in potable water
2. The grading of the sand shall conform to IS:383.
The Sand shall be screened on a 4.75 mm size screen to eliminate over-
size particles.
The sand shall be washed in screw type mechanical washers in potable
water to remove excess silt, clay and chlorides. The screening and
washing of sand shall be completed at least one day before using it in
concrete.
The washed sand shall be stored on a sloping concrete platform and in
such a manner as to avoid contamination.
3. The aggregate shall be subjected to tests in accordance with IS 2386 as
may be ordered by the Engineer. The cost of such tests shall be borne by
the contractor.
B.3 Coarse Aggregates
1. Coarse aggregates for the Works shall be crushed stone conforming to
IS:383, obtained from sources such as Turbhe, Panvel etc., approved by
the Engineer. Only Quarries having jaw crushers with choke feeding
arrangement producing aggregates of nearly cubical shape shall be
approved.
Aggregates shall be properly screened and if necessary washed clean
before use.
2. Coarse aggregates containing flat or flaky pieces or mica shall be rejected.
3. Coarse aggregates shall be supplied in the following sizes
Nominal size Maximum size Minimum size
10mm 12mm 5mm
20mm 25mm 10mm
40mm 40mm 20mm
80mm 80mm 40mm
4. The grading of coarse aggregate shall be such that not more than 5% shall
be larger than the maximum size and not more than 10% shall be smaller
than the smallest size. Between these sizes the coarse aggregate shall be
well graded.
5. The aggregates shall be subjected to tests in accordance with IS 2386 as
may be ordered by the Engineer.
6. Aggregates shall be stored in such a way as to prevent segregation of
sizes and avoid contamination with fines.
B.4 Storage of Material
1. Cement :
The Contractor shall make arrangements to the satisfaction of the Engineer
for the storage of cement to prevent deterioration due to moisture and/or
intrusion of foreign matter. Bulk cement shall be stored in approved
waterproof bin or silo. Bagged cement shall be stored in suitable weather-
tight warehouse in a manner to provide easy access for identification and
inspection of each consignment. Stored cement shall meet the test
requirements as per IS-269 at any time after storage, when a retest is
ordered by the Engineer. Each consignment shall be stacked separately
with the date of receipt flagged on it, not more than 12 bags stacked in
height, the bags being arranged with headers and stretchers. Normally
consignments shall be used in the order of receipt at site unless otherwise
directed. In the case of large concrete pours, the Engineer will decide on
the batch of cement to be used taking into consideration the quantity of
cement with particular reference to the concerned concrete pours. Any
additional work in handling and storage of cement contingent upon this
requirement shall be to the contractor's account and no extra claim will be
entertained. Cement shall be protected from exposure to moisture in
transit, in storage at the works and until it enters the concrete mixers. The
contractor shall keep accurate records of the deliveries of the cement and
of its use in the work.
2. Aggregates:
Coarse and fine aggregates shall be stacked separately in such manner as
to prevent contamination by foreign materials. All aggregates shall be
stored on concrete or masonry platforms. Each size shall be kept separate
with wooden, steel, concrete or masonry bulk-heads, or shall be stored in
separate stacks, taking care to prevent the materials at the edges of the
stock piles from getting intermixed. Stacks of fine and coarse aggregates
shall be kept sufficiently apart. The aggregates shall be stored in easily
measurable stacks of suitable heights as may be directed by the Engineer
B.4 Mixers and Vibrators
1. For all concreting work the Contractor shall provide weigh batching plant
of suitable capacity which shall be got approved before bringing it to
the site. The plant used shall conform to IS:2722.
2. The Contractor shall provide concrete mixers (IS:1791 - Batch type
concrete mixers, IS:2439 - Roller Pan Mixer).
3. The Contractor shall provide at site Concrete Vibrators Immersion
Type, IS:2505 - Screed Board Concrete Vibrators, IS:2506 supplied by
recognised manufacturers.
The Contractor shall make available at site needle vibrators of sizes 25
mm, 40 mm, and 60 mm for use in various appropriate locations of the
structure.
B.5 Grade of Concrete
The concrete is designated as follows:
- Concrete M - 35/20
- The letter M refers to the mix
The number 35 represents the characteristic compressive strength of 15cm
cubes at 28 days in MPa (Mega Pascals : 1MPa : 10 kg/cm2 approximately). M35
concrete thus has a characteristic strength of 350 kg/cm2.
The number /20 represents the maximum nominal size of aggregate in the mix, in
this case 20mm.
B.6 Minimum Cement Content
For all structural concrete work the minimum cement content shall not be less
than 360 kg/m3 of concrete from durability considerations.
B.7 Trial mixes : (for strength)
1. The Contractor is entirely responsible for the design of the concrete
mixes. The design is however to be approved by the Engineer. At least
8 weeks before commencing any concreting in the Works, the
Contractor shall make trial mixes using samples of coarse aggregates,
sand, water superplasticizer and cement , typical of those to be used in the
works, and which have been tested in an approved laboratory. a clean dry
mixer shall be used and the first batch discarded.
2. The cement content for different grades of concrete and the
required average strengths at 28 days for which the mixes shall be
designed are specified below :
TABLE - 1 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Grades Character- Target Strength Min *Water Maximum Cement
of istic mean f‟cm Cement Cement Slump Grade
Concrete strength (f‟cm) Mpa Content Ratio at placing
(f‟ck) (Mpa) (Fcm) Kg/m3 (Max) point
(mm)
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
M20/10 20 21 29 360 0.45 150 53
M20/20 20 21 29 360 0.45 50 53
M30/20 30 29 39 400 0.40 170 53
M35/20 35 36 44 450 0.40 100 53
M40/20 40 36 49 450 0.40 170 53
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
* Note : 1) Proper workability will be achieved, without changing the water cement ratio
by using adequate quantity of approved admixtures like superplasticizers at no
extra cost to the corporation.
The mixes are designed to yield mean strengths (f'cm) greater than the
corresponding specified characteristic strengths (f'ck) as indicated in
above Table. The difference between f'cm and f'ck is called the `Current
Margin'.The value of the current margin has been set at 9 MPa for all
grades of concrete. The concrete mixes shall be designed on the basis
of required strength, desired workability, the maximum size of aggregate
and also the various grades of cements as specified in IS : 10262-1982,
Clause. Grade of cement shall be 53 as described in table 1 above.
3.1.1. Accordingly the required cement content shall be ascertained. The
Contractor has option to use either approved Super plasticizers or
increased cement content to achieve the required strengths at his own cost
and workability without affecting water cement ratio.
3. For each grade a total of 18 cubes shall be made. Of these 18 cubes
made, not more than 6 may be made on any day and further, of the 6
cubes made in one day not more than 2 cubes may be made from any
single batch. 9 of these cubes, each representing a different batch of
concrete shall be tested at the age of 7 days and the remaining 9 cubes
shall be tested at the age of 28 days. The making of the cubes, their
curing, storing, transporting and testing shall be in accordance with Indian
Standards IS:516. The test shall be carried out in a laboratory approved
by the Engineer.
4. If the average strength of the concrete cubes falls below the required target
mean strength (f'cm) fresh preliminary mixes for that grade shall be made
as before, until the trial mixes yield cubes of compressive strength at 28
days greater than the required average target mean strength (f'cm) at
that age.
5. Whenever there is a significant change in the quality of any of the
ingredients for concrete, the Engineer may at his discretion order the
carrying out of fresh trial mixes. All costs for trial mixes and tests shall
be to the Contractor's account and held to be included in the Contract
Rates.
6. Before commencing the Works the Contractors shall submit to the
Engineer for approval full details of all preliminary trial mixes and tests.
7. The Contractor shall carry out trial casting of a mock-up of at least one
metre length of RCC member to establish the correctness of grading
aggregates, suitability of formwork, of admixtures proposed, suitability
of mould oil proposed to be used on formwork to prevent surface
blemishes etc.,. All costs of such trial casting shall be included in the
Contract Rates.
8. When the proportions of a concrete mix have been approved by the
Engineer, the Contractor shall not vary the quality or source of the
materials or the mix without the written approval of the Engineer.
B.8 Concrete Cube Tests :
The quality of hardened concrete will be verified by the following procedure :
1. The Engineer shall select random batches of concrete for examination
without warning the Contractor and sampling will generally be done at the
point of discharge from the mixer.
2. From the batches thus selected 6 concrete cubes shall be made in
accordance with Indian Standards. However not more than 2 cubes may
be made from any single batch. Of these 6 cubes thus made 3 cubes
(each cube representing concrete of different batches) shall be tested at 7
days and the remaining 3 cubes shall be tested at 28 days.
3. All cubes shall be made, cured, stored, transported and tested in
accordance with Indian Standards. The tests shall be carried out in a
laboratory approved by the Engineer.
4. At least 6 cubes shall be made on each day‟s concreting until 60 cubes
have been made for each grade of concrete. This is in the initial period.
5. After the initial period, subject to the acceptance of the Engineer, the
frequency at which the cubes shall be made may be reduced as follows:
(1 set = 6 cubes, each pair of cubes representing concrete from a different
batch.)
At least 1 set for each day's concreting consisting of :
a) 1 set for every 10 m3 or part thereof of concrete for critical
structural elements like columns, arch etc. plus :
b) 1 set for every 40 m3 or part thereof for all other elements.
If concrete is batched at more than one point simultaneously the above
frequency of making cubes shall be followed at each point of batching.
3 of the cubes of each set shall be tested at 7 days and the remaining 3
cubes shall be tested at 28 days from the day of casting the cubes.
B.9 Acceptability criteria
1. The strength requirement of any particular grade of concrete will be
considered satisfactory if the 28 days' compressive strengths of
individual sets (each set consists of 3 cubes) and of individual cubes
satisfy the following requirements :
i For the first five sets
a) The average strength determined from any group of 9, three consecutive
test cubes exceeds the specified characteristic strength (f'ck) by not less
than 0.8 times the current margin.
b) Only one individual cube test result in any set may fall below the
specified characteristic strength (f'ck) provided that this value is not less
than 95% of the specified characteristic strength (f'ck).
ii Thereafter : Provided that the average strength of any fifteen
consecutive cubes exceeds the specified characteristic cube strength by at
least 0.9 times the current margin all the subsequent test results may be
considered acceptable if :
a) The average strength as determined from any group of three consecutive
test cubes exceeds the specified characteristic strength (f‟ck) by not less
than 0.6 times the current margin.
b) Only one individual cube test result in any set may fall below the
specified characteristic strength provided that this value is not less than
90% of the specified characteristic strength.
2. Whenever a mix is redesigned due to a change in the quality of
aggregates or cement or for any other reason, it shall be considered a
new mix and initially subject to the acceptability criteria in B.9 above.
3. If the concrete produced at site does not satisfy the above strength
requirements, the Engineer will reserve the right to require the Contractor
to improve the methods of batching, the quality of the ingredients and
redesign the mix with increased cement content if necessary. The
Contractor shall not be entitled to claim any extra cost for the extra cement
used for the modifications stipulated by the Engineer for fulfilling the
strength requirements specified. The cost of carrying out concrete cube
tests shall be covered in the rates for concrete items quoted by Contractor.
4. The above specification is based on an assumed standard deviation of 5.5
Mpa, and a probability of concrete strength falling below the desired
minimum strength of lin 20. In case quality control is very good at site and
the cube test results consistently show a standard deviation better than the
standard deviation assumed here the Engineer may at his discretion reduce
the required target strength f‟cm for any particular grade of concrete and
in consequence the current margin.
B.10 It is the complete responsibility of the Contractor to design the concrete mixes by
approved standard methods and to produce the required concrete conforming to
the specifications and the strength requirements approved by the Engineer. It is
expected that the Contractor will have competent staff to carry out this work.
B.11 Failure to meet specified Requirements:
1. If from the cube test results it appears that some portion of the
Works has not attained the required strength, the Engineer may order
that that portion of the structure be subjected to further testing of any
kind whatsoever as desired by the Engineer, including, if so desired by
him, full load testing of the suspected as well as adjacent portions of the
structure as specified in the Conditions of Contract. Such testing shall
be at the Contractor's cost. The Engineer may also reject the work and
order its demolition and reconstruction at the Contractor‟s cost.
2. If the strength of concrete in any portion of the structure is lower than
the required strength, but is considered nevertheless adequate by the
Engineer so that demolition is not necessary, the Contractor shall be
paid a lower rate for such lower strength concrete as determined by the
Engineer.
B.12 As frequently as the Engineer may require, testing shall be carried out in the field
for :
1) Moisture content and absorption and density of sand and aggregates
2) Silt content of sand
3) Grading of sand and aggregates
4) Slump test of concrete
5) Concrete cube test
6) Permeability test for concrete as per DN 1048 (Part-I). Allowable
permeability on untreated concrete surface 25mm
7) Density and P H value of Plasticiser
The Contractor shall provide and maintain on site at all times, until the
Works are completed, equipment and staff required for carrying out these tests.
The Contractor shall grant the Engineer or his representative full access to his
laboratory at all times and shall produce on demand complete records of all tests
carried out on site.
Before concreting commences on any section of the Works the Contractor shall
obtain approval of the Engineer or his representative as regards the
formworks and reinforcement's conforming with the drawings. He shall also
indicate to the Engineer in writing and obtain his approval for positions of
construction joints.
B.13 Admixtures : Use of Melamine or Napthalene based approved admixtures (Super
plasticiser) is a must. They shall be such that the strength requirements are not
affected by their use. The Admixtures will not be paid for separately. The
admixtures shall also have the property of set retarding. Before approval of super
plasticizer the contractor will submit test reports as specified in ASTMC-486
from an approved laboratory as approved by Engineer in charge. Subsequent
batches will be tested for IR analysis, UV analysis and solid content or any other
tests as directed by Engineer-in-charge.
B.14 Weigh Batching
All structural concrete shall be weigh batched. All concrete ingredients shall be
batched by weight using a weigh batcher of an approved make (IS: 2722 Portable
swing weigh batchers for concrete). Batching shall be to an accuracy of not less
than 1/2 kg and the batcher shall be tested for accuracy of calibration before
commencement of the Works and at least once a week thereafter or more
frequently if so required by the Engineer.
Use of Ready Mix Concrete (RMC) is optioned and permitted at the discretion of
the Engineer-in-charge and at no extra cost.
B.15 Water and Super plasticisers shall be batched by weight or by volume measures as
approved by the Engineer. The method of batching shall be such as will
ensure an accuracy to 0.2 litres or better for water and 20 ml or better for
plasticisers.
The Contractor shall provide the mixer operator with standard measures for
dispensing water and plasticisers in accurate quantities as per design. Concrete
mix containing water in excess of that specified shall be rejected and shall not be
allowed for use in the Works.
B.16 Placing temperatures
During hot weather, concreting shall be in accordance with the procedures set out
in IS:7861, Parts I & II.
Fine and coarse aggregates for concreting shall be kept shaded and the concrete
aggregates sprinkled with water for a sufficient time before concreting in order to
ensure that the temperature of these ingredients is as low as possible prior to
batching. The mixer and batching equipment shall be also shaded and if
necessary painted white in order to keep their temperatures as low as possible.
The placing temperature of concrete shall be as low as possible in hot weather
and care shall be taken to protect freshly placed concrete from overheating by
sunlight in the first few hours of its laying. The time of day selected for
concreting shall also be chosen so as to minimise placing temperatures. In case
of concreting in exceptionally hot weather the Engineer may in his discretion
specify the use of ice either flaked and used directly in the mix, or blocks used
for chilling the mixing water. In either case, the Contractor shall be paid only
the cost of such ice delivered on site and nothing extra for additional labour
involved in weighing and mixing.
B.18 Transporting, placing, compacting and curing
1. Transporting, placing, compacting and curing of concrete shall be in
accordance with IS:456.
2. Transporting :
The mix after discharging from the mixers shall be transported by wheel
barrows, buckets, pumps etc., without causing segregation and loss of
cement slurry and without altering its desired properties, with regard to
water cement ratio, slump, air content, cohesion and homogeneity. It
should be ensured that the concrete is moved to its final destination
before it attains initial set.
3. Placing :
The height of any single lift of concrete shall not exceed 1.5 m for walls or
2.0 m for columns.
The thickness of horizontal layers shall not exceed 300 mm. High
velocity discharge of concrete causing segregation of mix shall be
avoided. The concrete shall be placed in the forms gently and not
dropped from a height exceeding 1.5m except in columns where the
maximum allowed will be 2.0 m. Each layer of concrete shall be
compacted fully before the succeeding layer is placed and separate
batches shall follow each other so closely that the succeeding layer shall
be placed and fully compacted before the layer immediately below has
taken initial set. The layers should be sufficiently shallow, to permit
knitting of two layers together by vibration.
Concreting of any portion or section of the work shall be carried out in
one continuous operation and no interruption of concreting work will be
allowed without approval of the Engineer.
4. Compaction
Internal (needle) and surface (screed board) vibrators of approved make
shall be used for compaction of concrete
a) Internal vibrators shall be used for compaction of concrete in
foundations, columns, beams, buttresses arch section etc. For
sections such as slabs, the concrete shall be compacted by surface
type vibrators. Depending on the thickness of layer to be
compacted, 25 mm, 40 mm, and 60 mm dia internal vibrators will
be used. The concrete shall be compacted by use of appropriate
diameter vibrator by holding the vibrator in position until :
i) Air bubbles cease to come to surface
ii) Resumption of steady frequency of vibrator after the initial short
period of drop in the frequency, when the vibrator is first
inserted.
iii) The tone of the vibrator becomes uniform.
iv) Flattened, glistening surface, with coarse aggregates particles
blended into it appears on the surface.
After the compaction is completed, the vibrator should be
withdrawn slowly from the concrete so that concrete can flow in
to the space previously occupied by the vibrator. To avoid
segregation during vibration the vibrator shall not be dragged
through the concrete nor used to spread the concrete. The vibrator
shall be made to penetrate, into the layer of fresh concrete
below if any for a depth of about 150 mm. The vibrator shall be
made to operate at a regular pattern of spacing. The effective
radii of action will overlap approximately half a radius to ensure
complete compaction.
5. To secure even and dense surfaces free from aggregate pockets,
vibration shall be supplemented by tamping or rodding by hand in the
corners of forms and along the form surfaces while the concrete is plastic.
6. A sufficient number of spare vibrator‟s specially needless, shall be
kept readily accessible to the place of deposition of concrete to assure
adequate vibration in case of breakdown of those in use.
25 mm diameter immersion vibrators shall be used in thin, 40 mm
diameter immersion vibrators in fairly wide sections and 60 mm
diameter vibrators in foundations and arch abutments. Screed vibrators
shall be used for precast deck elements and in the in-situ deck slab
concreting where the thickness of the slab is 50 mm.
7. Plain concrete in foundations shall be placed in direct contact with the
bottom of the excavation, the concrete being deposited in such a manner
as not to be mixed with the earth. Plain concrete also shall be vibrated
to achieve full compaction, using needle or screed vibrators as necessary.
8. Concrete placed below the ground shall be protected from falling earth
during and after placing. Concrete placed in ground containing
deleterious substances shall be kept free from contact with such ground
and with water draining therefrom during placing and for a period of seven
days or as otherwise instructed thereafter. Approved means shall be
taken to protect immature concrete from damage by debris, excessive
loading, abrasion, vibrations, deleterious ground water, mixing with earth
or other materials, and other influences that may impair the strength
and durability of the concrete.
B.19 Construction Joints :
Concreting shall be carried out continuously upto the construction joints, the
position and details of which shall be as shown on approved drawings or as directed by
the RCC Consultant. Construction joints shall be formed by using stoppers in beams and
slabs. The cost of labour and material shall be borne by the contractor.Such joints shall,
however, be kept to the minimum.
For a vertical construction joint, a stopping board shall be fixed previously at the pre-
determined position and shall be properly stayed for sufficient lateral rigidity to prevent
its displacement or bulging when concrete is compacted against it. Concreting shall be
continued right upto the board. The board shall not be removed before the expiry of the
specified period for removal of vertical forms.
Before resuming work at any construction joint when concrete has not yet fully hardened,
all laitance shall be removed thoroughly, care being taken to avoid dislodgement of
coarse aggregates.
When work has to be resumed on a surface which has hardened, it shall be thoroughly
hacked, swept clean, wetted and covered with a layer of neat cement grout. The neat
cement grout shall be followed by a 15 mm. thick layer of mortar mixed in the same
proportion as in concrete and concreting resumed immediately thereafter. The first batch
of concrete shall be rammed against the old work to avoid formation of any stone
pockets, particular attention being paid to corners and close spots.
In all cases, the position and detailed arrangement of all construction joints shall be
predetermined and got approved from the Engineer-in-Charge.
B.20 Curing of Concrete:
a) Curing shall be done as specified in I.S. 456
b) Concrete shall be cured with potable water for the specified period after the
final setting of concrete.
c) In respect of concrete, where 53 grade cement is used, curing should be started
within four hours of placement of concrete.
d) Use of sea water / creek water or brackish water for curing will not be allowed.
Only potable water shall be used for curing.
e) Surfaces on which water cannot be retained shall be covered with jute or
hessian cloth. The cloth shall be constantly kept wet/moist during the entire
curing period.
B.21 Cracks :
1. If cracks develop in concrete construction, which in the opinion of the
Engineer may be detrimental to the strength of the construction, the
Contractor at his own expense shall test the slab or other construction as
specified in Special Conditions. If under such test loads the cracks
develop further, the Contractor shall dismantle the construction, carry
away the debris, replace the construction and carry out all consequential
work thereto.
2. If any cracks develop in the concrete construction, which in the opinion of
the Engineer, are not detrimental to the stability of the construction, the
Contractor at his own expense shall grout the cracks with polymer
cement grout of approved quality and also at his own expense and risk
shall make good to the satisfaction of the Engineer the surface finish of
ceilings, etc. which in the opinion of the Engineer has suffered damage
either in appearance or stability owing to such cracks. The Engineer's
decision as to the extent of the liability of the Contractor in the above
matter shall be final and binding.
B.22 Defective Concrete :
Should any concrete be found honeycombed or in any way defective, such
concrete shall on the instruction of the Engineer be cut out by the Contractor till
solid concrete is obtained and the portion is made good by using specially
designed mix for such repair work. This shall be done at contractor‟s own
expense.
B.23 Exposed Faces, Holes and Fixtures :
On no account shall concrete surfaces be patched or covered up or damaged
concrete rectified or replaced until the Engineer or his representative has
inspected the Works and issued written instructions for rectification. Failure to
observe this procedure will render that portion of the Works liable to rejection; in
which case it will be treated as rejection which has failed to meet specified
strength requirements and dealt with according to Clause B.11.
Holes for foundation or other bolts or for any other purposes shall be moulded,
and steel angles, holdfasts or other fixtures shall be embedded, according to the
drawing or as instructed by the Engineer at no extra cost to the corporation.
B.24 Concrete surface :
The face of concrete for which formwork is not provided other than slabs shall
be floated to a smooth finish. The floating shall be done so as not to bring an
excess of mortar to the surface of the concrete. The top face of a slab intended
to be surfaced with other material shall be left with a spaded finish.
B.25 Other applicable codes of practice for in-situ reinforced construction
All other requirements not covered by the above clauses shall be governed by
relevant clauses of IS 456, IS 3370, IS 2571 and other relevant standards as may
be applicable.
B.26 Precast Concrete
The provision in this section shall be considered supplementary to general
provisions for reinforced concrete Works.
Handling & Storage
The precast units shall be stored as directed by the Engineer. The area intended
for the storage of precast units should be surfaced in such a way that no unequal
settlement can occur. To prevent deformation of slender units, they should be
provided with supports at fairly close intervals and should also be safeguarded
against tilting. Lifting and handling positions should conform to the Engineer's
directions and drawings. In addition, location and orientation marks should be
put on the members, as and where necessary. During erection the precast units
should be protected against damage caused by local crushing and chafing effects
of lifting and transport equipment. Corners and edges of precast units should be
properly protected against any damage.
Temporary Supports and Connections :
Temporary supports provided during erection should take into account all
construction loads likely to be encountered during the completion of joints
between any combination of precast and in-situ concrete structural elements.
The supports should be arranged in a manner that will permit the proper
finishing and curing of any in-situ concreting and grouting associated with the
precast member being supported when the gaps of joints have to be filled with
concrete or mortar. The joints should first be cleaned and surface of the joints
should be wetted. The mixing, placing and compacting of cement and mortar
should be done with special care. Where mortar is specified of a dry consistency
it should be in the proportion of 1 part of cement to 1 1/2 parts of sand and
should be placed in stages and packed hard from both sides of the joint.
Tolerances
The following tolerances apply to finished precast products at the time of
placement in the structure. The forms must be constructed to give a casting well
within these limits :
1. Overall dimensions of members should not vary more than +/- 6mm per
3m length with a maximum variation of +/- 20mm.
2. Cross-sectional dimensions should not vary more than the following :
+/- 3mm for dimensions less than 150mm thick
+/- 4mm for dimensions over 150mm & less than 450mm
+/- 6mm for dimensions over 450mm to 1000mm
+/- 10mm for dimensions over 1000mm
3. Deviation from straight line in long sections should not be more than +/-
6mm upto 3m, +/- 10mm for 3m to 6m, +/- 12mm for 6m to 12m.
4. The above deviations are not applicable to PCC blocks which are dealt
with separately.
B.27 Measurement
Concrete and reinforcement shall be paid separately unless otherwise specified.
The volume of concrete measured shall include that occupied by:
1. Reinforcement and other metal sections
2. Cast in components each less than 0.01 m3 in volume
3. Rebates fillets or internal splays each less than 0.005 m2 in cross sectional
area.
4. Pockets and holes not exceeding 0.01 m3 in volume
5. For PCC below foundations no payment shall be made for any shuttering
used. The cost for this if any should be included in the rate for this item.
6. Rates for precast concrete is inlcusive of cost of casting yard, moulding,
and demoulding, concreting, handling, storing, curing transporting and
erecting at site, including all clamping, bracing that may be required
during erection including erection equipment and filling of joints in
cement mortar etc. complete.
B .28 RATE :
The unit rate for concrete shall include the cost of all materials, labour,
tools and plant required for mixing, placing in position, vibrating and
compacting, finishing as per directions of the Engineer, curing and all
other incidental expenses for producing concrete of specified strength to
complete the structure or its components as shown on the drawings and
according to these specifications. The rate shall also include the cost of
making, fixing and removing off all centers and forms required for the
work unless otherwise specified in the contract.
All expenses likely to be incurred by the contractor in transporting
materials supplied to him to the site of works, the expenses incurred in
improving the quality of materials to acceptable levels (such as screening,
washing etc.) and the expenses incurred in proper storage of materials as
directed by the Engineer etc., are to be included in the unit rate.
_________________
Signature of Tenderer
Date :
SECTION - C
FORMWORK
C.1 Definition :
The term "Formwork" or "Shuttering" shall include all forms, moulds,
sheeting, shuttering planks, alers, poles, posts, shores, struts and
strutting, ties, uprights, wallings, steel rods, bolts, wedges and all other
temporary supports to the concrete during the process of setting.
C.2 Design :
The formwork shall be designed and constructed so that the concrete
can be properly placed and thoroughly compacted to obtain the
required shape, position and level subject to specified tolerances. It is
the responsibility of the Contractor to obtain the results required by the
Engineer, whether or not some of the work is sub-contracted. Approval
of the proposed formwork by the Engineer will not diminish the
Contractor's responsibility for the satisfactory performance of the
formwork, nor for the safety and coordination of all operations.
To avoid delay and unnecessary rejection of the formwork the Contractor
shall obtain the approval of the Engineer for the design of forms and the
type of material used before fabricating the forms. (ref. ACI 347
Formwork for Concrete or equivalent I.S. Code).
The Contractor shall prepare detailed formwork drawings indicating the
sizes of all the members he proposes to use for formwork for raft, plinth
beams, staircase, walls, columns top, slabs, floor beams, precast piles etc.,
and get approval from the Engineer before fabrication and erection.
The deflection of all members used in formwork shall not be more than
1/360 of span of the member or 3 mm, whichever is less.
The foundation of all shores shall be designed to suit the bearing capacity
of soil to support the designed loads without settlement. If required the
bearing capacity of soil shall be improved by providing compacted metal
packing or lean concrete below the bearing plate and mudsills.
The Contractor shall make a mock-up of the formwork for typical
members and carry out trial castings to establish the suitability of
formwork, of mould oil proposed to be used on formwork as a releasing
agent and also to prevent surface blemishes etc. The pattern of
formwork for exposed concrete work shall be approved based on the
result of mock-up.
The Contractor shall prepare detailed shop drawing showing the
arrangement of formwork for all structural members including shoring
system, horizontal and diagonal bracing system, details of foundation etc.
The sizes of individual members shall be as per approved design
calculations.
C.3 Materials :
1. All facing formwork to come in contact with concrete in
different elements of the structure hall be of such material and
size as specified on drawings or as instructed by the Engineer.
Plywood whenever used for such concrete shall be changed after
five repetitions or even earlier if instructed by Engineer.
2. Timber facing formwork to come in contact with concrete for
"Exposed Concrete Surfaces" shall consist of lap jointed or
tongue and grooved planks as directed by the Engineer and no
joint shall permit leakage of mortar at all from cast-in-situ
concrete.
3. All joints in shuttering and between shuttering and the surface of
earlier concrete lift shall be sealed with 5 mm thick compressible
material such as sponge or other approved materials so that no
joint permits leakage of slurry.
4. The materials for other backing and supporting formwork and
their sizes shall be selected by the Contractor and shall be subject
to the approval of the Engineer.
C.4 Formwork for Exposed Concrete Surfaces :
The facing formwork, unless indicated otherwise on drawings, or
specifically approved by the engineer in writing, shall generally be
made with materials not less than the thickness mentioned below for
different elements of the structure :
1. Plain and sloping slab soffits, and sides of beams,
girders, joists ribs and sides of walls shall be made with :
a. Plywood plates not less than 12 mm thick (IS:4900 -
Specification for Plywood for Concrete Shuttering Work )
or 3mm thick with a 20 mm actual thickness timber plank
backing, of specified sizes stiffened with a suitable timber
frame-work.
The thickness of plywood for curved members shall be
such that it can be bent to the required curvature, and shall
be stiffened adequately to support the loads.
b. Steel plates not less than 3.15mm thick of specified sizes
stiffened with a suitable structural frame work fabricated
true to plane with a tolerance of + 1 mm within the plate.
c. Timber planks of not less than 20 mm actual thickness (
about 25 mm nominal thickness, but actual thickness shall
prevail) and of specified surface finish, width and
reasonable length.
2. Bottoms of beams, girders and ribs, and sides of columns
shall be made with :
a. Steel plates not less than 5mm thick of specified sizes
stiffened with as suitable structural frame work,
fabricated true to plans with a tolerance of(+/-)1mm within
the plate
b. Timber planks of 35 mm actual thickness and of specified
surface finish, width and reasonable length,
c. Plywood plates not less than 12 mm thick, of specified
sizes stiffened with a suitable timber framework.
3. Grooves :
At all construction joints, proper grooves as per design shall be
provided by fixing additional profiled timber strips to the
formwork in such a way that the joint line is recessed and the
cement mortar does not leak through the formwork during the
concreting of the next pour.
C.5 Erection of Formwork:
The following shall apply to all formwork :
1. All shutter planks and plates shall be adequately backed to the
satisfaction of the Engineer by a sufficient number and size of
walers or framework to ensure rigidity during concreting. All
shutters shall be adequately strutted, braced and propped to the
satisfaction of the Engineer to prevent deflection under
deadweight of concrete and superimposed live load of workmen,
materials and plant, and to withstand vibration. No joints in props
shall be allowed. Shuttering for sides of beams shall be properly
supported by inclined rakers or horizontal struts.
C.6 Vertical props shall be made of adjustable steel such as Acrow and shall
be supported on wedges or other measures shall be taken where the props
can be gently lowered vertically during removal of the formwork. Props
for an upper storey shall be placed directly over those in the storey
immediately below, and the lowest props shall bear on a sufficiently
strong area. Props shall have proper horizontal and vertical cross bracings
to prevent any sway or bucking under load.
1. Care shall be taken that all formwork is set plumb and true to
line and level or camber or batter where required and as specified
by the Engineer.
2. Provision shall be made for adjustment of supporting struts
where necessary. When reinforcement passes through the
formwork care shall be taken to ensure close fitting joints against
the steel bars so as to avoid loss of fines during the compaction of
concrete. The props shall rest on firm base and shall not be found
loose and wobbling.
3. If the formwork is held together by bolts or wires, these shall be
so fixed that no such iron fixtures iron will be exposed on surfaces
against which concrete is to be laid. In any case wires shall not
be used with exposed concrete formwork. The Engineer may at
his discretion allow the Contractor to use tie-bolts running through
the concrete and the Contractor shall decide the location and size
of such tie bolts in consultation with the Engineer. Holes left in
the concrete
by these tie-bolts shall be filled as specified by the Engineer at
no extra cost.
4. In the shuttering for beams, columns, and walls provision shall
be made for a port hole of convenient size so that all extraneous
materials that may be collected could be removed just prior to
concreting.
5. Formwork shall be so arranged as to permit removal of forms
without jarring the concrete. Wedges, clamps and bolts shall be
used wherever practicable instead of nails.
The formwork for beams and slabs shall be so erected that forms
on the sides of the beams and the soffit of slabs can be removed
without disturbing the beam bottoms or props under beams.
6. Surfaces of forms in contact with concrete shall be oiled with
mould oil of approved quality. If required by the Engineer the
Contractor shall execute different parts of the work with different
mould oils to enable the Engineer to select the most suitable. The
use of oil which results in blemishes on the surface of the
concrete shall not be allowed. Oil shall be applied before
reinforcement has been placed and care shall be taken that no oil
comes in contact with the reinforcement while it is being placed in
position. The form work shall be kept thoroughly wet during
concreting and the whole time that it is left in place.
7. Immediately before concreting is commenced, the formwork shall
be carefully examined to ensure the following :
a. Removal of all dirt, shavings, sawdust and other refuse by
brushing, washing, or by compressed air.
b. The tightness of joints between panels of facing forms and
between these and any hardened core.
c. The correct location of tie bars, bracing and spacers, and
especially connections of bracing.
d. That all wedges are secured and firm in position.
e. That provision is made for traffic on formwork not to bear
directly on reinforcing steel.
f. Properly cured concrete cover blocks of the same mix as
per parent concrete with binding wire embedded therein
shall be used in sufficient number for maintaining specified
concrete cover for reinforcement at the sides and bottoms
of reinforced concrete members. These cover blocks should
be adequately fastened to the reinforced steel by the
binding wire embedded in the cover blocks. Alternatively
use of approved plastic cover blocks may be allowed at the
discretion of the Engineer-in-charge. Use of stone or
marble pieces as cover blocks shall not be permitted.
8. The Contractor shall obtain the Engineer‟s approval for
dimensional accuracies of the work and for the general
arrangement of propping and bracing. (IS:3696 - Safety Code of
Scaffolds and Ladders, IS:4014 Steel Tubular Scaffolding I & II)
It is imperative that for scaffolding heights of 3.6m and above
timber posts or steel scaffolding be used with adequate bracings
in horizontal and vertical planes. Bracings with bamboos will
not be permitted. When timber posts are used the bracings shall
consist of minimum 25mm thick wooden planks fixed to each
post with at least two nails. The Contractor shall be entirely
responsible for the adequacy of propping, and for keeping the
wedges and other locking arrangements undisturbed through the
decentering period.
(IS 8989 safety code for erection of concrete framed structures)
9. Formwork shall be continuously watched during the process of
concreting. If during concreting any weakness develops and
formwork shows any distress the work shall be stopped and
remedial action taken.
C. 7 FORMWORK & FINISHING OF EXPOSED CONCRETE WORK
The surface finish for formed and unformed surfaces are classified
and defined as below. Surface irregularities permitted for the various
classes of finishes are termed either "abrupt" or " gradual". Fins or
offsets caused by displaced or misplaced form sheathing ,lining or
form sections, by loose knots in form lumber or by otherwise
defective form lumber are considered abrupt irregularities. All other
cases are described as gradual irregularities. Gradual irregularities
will be measured with a template consisting of a straight edge for
plain surfaces or its equivalent for curved surface. The length of
template for testing gradual irregularities on formed surfaces shall be
1.5 m in length, the permissible gradual irregularities being measured
over this length of the template.
Special surface, finish and treatment falling outside of these classes but
defined elsewhere by the Engineer/Architect shall also form part of these
specifications.
C. 8 Camber:
Forms and false work shall be level or cambered as indicated in the
drawings or as instructed by the Engineer.
C. 9 Tolerances:
In accordance with IS:456.
C.10 Age of Concrete at Removal of Formwork
In accordance with IS:456.
The Engineer may vary the periods specified in IS:456 if he considers
it necessary. Immediately after the forms are removed, they shall be
thoroughly cleaned with a jet of water and a soft brush. Thorough
cleaning Buffing of steel shuttering material after each use by
mechanical buffing machine is a must.
C.11 Stripping of Formwork
Formwork shall be removed carefully without jarring the concrete, and
curing of such exposed surface of concrete shall be commenced
immediately. Concrete surfaces to be exposed shall, where required by
the Engineer, be rubbed down with carborundum stone to obtain a
smooth and even finish. Where the concrete requires plastering or other
finish later the concrete surface shall be immediately hacked lightly all
over as directed by the Engineer. No extra charge will be allowed to the
Contractor for such work on concrete surfaces after removal of forms.
C.12 Reuse of Forms
The Contractor shall not be permitted reuse of timber facing formwork
brought new on the Works more than 5 times for ex posed concrete
formwork. 5 uses shall be permitted only if forms are properly cared
for, stored and repaired after each use. The Engineer may in his absolute
discretion order rejection of any forms he considers unfit for use for a
particular item, and order removal from the site of any forms he considers
unfit for use in the Works. Used forms shall not be brought on the site.
Pitted, perforated, damaged, bent, warped or out of shape steel plates shall
not be used as shuttering materials under any circumstances.
C.13 Formwork for Precast Concrete :
1. The Provisions in this section shall be considered supple mentary
to the general provisions stated under Formwork. Precast concrete
members and panels shall be made in accurately constructed
steel moulds, on a properly prepared casting bed. All aspects of the
making, curing and erection of precast units shall be subject to the
approval of the Engineer.
2. The formwork should be so designed that it does not restrain the
shrinkage movements. The formwork shall be of sturdy
construction with special consideration to shutter vibrators when
used. At edges and joints the formwork should be designed and
sealed so that no cement grout can escape and there is no wedging
or keying to the concrete. The effect of curing on the formwork
should be given special consideration depending on care, curing ,
erection and maintenance after stripping the following number of
uses can be made. Steel Moulds - 50 to 100 number of uses.
3 Stripping :
As soon as the precast units have attained sufficient strength,
the formwork shall be stripped. The precast unit shall be lifted
uniformly out of the formwork without being subjected to tilting
or restraint effects.
_____________________
Signature of Tenderer
Date :
SECTION - D
REINFORCEMENT
D.1 Steel :
Steel used in the Works shall be high yield strength deformed steel bars
conforming to IS:1786-1985(latest revision) manufactured by those
agencies having BIS license. Any other steel specified for
reinforcement shall conform in every respect to the latest relevant
Indian Standard Specifications and shall be of tested quality under the
ISI Certification Scheme.
All reinforcement work shall be executed in conformity with the
drawings supplied and instructions given by the Engineer and shall
generally be carried out in accordance with the relevant Indian
Standard Specifications (IS:2502).
D.2 Inspection & testing :
Every bar shall be inspected before assembling on the Works and any
defective, brittle, excessively rusted or burnt bars shall be removed.
Cracked ends of bars shall be cut out.
Specimens sufficient for three Tensile Tests for each different size of bar
for each consignment delivered, or for 10 tonnes of supply of that size,
whichever is less shall be sampled and tested by the Contractor.
Batches shall be rejected if the average results of each batch are not in
accordance with the specifications.
D.3 Lapping & Welding :
1. As far as possible bars of the maximum length available shall be
used. Laps shown on drawings or otherwise specified by the
Engineer will be based on the use by the Contractor of bars of
maximum length. In case the Contractor wishes to use shorter
bars, laps shall be provided at the Contractor's cost in the manner
and at the locations approved by the Engineer. In any case laps ,
provided will not be measured for payment purpose . The rate is
inclusive of all such provision.
2. As and when necessary welded laps shall be provided as
specified by the Engineer, and shall be in accordance with I.S.
code 2571 requirements.
D.4 Spacing, supporting and cleaning
1. All reinforcement shall be placed and maintained in the
positions shown on the drawings.
2. The Contractor shall provide approved types of supports as specified
on the drawings for maintaining the top bars of the slab in position
during concreting. All cover blocks shall be of concrete (not sand
cement mortar) and of the same strength as that of the surrounding
concrete and properly compacted and vibrated on a vibrating table.
They shall be annular in shape and not cubical. They shall be
cured for a minimum period of 21 days before they are used in the
Works.
3. Spacer bars between two closely positioned layers of bars shall be
placed not more than 1 m apart. The diameter of the spacer shall be
minimum 25 mm.
4. In the case of columns and walls, vertical bars shall be kept in normal
position with timber templates having slots accurately cut in for bar
position. Such templates shall be removed after the concreting has
progressed upto a level. Bars crossing each other, where required,
shall be secured by binding wire(annealed) of size not less than 1 mm
and conforming to IS:280 in such a manner that they do not slip over
each other at the time of fixing and concreting.
5. 18 S.W.G G.I. wire shall be used as binding wire. All frame
Crossing one another shall be bound with this wire twisted tight
to make the skelton on network rigid so that the reinforcement is
not displaced during placing of concrete.
6. Bars must be cleaned before concreting commences of all scale,
rust or partially set concrete which may have been deposited
there during placing of a previous lift of concrete.
The bars shall be cleaned with dry gunny bags if they are coated
lightly with rust or other impurities. On no account shall the
bars be oiled or painted nor shall mould oil used on the formwork
be allowed to come in contact with the bars. Cement wash to
bars will not be permitted.
D.5 Welding
1. Wherever specified all welding shall be carried out in
accordance with IS:2571. Only qualified welders shall be
permitted to carry out such welding.
2. For cold twisted reinforcement welding operations must be
controlled to prevent supply of large amounts of heat larger
than what can be dissipated. The extreme non twisted end
portion shall be cut off before welding. low hydrogen electrodes
with rutile coating should be used.
3. The welding procedure shall be approved by the Engineer and
tests shall be made to prove the soundness of the welded
connection.
D.6 Measurement for payment Measurement for payment
Reinforcement shall be measured in length separately for different
diameters as actually used in the works excluding overlaps and over
weights. From the length so measured the weight of reinforcement shall
be calculated in tonnes on the basis of standard weights as per
IS:1732. Lengths shall include hooks at ends. Wastage, overlaps,
coupling, welded joints. spacer bars, chairs overweight of bars above
standard weight etc., and annealed G.I. wire (18 SWG) for binding shall
not be measured and cost of these items shall be deemed to be included
in the rates of reinforcement.
The contract unit rate for reinforcement shall include cost of all steel,
its bending, placing ,binding, welding if required and fixing in
position as shown on the drawings and as directed by the Engineer. It
shall also include cost of all devices for keeping reinforcement in
approved position, cost of jointing as per approved method , and all
wastage, overlaps and spacer bars.
The rate for anti-corrosive treatment shall be per metric tonne of the steel
treated and use in work and shall be deemed to include infrastructure
and all material required for anticorrosive treatment, labour and
expertise required to carry out the work and transportation, if any. The
rate shall be quoted separately. The basis for measurement being
same as under reinforcement. Laps, spacer bars, chairs etc. will have to
be treated., however they will not be considered for measurement
purpose.
REINFORCED BARS
The reinforcing bars to be provided with Fusion Bonded Epoxy coating shall conforming
to the tender specifications and relevant I.S. Specifications. Inspite of producing test
certificates by contractor for the proper quality of reinforcing bar, the quality of steel
could also be tested by the FBE coating form at plant site for bend test before doing
coating and that if the reinforcing bar fails in bend test, then it shall not be provided with
FBEC and in that case, cost of conveyance of such steel to plant and removing from plant
shall be of the contractor. The rechecking quality of steel, for bend test will be done by
the coating agency in the presence of contractor provided the contractor choose to remain
present.
Reinforcing bars to be coated shall be fresh from rolling mills as far as possible. If the
bars are very much rusted in quality before providing FBEC, such bars shall have a loss
of weight the contractor‟s risk and these bars shall be rejected.
To ascertain the loss in weight of reinforcing bars on account of removal of rust during
coating, random weightement before and after coating shall be done and that loss in
weight shall be borne by the contractor. Such underweight reinforcement shall be
rejected.
COATING BARS WITH FBEC
The FBEC coating shall be done confirming to I.S. code 13620: 1993 with additional
stipulations.
The fusion Bonded Epoxy coating shall be carried out by an authorized FBE coating
agency approved by department. Patch up materials shall be procured in sealed containers
with certificates from coating agency for supply of such patch up materials.
The tender rate for FBEC coating shall include using PVC coating G.I. Binding wires of
18G.
TESTS FOR FBE COATING REINFORCING BARS
The contractor shall produce certificate from the FBE coating agency that the quality of
powder epoxy material and other components of FBE conform to I.S. 13620:1993. Such
certificates shall accompany each delivery challan of coated bars while leaving the plant.
The contractor may also carry out such tests at plant jointly or separately of the coating
agency to confirm use of proper quality of coating material.
The coated reinforcement bars shall be tested at plant by the contractor. Test reports shall
be jointly signed by authorized representatives of contractor and the coating agency. The
tests on coated bars shall be as per I.S. for the following tests.
a. Thickness
b. Continuity
c. Adhesion
The frequency of tests shall be for the thickness of coating minimum two bars of each
size from each production shifts.
Random tests shall be made for continuity of coating.
Inspite of above tests and test certificates produced by the contractor and coating agency,
the Department / Owner reserves the rights to carry out independent tests at coating plant
for cross checking. The contactor‟s / Owner‟s cross checking and that if the coating
quality is not approved by the contractor / owner the decision of the department / owner
to reject or repair the coating shall be final and binding on all parties.
Thickness of Fusion Bonded Epoxy coating shall be 200-250 microns.
HANDING
The coated bars shall be carefully handled in order not to drop them, not to rub them on
hard surface or against another coated bar while conveying, stacking, placing or stacking
of fabricated bars and that for this purpose , wooden packing batons shall be used at
spacing of not more than 60 cms. The coated bars shall be tied to make bundles with PVC
binding materials to avoid damages to coating.
The coated bars shall be stacked with separation gap between ground and bars with
wooden batons between rows of bars or bundles of such tied bars, such wooden or
paddled contract shall be at spacing of not more than 60 cms.
The cut ends of bars shall be touched up with special touch up materials of specifications
as provided by coating agency. There shall be minimum time gap to repair the cut ends
and damaged portions with touch up materials and that failure to do so may cause
complete rejection of the coated bars. The cut ends and damaged portions shall be
touched up with repair patch up materials within four hours time gap. All damages to
coating in handling etc. shall be repaired irrespective of their size. This stipulation
supersedes provision of I.S. code.
No payment will be made for coated bars which are not used in the work and that if they
were paid either on account of coating of the rejectable part of bars or doing extra
fabrication etc. the amount paid will be recovered from contractor. The contractor will be
paid for the same quantity of steel bars used in the work and paid under relevant item.
While bending the bars, the pins of work benches shall be provided with PVC or plastic
sleeves. It is preferable that, contractor install bar bending machine suitable for FBE
coated bars and that each bending operation is done in a time of not less than 90 secs.
The coated steel shall not be directly exposed to sun rays and rains and shall be protected
with opaque polythelene planks or such other approved materials.
While doing concreting, the workmen or trolleys shall not directly more on coated bars
but can move on wooden planks placed on the bars by contractor.
Inspite of all tests certificates, if the coated bars are rough handled by contractor either
during transport , fabrication , stacking , placing and concreting etc. or handled in such a
manner as to damage the coating for area or portion more than reasonable, the Engineer
in charge or Department / Owner reserves the right to reject the FBE coated bars and that
if rejected then such rejected bars shall be removed by contractor from work site within
three days. The decision of Engineer in charge will be final as to reject the bars with
damaged coating or to allow repairing the coating, or to get it recoated entirely at
contractor‟s cost.
SECTION – E
STRUCTURAL STEEL WORKS
1.0 SCOPE
These specifications cover the requirements of material, workmanship, and protective measures
etc., of structural steel work in general. Specifications for special items of work used in structural
steel construction are given separately.
2.0 GENERAL
The provisions of the latest Indian Standards listed below, but not restricted to, form part of these
specifications:
IS 104 - Ready mixed paint, brushing, zinc chrome, priming
IS 123- Ready mixed paint, brushing, finishing, semi-gloss, for general purposes, to
Indian Standard Colours and red oxide (Colour unspecified)
No. 445 Venetian Red
No.449 light Purple brown
No.446 Red Oxide
No. 451 Chocolate
No.448 Deep Indian Red
No.473 Gulf Red and Red
Oxide (Colour Unspecified)
IS 226 - Structural Steel (Standard Quality)
IS 800 - Code of practice for use of structural steel in general building construction.
IS 813 - Scheme for symbols for welding.
IS 814 - Covered electrodes for metal are welding of structural steel (Part 1 & 11).
IS 815 - Classification and coding of covered electrodes for metal are welding of
structural steels.
IS 816 - Code of practice for use of metal arc welding for general construction in mild steel.
IS 817 - Code of practice for training and testing of metal arc welders.
IS 822 - Code of procedures for inspection of welds.
IS 823 - Code of procedure for manual metal are welding of mild steel.
IS 961 - Structural steel (high tensile).
IS 1024 - Code of practice for use of welding in bridges.
IS 1148 - Hot rolled steel rivet bars (upto 40 mm diameters) for structural purposes.
IS 1387- General requirements for the supply of metallurgical material.
IS 1477- Part I, Code of practice for painting of ferrous metals in buildings - pre-
treatment.
IS 1599 - Method for bend test for steel products other than sheets, strip, wire and tube.
IS 1 608 - Method for tensile testing of steel products.
IS 1731 - Dimensions for steel flats for structural and general engineering purposes.
IS 1852 - Rolling and cutting tolerances for hot-rolled steel products.
IS 191 5 - Code of practice for steel bridges.
IS 2074 - Ready Mixed paint, air drying red-oxidezine chrome, priming
IS 2102 - Allowable deviations for dimensions without specified tolerances.
15 3757 - High tensile friction grip bolts.
IS 4000 - Code of practice for assembly of structural joints rising high tensile friction grip
fasteners.
IS 7318 - Part I Fusion welding of steel.
Other I.S. Codes and I.R.C. codes pertaining to the items of structural steel not specifically listed
shall also be deemed to come under the purview of this clause.
3.0 MATERIALS, INSPECTION & TESTING
All supplies of structural steel and other materials specified shall be supported by manufacturers
test certificates showing that the materials meet the requirements of these specifications.
The engineer-in-charge may require to get further samples tested and all the cost of taking samples
and testing the same by the approved agency shall be borne by the Contractor.
4.0 FABRICATION
4.1 Fabrication Drawings and Approval:
The fabrication drawings shall be prepared on the basis of design drawings supplied by the
designer. The fabrication drawings showing details of connection are required to be supported by
the calculations showing adequacy of the connections. The fabrication drawings and calculations
shall be prepared by qualified consulting engineer and fabricators. All charges required to be made
by the Engineer-in-Charge shall be incorporated at no extra cost.
4.2 Workmanship:
Workmanship shall be equal to the best general practice in current fabrication practice. The
methods followed in cutting, straightening, finishing and shaping, bindings of members and holing
for rivets, bolts or pins etc., and any other operations shall be performed in such a way as not to
adversely affect the structural members in any way. The machinery and equipment‟s as well as
the method of working, shall be approved by the Engineer-in-charge.
The fabrication work shall be carried out by the qualified operators.
4.3 WELDING
Welding and weld procedure qualifications should be done in accordance with applicable
provisions of the IS standards. All the welders should be got qualified before employing them on
the job and requalified at frequent intervals.
5.0 TEMPORARY STORAGE
a) No dragging of steel shall be permitted. All steel shall be stored 30 cm above ground on
suitable packing to avoid damage during the monsoons. Steel shall be stored in the
order of erection with erection marks visible. long members shall be supported on skids
placed near enough together to prevent injury from deflection. Storage areas shall be
prepared and maintained by the Contractor. Any steel stored near excavations shall be
removed immediately to a safe distance to avoid burial under debris.
b) Adequate handling facilities shall be available at Storage place. The temporary protective
paint shall not be damaged and if so damaged shall be immediately made good.
6.0 PAINTING
6.1 Surface Preparation
Steel surface to be painted shall be prepared in thorough manner with a view to ensuring complete
removal of mill scale by grit and shot blasting to achieve finish to grade SA 2.5.
Primary coat shall be applied as soon as practicable after grit and sand blasting. All slag from
welds shall be removed before painting. Care shall be taken to brush the surface clean prior to
painting. Surfaces shall be maintained dry and free from dirt and oil. Work out of doors in frosty
or humid weather shall be avoided. The undercoat and finishing coat shall be of the same
manufacturer. Successive coats of paints shall be of different shades and colours and each shall be
allowed to dry thoroughly before the next is applied. particular care shall be taken with the
priming and painting of edges corners, welds and rivets.
6.2 Final Paint:
All paints shall be prepared and applied in strict accordance with the manufacturer‟s data sheets or
written instructions. No thinners or cleaners shall be employed other than those recommended by
the paint manufacturer. Paint with a limited shelf life shall not be used after the period stated in the
manufacturer's data sheet.
After materials have been accepted by the Contractor as being in proper condition, he shall be
responsible for their safety and protection from loss or damage of any nature until the completion
of work. The contractor shall be similarly responsible for surplus materials until they are returned
and accepted by the Engineer-in-Charge.
7.0 ERECTION:
7.1 Preliminaries:
a) The Contractor shall complete all preliminary works at site, well before the arrival of
structural steel, such as keeping in readiness electrical winches, mobile cranes, gin poles,
compressors, all tools and tackles, rivet guns, welding sets, torque wrenches etc. and
work that may be necessary so as to start erection immediately after the arrival of steel at
site.
b) The contractor shall furnish at his own expenses, the necessary non-inflammable staging
and hoisting or equipment‟s required for the erection work and shall remove and take
them away after the completion of the job. The contractor shall also provide necessary
passage ways, fences, safety belts, helmets, lights and other fittings to the satisfaction of
the Engineer-in-Charge and for protection of his men and materials.
7.2 Approval of Erection Scheme:
All structures shall be erected as shown on drawings. The contractor shall carry out all erection
work in the sequence required by the Engineer-in-Charge. The method of erection and complete
erection scheme shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer-in-Charge and shall be modified
as required by the Engineer-in-Charge. This, however, will not relieve the Contractor of the
responsibility for safe and expeditious completion of the work, its quality and accuracy.
7.3 Workmanship:
a) Unless specified herein, all erection work will be carried out in accordance with the
latest edition of Indian Standard code of practice for use of structural steel in General
Building Construction IS 800 and AISC code wherever applicable.
b) Drifts should be used only for drawing the work into position and must not be used to
such an extent so as to destroy the holes. Drifts of a larger size than the nominal diameter
of the holes or burrs must be rectified to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge.
Correction of minor misfits and reasonable amount of reaming and cutting of excess
stock from field rivets, if any, shall be considered as a part of erection. Any error in shop
work which prevents proper fit on a moderate amount of reaming and slight chipping or
cutting shall be immediately reported to the Engineer-in-Charge. The contractor's work
shall also include straightening and repairing of materials slightly damaged and drilling
some holes in members where required. This shall all be included in the unit rate quoted.
c) Structural steel frames shall be erected plumb and true to tolerances indicated elsewhere
in these specifications. All steel columns and beams shall be checked for plumb and level
individually before and after connections are made. Temporary bracings shall be
introduced wherever necessary to take care of all loads to which the structure may be
subjected including erection equipment and the operation thereof. Such bracings shall be
left in place as long as may be required for safety. Proper size steel cables, slings etc.,
shall be used to avoid any damage due to accidents.
d) As erection progresses, the work shall be securely bolted to take care of all dead load,
wind and erection stresses. No final welding or bolting shall be done until the structure
has been properly aligned and approved by the Engineer-in-Charge.
e) The Engineer-in-Charge shall be immediately informed of any errors observed/found in
the fabricated steel which prevents proper assembling and fitting up of parts in field by a
moderate amount of repairing.
f) The contractor shall protect all existing plants, embedded parts, all piping, conduits,
equipment and facilities against damage during erection. The contractor shall perform his
work in a manner which in no way endangers the operations of any existing plant or
structures or hinders other construction activities.
g) Holes may be required to be drilled at site for installing equipment or steel furnished by
other manufacturers or other contractors. The information for this will be supplied to the
Contractor by the Engineer-in-Charge before or after erection of the steel.
h) In case of any faulty erection, all such dismantling and re-erection required will be at
Contractor's cost.
i) Shim stock of mild steel plates required for erection will be set, levelled and prepared for
grouting. Where flat bearing beams occur, bearing plates shall be set, levelled and
prepared for grouting.
7.4 Tolerance .
The erection shall be carried out to the requirements stated in Section 7 (h) of AISC Code
Standard practice, except that Structural Steel members be erected plumb with a tolerance not
exceeding in 1000. Column splices and other compression joints which depend upon contact
bearing, upon completion, shall bear with respect to the centred of the contact area.
At least 65% of the entire contact area shall be in full bearing and the separation of any remaining
portion shall not exceed 0.5 mm except locally at toes of flanges where a 50% greater separation is
permissible. Otherwise corrective measures as specified by the Engineer-in-Charge shall be taken.
7.5 Connection
a) H.S.F.G. Bolts :
The Contractor shall obtain the prior written approval of the Engineer-in-Charge for the
method proposed to be adopted for tightening the High Strength Friction Grip bolts. For
preliminary assembly and before use of these bolts he shall use his own erection bolts.
b) Bolting / Riveting :
In general bolts and rivets will conform to the relevant Indian Standards. The methods of
establishing connections use of equipment, etc., shall be as approved by the Engineer-in-
charge.
c) Welding :
Welding where specified shall be performed by the shielded electric are, gas or other
approved methods, using coated electrodes and/or low hydrogen electrode conforming to
IS:814. The welding process and the qualification of the welding operators shall conform
to IS:81 7 and IS:823 and shall be got approved before commencement of
any work of welding.
All field assembly and welding shall be executed in accordance with the requirements for shop
fabrications excepting which manifestly apply to shop conditions only. Where the steel has been
delivered, painted, the paint shall be removed before field welding for a distance of at least 50 mm
on either side of the joints. All welds should be free from defects like blow holes, lack of
penetration, slag intrusion etc. All welds shall be cleaned of slab or flux and shall show uniform
smoothness of weld metal, feather edges without overlap and free from porosity. Where a thick
weld is required the weld metal shall be deposited in successive layers. Each layer except the last,
shall be preened moderately before the next layer is applied. The contractor shall be responsible
for the quality of the work performed by his welding group.
If required, the Engineer-in-Charge may test the welds by non-destructive tests. Any defective
welds shall be made good by the Contractor at no extra cost and the cost of non-destructive testing
for such defective welds shall be borne by the Contractor.
d) Specification for pin and pinned connections:
Pin Material:
Rolled steel pins and rollers, including those made from slabs shall comply with the requirements
of IS: 226 - Specification and structural steel and IS:2062 - Specification for structural steel
(fusion welding quality) or IS:961 - Specification for high tensile structural steel.
Forged steel pins shall have a tensile strength of 44 to 50 kg/Sq.mm. or 57 to 63 kg/sq.mm. to
conform to IS:1875 - Specification for carbon steel billets, blooms and slabs for forging. Steel
casting for cast steel pins shall conform to grade 1 or 3 of IS: 1 030.
Pin Holes:
Pin holes shall be bored true to gauge, smooth, straight, at right angle with the axis of the member
and parallel with each other unless otherwise required, in built up members the boring shall be
done after the members have been welded. The specified dia of pin shall be its minimum dia. Hole
dia can be maximum + 0.5 mm more than pin dia.
Pins:
The pins shall be parallel throughout and shall have a smooth surface free from flaws. At ends of
pins there shall be slot to facilitate in driving the pin.
Pins more than 175mm in length of diameter shall be forged and annealed. Coffer pins shall be
provided on both sides of the pin.
8.0 MESURMENTS & RATES:
The contractor will be paid on the basis of unit rates quotes for structural steel work.
Measurements will be based on the actual weight of structural steel erected as shown on drawings
or as specified.
The weight of the temporary bracings, shims and erection bolts, fields welding, if any will not be
taken into account for purpose of payment. The rate for erection shall be inclusive of structural
welding wherever specified and painting as called for the specification and drawings. All bolts,
nuts and washers which are permanently incorporated in the structures other than those
specifically paid for separately shall be provided by the contractor and the rate quoted for the
erection of structural steel shall include the cost of supply and erection of such bolts, nuts and
washers.
The unit rates shall include all materials, labour, supervision, tools and plant, apparatus, conveying
equipment, incidental expenses etc., other than those supplied free by Engineer-in-Charge, nuts,
bolts and washers etc. The unit rate also includes removal of paint from members encased in
concrete.
8.1 Grouting of Foundation Pockets
This specification refers to the grouting of pockets left in the machine foundation to be filled up
later after the installation of the machinery and also the grout injected below the base plates.
The pockets are to be grouted with concrete grit made of 1 part of cement with 2 part of grit (size
10mm and below) by weight. The water added shall be just sufficient to make the mix workable.
In any case water cement ratio should not exceed 0.4 to 0.45. The grit is nothing but smaller
particles of the coarse aggregate.
Non-shrinkage additive should be added to the six as per manufactures specifications. The mix
shall be poured into the pockets layer by layer, with each layer not exceeding 10 cm in depth. Each
layer shall be well vibrated before the next layer is laid, after the pocket is completely filled. The
top shall be trawled smooth. Curing shall start 12 hours after the finishing of work and shall be
continued for 15 days. Curing shall be done as per the good practices.
8.2 Measurement and Payments
The measurement is based on volume of the pocket grouted or the volume of grout filled up below
the plates, as the case may be rounded off to the nearest 0.01 Cu. m. The unit of payment is in Cu.
m of grout.
9. STEEL TUBES FOR STRUCTURAL PURPOSES.
All structural steel tubular members shall confirm to IS: 1161-1979, grade of steel shall be Yst :
240. All other specifications including fabrication, erection, painting, measurement etc. shall
conform to the detailed specifications given under structural steel works.
SECTION - F ( PART -I)
MASONRY - BRICK WORK
1.0 Indian Standards to be followed are :
All relevant Standards as specified elsewhere in this Volume are applicable.
Indian Standards to be followed are :
1. IS 226 Specification for steel standard quality.
2. IS 269 Specification for ordinary and low heat Portland
cement.
3. IS 405 Specification for lead, sheet and strips.
4. IS 412 Specification for expanded metal steel sheets for
general purpose.
Part 1 Mild steel and medium tensile steel bars.
6. IS 712 Specification for building lime.
7. IS 1069 Code of Practice for laying damp proofing treatment
using bitumen felt.
8. IS 1077 Specification for common burnt clay building bricks.
9. IS 1322 Specification for Bitumen felts for waterproofing and
damp proofing.
10. IS 1635 Code of Practice for field slaking of building lime
and preparation of putty.
11. IS 2116 Specification for sand for masonry mortar.
12. IS 2212 Code of Practice for Brick work.
13. IS 2250 Code of practice for preparation and use of masonry
mortars.
14. SP 27 Handbook of method of measurement for building
works.
2.0 MATERIALS
2.1 Bricks
2.1.1. Bricks shall be sound, hard, well-burnt, uniform in size, shape and colour,
homogeneous in texture, giving a metallic ringing sound, free from flaws, cracks,
holes, lumps or grit and arises should be square, straight and sharply defined.
They shall not break when struck against each other and dropped flat from a
height of 1m to the ground. They shall conform to Table No. 1 (reproduced as
table 2 of enclosed Annexture) of IS 1077 giving classes of common burnt clay
bricks.
2.1.2. Bricks shall be as specified and detailed in the BOQ. It shall have to be approved
prior to procurement. Bricks shall be obtained from an approved source and shall
be of uniform colour, size, shape. Bricks shall have smooth rectangular faces with
sharp straight rectangle edges. Maximum absorption shall not be more than 15%
of its dry weight on immersion in water for 24 hours. Minimum crushing strength
shall be 35 kg/sq.cm if not specified in the BOQ.
2.1.3. Bricks of approved quality and quantity shall have to be procured by the
contractor at the desired time. No delay or extra cost due to non-availability shall
be accepted. The contractor is obliged to carry out the work as specified. It shall
be the responsibility of the contractor to procure sufficient quantities of bricks and
stack them at site or elsewhere to avoid delays.
2.2 Mortars
2.2.1 Mortars for masonry shall be prepared in accordance with IS 2250 code of
practice for preparation and use of masonry mortars.
2.2.2 Cement
Cement used shall be ordinary portland cement conforming to IS 269 or as
approved by the Engineer-in-charge.
2.2.3 Lime
Lime used shall conform to IS 712 specification for Building Limes. Field slaking
shall be done as per IS 1635 code of practice for field slaking of lime and
preparation of putty.
2.2.4 Water
Water used for masonry shall be clean and free from injurious amounts of
deleterious materials and shall conform to specification given in concrete and
mortar section.
2.2.5 Fine aggregate (sand)
Sand shall conform to IS 2116 specification for masonry mortars.
2.3 Damp proof course
Deleted
2.4 Metal reinforcement
Metal reinforcement used in brick masonry shall conform to the following Indian
Standards Specifications.
a. IS 432 Specification for Mild steel and Medium tensile steel bars.
b. IS 1566 Specification for steel fabric or hard drawn steel wire.
c. IS 412 Specification for Expanded metal steel for general purpose.
d. IS 226 Specification for other suitable reinforcement such as
galvanized hoop iron.
3.0 MORTAR
Mortar shall be as specified under the respective item in the BOQ. Its preparation
and material shall comply with concrete and mortar section of this volume.
4.0 WORKMANSHIP
4.1 Bricks used for masonry in cement mortar or cement-lime or mortar shall be
soaked by immersing in water (so as to prevent bubbling) at least one hour prior
to start of actual laying.
4.2 Bricks shall be laid in English bond unless otherwise specified. Half or cut bricks
shall be used only for the purpose of bond and at no other place. Cut bricks shall
be allowed in work.
4.3 Work shall be true to horizontal lines and perfect plumb. Vertical joints shall be
truly vertical and those in alternate courses shall be in the same vertical line.
Joints of each course shall be within the limit of 6mm to 10mm depending upon
the size of bricks. Total height of 9cm brick with the 5 courses and 5 mortar joints
shall be 50cm. In no case shall joint thickness of horizontal and vertical be more
than stated above. Joints should be filled to full depth and checked each time.
Prior to start of work it must be noted and checked that bricks on top are full-size
bricks (flat or brick on edge). To achieve this, precautions should be taken from
the start of the first layer. Thickness of joints shall so adjusted so as to have full
bricks on top. Also it must be noted and checked that all horizontal joints on every
floor are at the same level, so as to allow proper bonding at junctions.
Required datum levels must be established throughout the floor and only then
should work start.
It is equally important to take into account levels of window sills, lintels, etc.
while finalising courses and joint thickness.
In normal practice architects do take care of these while finalising levels, but it is
difficult to expect the ideal situation at all places. In such situation, the decision of
the EIC shall be taken and in providing brick on edge, concrete sills, etc.
In addition, for convenience and speed, gauge boards of exact width shall be fixed
at the edges of masonry to correct line and plumb. These boards shall be marked
with course levels to achieve exact height of each course and full bricks at the top.
4.4 One or half brick thick wall shall have minimum one face in true plumb.
4.5 It is imperative to raise the brick work uniformly over complete work joined
together. If this is not possible, racked brick work shall be done at 45 degrees to
the vertical. To thing shall not be accepted.
4.6 All iron fixtures, pipe outlets, hold-fasts for doors and windows shall be fixed
when the brick work is in progress. It must be embedded in cement mortar or
concrete as specified or as directed by the EIC. Required treatment to fixtures
shall be carried out prior to embedding.
4.7 To achieve better results and proper working, the following tools should be
available with masons working at site :
1. Spirit level.
2. Wooden/Aluminium straight edge : 3m long.
3. 3 meter steel tape
4. Right angle 1/2 meter long
5. Line and pin strings
6. Plumb
7. Storey rods
4.8 Joint thickness shall be provided as discussed above. Joints shall be filled to full
depth before second course is laid. Frogs shall be upward at all times. Joints shall
be raked back to a minimum 10 to 15 mm while the mortar is wet. Surface of
brick work shall be cleaned with coil string, wire brushes, etc. to keep the surface
free for the next operation. All dropped and spoiled mortar, brickbats, etc. shall be
cleared from the floor before work is closed for the day.
4.9 Protection and curing .
Wet work shall be protected from rains by suitable covering. Masonry in cement
or cement-lime mortar shall be kept constantly moist on all the faces for a
minimum period of ten days. The top of masonry shall be left flooded with water
at close of the day.
In case of brick work in lime mortar, curing shall commence two days after laying
of masonry and shall continue for the next seven days.
4.10 Scaffolding independent of brick work i.e. double scaffolding shall be provided. It
should be tied to brick work or structure at suitable intervals in both directions.
Two rows of plank shall be provided all around. Planks shall be at least 50mm
thick and well-tied to scaffolding. Railing to the outside face shall be provided.
While erecting scaffolding. the following points must be noted and closely
followed :
1. Minimum number of holes in the horizontal direction. Holes shall be
formed by omitting header brick.
2. No holes in pillars under 1 meter in width.
3. No holes near the skew backs of arches.
4. Scaffolding must be sound and strong and easy to maintain.
5. Holes left must be closed white finishing the plaster.
5.0 TYPES OF BRICK WORK.
5.1 Walls 230mm thick or more.
5.1.1 Walls of 230mm thickness or more shall be constructed with approved and
selected bricks. Mortar shall be as specified in the BOQ.
Points discussed above shall be followed for workmanship.
Brick wall of 230mm thickness shall be constructed from one side and one face
shall be true and plumb. Thicker walls shall be constructed with masons on both
faces and both the faces shall be true and plumb.
5.1.2 Measurements shall be in cubic meters.
5.2 Half brick work - plain or reinforced.
5.2.1 115mm thick brick work shall be called as half brick work. It shall be built by
laying bricks in stretcher bond. Mortar shall be as specified in the BOQ.
These walls may be used for forming cavities or partition wall inside building.
Brick work shall reinforced with 6mm M.S. dia bars, 2 bars at every third layer.
Other reinforcing materials such as GI metal lath GI hoop iron 25mm x 1.6mm
shall be used at every third layer as detailed by the manufacture. Embedding of
reinforcement shall be done very carefully. All precautions shall be taken so that
edges are not exposed. Lapping of bars and lath shall be proper and staggered.
5.2.2 Measurement shall be in square meters. Reinforcement shall not be measured
separately.
6.0 RATE
6.1 The rate shall include the cost of all the materials and labour as described in their
respective items of work and for all the operations as detailed in the respective
specifications for the varies items of work. Brick on edge courses, cut brick
corners, splays, reveals, cavity walls, shall be included in BRICK WORK - for the
purpose of payment.
6.2 The following operations shall be included in the rate for BRICK WORK :
a. Raking out joints for plastering or for pointing done as a separate process
or for finishing joints flush as work proceeds.
b. Preparing tops and sides of existing walls and the like for raising :
c. Rough cutting and waste for forming gables, cores of arches, splays at
leaves and the like and all rough cutting in the body of brick-work, unless
otherwise stated;
d. Plumbing to angles and battered surfaces.
e. Forming reveals to jambs where fair cutting on exposed faces is not
involved.
f. Leaving holes for pipes, etc.
g. Building-in holdfasts, air bricks, fixing bricks, etc.
h. Building-in ends of beams, joists, slabs, lintels, sills, trusses etc.
i. Forming opening and flues for which no deduction is made.
j. Bedding wall plates, lintels, sills, roof tiles, corrugated sheets, etc. in or on
walls, if not covered in their respective trade.
k. Leaving chases of section not exceeding 50cm in girth.
SECTION - F ( PART II )
MASONRY - CONCRETE BLOCK WORK
1.0 The Indian Standards to be followed are :
All relevant Standards as specified elsewhere in this Volume are applicable.
1.1 Indian Standards to be followed are :
1. IS 269 Specification for ordinary and low heat portland cement
2. IS 383 Specification for coarse and fine aggregates from natural
sources for concrete.
3. IS 455 Specification for Portland slag cement
4. IS 456 Code of Practice for plain and reinforced concrete.
5. IS 2185 (Part I) Solid cement concrete blocks.
6. IS 2572 Code of practice for construction of hollow concrete
block masonry.
7. IS 2645 Specification for integral waterproofing compound.
8. IS 9103 Specification for admixtures for concrete.
2.0 MATERIAL
2.1 Cement
Ordinary portland cement complying to IS 269 shall be used unless specified,
otherwise cement used shall of grade 33.
2..2 Aggregates
Aggregates shall conform to IS 383 requirements and as obtained in the concrete
and mortar section of this volume. Grading shall be as indicated in IS 383.
Fineness modules of the combined aggregates shall be between 3.6 and 4.
2.3 Water
Water conforming to IS 456 and as approved by the EIC shall be used. Details as
given in Concrete and Mortar section II of this volume shall be followed.
2.4 Admixtures
Additives or admixtures may be added to the cement or concrete mix conforming
to the IS specifications. Admixtures shall be chloride free and melamine polymer
based.
Other additives or admixtures not being governed by Indian Standards shall be
tested and checked that the same are not detrimental to durability. However any
addition shall only be after the approval of the EIC.
3.0 MANUFACTURE
3.1 Concrete blocks may be hollow (open or closed cavity) or solid and shall be
referred to by its nominal dimension. The term nominal dimension includes the
thickness of the mortar joint. Provision I.S. Code 2185 shall be followed for all
specifications of soild concrete blocks including specifications for actual
dimensions, tolerances, sizes, shapes, faces and webs, grades of blocks etc.
3.2 Concreting
Concrete mix used for blocks shall be predesigned to give a strength of 50
Kg/Cm2. Concrete shall be mixed in the mechanical mixer. Blocks shall be
moulded, laid and compacted with automatic machines table vibrator. Care shall
be taken to see that the mix mould is filled up. Blocks shall be protected until they
are sufficiently hardened to permit handling without damage. The solid concrete
blocks shall have a minimum strength of 50 Kg/per square centimeter.
3.3. Curing & Drying
Blocks shall be cured in the curing yard by keeping them continuously moist for
at least 14 days. Steam-cured blocks shall be preferred. Cured blocks shall be
allowed to dry for a period of 4 weeks before being used. The blocks shall be
allowed to complete their initial shrinkage before they are laid in the wall.
3.4 Physical requirements
All blocks shall be sound and free of cracks or other defects. For exposed
construction face or faces shall be free of chips, or other imperfections, and the
overall dimensions of the blocks shall be in accordance to tolerance as specified.
Minimum compressive strength shall be 50 kg/cm2, maximum permissible water
absorption shall not exceed tthe limit specified in I.S. Code 2185 dimensional
variations shall be specified in I.S.2185.
3.5 Test
Test detailed in Appendices A to F of IS 2185 shall be conducted on samples of
units selected according to the sampling procedure given here under to ensure
conformity with the physical requirements as specified.
3.5.1 Sampling
A sample of 20 blocks shall be taken from every consignment of 5000 blocks or
part thereof of the same size and same batch of manufacture. From these samples,
the blocks shall be taken at random for conducting the test.
The blocks shall be taken at regular intervals during the course of work,
preferably while being loaded or unloaded. In case samples are to be taken from
the stacks, blocks shall be taken at random from across the top of the stacks, the
sides accessible and from the interior of the stacks.
3.5.2 The blocks shall be kept under cover and protected from extreme conditions of
temperature, relative humidity and wind untill they are required for test. The test
shall be taken as soon as the sample has been taken.
3.5.3 Number of Tests
All the 20 blocks shall be checked for dimensions and inspected for visual
defects. Out of the 20 blocks, 3 blocks shall be subjected to the test for block
density, 8 blocks to the test for compressive strength, 3 blocks to the test for water
absorption and 3 blocks to the test for drying shrinkage and later to the test for
moisture movement. The remaining 3 blocks shall be reserved for retest for
drying shrinkage and moisture movement if a need arises.
3.6 Blocks shall be approved if requirements of conditions mentioned in 11.2 to 11.5
(as given below) of IS 2185 (Part I) are satisfied.
1. The number of blocks with dimensions outside the tolerance limit and/or with
visual defects, among those inspected shall not be more than two.
2. For Block density and compressive strength, the mean value determined shall be
greater than of equal to the minimum limit specified in Table 2 of IS 2185 (Part I)
and reproduced as Table 27 of Annexure.
3. For drying shrinkage and moisture movement, all the test specimens shall satisfy
the requirements of the test. If one of more specimens fail to satisfy the
requirements, the remaining 3 blocks shall be subjected to these tests. All blocks
shall satisfy the requirements. Drying shrinkage shall not exceed 0.1 percent.
4. For water absorption, the mean value determined shall not be more than 10
percent by mass.
4.0 WORKMANSHIP
4.1 In total dry climate top and sides may be slightly moistened to avoid absorption of
water from mortar.
4.2 Joints shall not be bigger than 10mm and will be perfectly horizontal and vertical.
Joints shall be raked 10mm deep while mortar is wet.
4.3 Cut blocks shall not be used. Special solid precast blocks at site shall be cast well
in advance to be used as spacers and to adjust breaking of vertical joints.
4.3.1 Cracks in block masonry are due to shrinkage or expansion of blocks or due to
load settlement, thermal expansion or changes in moisture content in the structural
members enclosing the block walls. The following measures are recommended to
prevent formation of cracks.
a. While curing, the block masonry should be lightly sprinkled with water
and not made excessively wet.
b. Expansion joints shall be provided in walls exceeding 30m in length.
c. Reinforcement should be provided in the bed joints in block work, one
course above and one course below windows and above doors in order to
distribute the shrinkage/temperature stresses occurring at the corners of
openings, more uniformly throughout the walls.
d. R.C.C. band (called Patli) 80 mm thick and width equal to block masonry
and having 10 m dia. two bars with 6 mm dia links @ 200 mm c/c shall be
provided at every 1 meter interval in the block masonry. The gap between
the topmost layer of block and the soffit of the beam shall be packed by
lightly hammerring flat pieces of shahabad / kota tiles and then the gaps
will be covered by weld mesh of before closing them by cement plaster.
The weld mesh will be extended at least 150 mm on the R.C.C. beam and
150 mm on block masonry and nailed to them with strong nails.
4.4 SCAFFOLDING
Scaffolding, independent of masonry work i.e. double scaffolding, shall be
provided. It should be tied to masonry work or structure at suitable intervals in
both directions. Two rows of planks shall be provided all around. These shall be
at least 50mm thick and well-tied to the scaffolding. Railing to outside faces shall
be provided. While erecting scaffolding the following points must be noted and
closely followed :
1. Minimum number of holes in horizontal direction. Holes shall be formed
by omitting header.
2. No holes in pillars under 1 meter in width.
3. No holes near the skew backs of arches.
4. Scaffolding must be sound and strong and easy to maintain.
4.5 Raking back shall be carried out at an angle not steeper than 45 degrees in case all
the block work is not raised together.
4.6 The block should be of full height and no cut pieces shall be allowed PCC
leveling course shall be laid to fill up the gap.
5.0 MEASUREMENT
Hollow or solid cement concrete block work shall be measured in sq. meter for
the specified width.
6.0 RATES
Rates for items shall include following :
a. Material and labour, for the completion of items as specified including any
centering, shuttering, curing etc.
b. Raking out of joints.
c. Preparation of the tops and sides.
d. Forming and preparing expansion, contraction or construction joints as
detailed above or specified in the BOQ or drawings.
e. Making holes, openings, etc. for outlets, embedding downtake pipes, etc.
wherever necessary during construction and finishing exposed surfaces as
per instruction of the EIC.
f. Curing and protection as specified.
g. Making holes, openings, outlets, etc. embedding pipes, ends of beams,
joints, slabs, trusses, sills, etc. whatever required during construction and
neatly finishing the exposed surfaces and opening as per instructions of
the EIC.
SECTION - G
PLASTERING AND POINTING
1.0 INDIAN STANDARDS
All relevant standards as specified elsewhere in this Volume are applicable.
1.1 Indian Standards to be followed are :
1. IS 383 Specification for coarse and fine aggregates from natural
sources for concrete.
2. IS 412 Specification for expanded metal steel sheets for general
purposes.
3. IS 1542 Specifications for sand for plaster.
4. IS 1635 Code of practice for field slaking of building lime and
preparation of putty.
5. IS 1661 Code of practice for field slaking of building lime and
preparation of putty.
6. IS 2394 Code of practice for application of lime plaster finish.
7. IS 2402 Code of practice for external rendered finishes.
8. IS 2645 Specifications for integral cement waterproofing compound.
2.0 MATERIALS
2.1 Cement, lime, surkhi, water shall conform to the respective specifications of
Section II : (concrete & Mortar) of this volume.
2.1.1 Coloured cement may be either ready-mixed material or may be obtained by
mixing pigments and cement at site. The pigments to be mixed with cement
shall conform to Appendix „A‟ of IS 2114 code of practice for laying in-situ
Terrazzo floor finish.
2.2. Sand required for plastering work shall conform to IS 1542 specification. For
white or coloured rendering, only quartz or silica sand shall be used. For textured
finishes produced by treatment of freshly applied final or finishing coat with a
tool coarser, particles used shall be screened through 3.35mm IS sieve or 2.36 mm
IS sieve. For torn texture a slightly larger portion of material coarser than 4.75 IS
sieve shall be used.
2.3 Aggregate shall conform to IS 383.
2.4 Marble dust obtained from crushing of hard marble stone shall not contain more
than 8% of dust determined by field test. Fineness modules shall be greater than
1.0
2.5 Integral waterproofing compound shall conform to I.S. 2645 (specification for
integral waterproofing compound).
2.6 Neeru shall be obtained by mixing lime putty and sand in equal proportions and
chopped jute @ 4 Kg/cum of mortar and ground to fine paste in the chemical
grinder to give fine butter like paste.
3.0 WORKMANSHIP
3.1 Preparation of mortar mix.
3.1.1. The material used in preparation of plastering mixes shall be measured by volume
using gauge-boxes or by weight.
3.1.2 When cement is measured by weight, 1440 Kg. of material shall be taken
equivalent to one cubic meter.
3.1.3. Mix proportion of lime, unless otherwise stated, generally refers to the volume of
lime putty.
3.2 Mixing
3.2.1 Mixing shall be done mechanically or manually if approved by the EIC. Machine
mixing shall be preferable to hand mixing for cement mortar. Each mortar batch
shall be used within half an hour. Hand mixing shall be carried out on a clean,
watertight platform. The mixing operation shall be continued with addition of
necessary quantity of water until a uniform appearance and consistency of mortar
is obtained.
3.3 Cement-lime or cement-sand-mortar shall be prepared as follows :
A. Lime putty and sand shall be mixed first and kept from drying out. Cement
shall be added as and where required and mixed with water if necessary to
the minimum extent to give a working consistency for the plaster.
B. If fine sand is used, cement and sand shall be dry mixed first. Lime putty,
thinned with water, shall be added to the mixer and mixed until a
satisfactory mortar obtained.
C. Cement and sand shall be mixed dry in required proportion to obtain a
uniform colour, and water shall then be added to get the required
consistency for the plaster.
3.3.1 Surfaces to be plastered must be clean and free from dust, loose material, oil,
grease, mortar droppings sticking of foreign matter, traces of algae, etc. It is very
important to ensure that there should not be any chance of the plaster getting
debonded due to presence of materials harmful for bonding.
3.3.2 Raking out of joints is expected to be carried out along with masonry but it should
be checked thoroughly so as to receive good key.
3.3.3 Walls should be sufficiently damp prior to plastering. Water from plastering
mortar must not be absorbed by masonry under any condition.
3.3.4 Any unavoidable projections in masonry and concrete surfaces shall be chiselled
back. Care shall be taken that surrounding surfaces are not damaged and
reinforcement is not exposed.
3.3.5 Thickness of one coat should not be more than 12mm and less than 8mm for
single coat finished plaster.
3.3.6 In case of multi coat plaster, sufficient time shall be allowed for the undercoat to
harden (cured, dried and shrunk properly) before subsequent coats are applied.
3.3.7 Undercoats shall be scratched or roughened before they are fully hardened to form
a mechanical key.
3.3.8 The method of application is also important and hence it is recommended that the
mix be thrown on the surface rather than stuck with trowel. This increases the
adhesion.
3.3.9 Scaffolding should be rigid, allowing free and safe movement on the platform and
it should be at sufficient distance or height from the working areas. Scaffolding
with railing gives more confidence to workers and increases the quality of work.
3.3.10 Actual plastering shall be undertaken only on the approval of the EIC. Plaster
work should follow the steps mentioned below :
a. Surface must be thoroughly cleaned.
b. Plaster area must be provided with level dabs or spots allowing working
and checking with 2-3 metre straight edge. Depth of plaster must not be
less than 8mm at any point.
c. Required concealing services must be completed and tested before starting
plastering work
d. No further cutting of masonry must be required.
e. Repairs carried out to masonry or concealing work must be cured and dry.
f. Surface must be sufficiently damp.
g. Plaster dabs are checked for plumb and level by the EIC or his
representative.
h. Joints concealing and repairing areas must be covered with chicken mesh
as per EIC‟s instruction.
3.3.11 Corners, external or internal, shall be finished along with final coat and will be
rounded if so instructed by the Architect.
3.3.12 Plaster shall be cured for 14 days by wet curing except in neeru finish plaster.
During this period plaster shall be protected from exposure to extremes of
temperature and weather.
3.3.13 Plaster shall be levelled and lined by aluminum hollow section, 2-3m long, (This
will give even and levelled surface). There shall not be more than 2mm difference
in level when checked with 3m straight edge. It is important that enough pressing
and beating is done to achieve compact filling of joints and that the area is fully
compacted.
3.3.14 Finishing of plaster may be carried out with wooden float (randhas) or trowelled
smooth with sheet metal trowels as specified. Care shall be taken to avoid
excessive trowelling and over working of the wooden float.
3.3.15 All corners, internal or external, shall be truly vertical or horizontal. These shall
be finished with a proper template to achieve best workmanship for rounding and
chamfering as specified or directed.
3.3.16 Plaster shall be cut to correct horizontal or vertical line at the end of the day or if
work requires to be suspended for any reason.
3.3.17 It is advisable to limit the area of plaster to 15 sq.mt. To avoid cracks due to
thermal movements of dissimilar material in contact, it is advisable to provide
joints treated with groove or any other detail as suggested by the Architect. These
joints if not specified shall be treated with 150mm wide reinforcing chicken mesh
( approved by the EIC) fixed over joints by G.I. nails and the area plastered.
4.0 TYPE OF PLASTER
4.1 12mm thick ordinary cement sand plaster.
Single coat cement-sand plaster with cement-sand mix in proportion of 1:4 shall
be carried out over the entire area as detailed above. This shall be finished with
wooden float to give the best smooth surface possible. This may be for internal or
external areas. Thickness may be from 10 to 15 mm maximum or as specified in
the item or drawing.
4.2 18 to 25mm ordinary cement sand plaster.
This is the same as for the 12mm thick single coat plaster except that this shall be
carried out in two coats. Maximum thickness of the undercoat shall be 12mm and
balance in the second finishing coat. All operations remain the same and are as
detailed in point 3.0
4.3 Neeru finish plaster
12 to 18mm thick internal plaster shall be carried out as above in single or two
coats respectively. 2 to 3 mm thick neeru shall be applied over the plaster when it
has just hardened. It shall be finished smooth by a steel trowel and worked over to
achieve smoother finish. Curing shall start only after 24 hours after neeru punning
has been completed. This shall not be hosed down like other plaster but kept wet
by a slight sprinkling of water for a period of 10 days.
4.4. Cement finished plaster.
This shall be carried out in the same manner as in 4.1 and 4.2 for specified
thickness in single or double coat. Then it shall be finished uniformly over the
entire area with a paste of neat cement when the plaster has just hardened and
finished smooth with a steel trowel. It shall be worked over again to achieve a
smooth levelled surface. Quantity of cement applied shall be about 1 Kg/sq.mt.
4.6 Sand face plaster
4.6.1 This shall generally be carried out on the outside face and exposed area of
masonry work and concrete work. It shall be of minimum 20mm thickness and
shall be in two coats. The coat shall be C.M. 1:4 (1 cement and 4 sand) mixed
with waterproofing compound 2% by weight of cement applied as usual and
surface shall be keyed.
4.6.2 The second coat shall be applied after 7 to 10 days and shall be of C.M. 1:4 (1
cement and 4 sand). Mortar shall be mixed with slightly coarse sand. Mix shall
be worked over with a gauge or wooden float to achieve an uniform surface.
4.6.3 The surface shall be allowed to harden sufficiently for sponging operation.
Sponging shall be done by dipping sponge in cement water and removing fine
particles and exposing large sand particles. The movement of sponge shall be
such that no patches develop nor is excessive material removed from the surface.
There shall not be a difference of more than 7mm when checked with 2m long
straight edge.
5.0 POINTING
5.1 Pointing shall be done as soon as possible to achieve a good bond in the raked
joint. Surface preparation shall be the same as specified in clause 3 above. Mortar
shall be prepared as detailed in section 2. Minimum depth of mortar in joint shall
be 10mm. Mortar shall be set in or pressed into the raked joint with a pointing
trowel. Care shall be taken not to spread the corner edges or surface of masonry.
It shall be further finished with a pointing tool. Pointing shall be cured for 7 days
by hosing water.
5.2 Types of pointing.
5.2.1 Flush Pointing
The mortar shall be pressed into the joints and shall be finished, flush and
levelled. The edges shall be neatly trimmed with a trowel and straightened.
5.2.2. Cut or weather struck pointing
The mortar shall first be pressed into joints. The top or horizontal shall be pressed
back 3mm with the pointing tool so that the joint is sloping from top to bottom.
The vertical joint shall be ruled pointed. Vertical and horizontal joint lines shall
be at true right angles.
6.0 MEASUREMENT
6.1 Plaster and pointing work shall be measured in square meter to the second place
of decimal.
6.2 Thickness of plaster shall be the minimum depth of plaster as specified. But if
extra thickness occurs due to bad quality of bricks, stones or blocks or due to bad
workmanship, the repairs required to be carried out shall be at the cost of
contractor.
6.3 a. Grooves, pattas in continuation of large areas or plaster areas shall be
considered as part of the plaster and not measured separately.
b. Isolated areas and width below 300mm shall be specified and detailed
separately in the BOQ and measured in running meter.
c. Ceiling plaster, including ribbed beam slab shall be measured in square
meters.
d. Beams and columns in continuation of masonry shall be measured in
square meter.
6.4 Jambs, sills, coves, cornices, etc. shall be a part of plaster and no separate
payment shall be made towards these items.
6.5 Deduction
a. Deduction for an opening in plaster shall not be for area less than 0.5 sqm.
Same shall be applicable for pointing.
b. In case the opening area is 0.5 sq.m to 3.0 sq.m only 50% area shall be
deducted from each face. Same shall be applicable for pointing.
c. In case the width of door or window frames are equal to masonry, full area
of opening shall be deducted.
6.6. Plaster to ceiling and walls shall be measured separately if specified in the BOQ.
7.0 RATE
7.1 Description of item in the BOQ, unless otherwise stated, includes, wherever
necessary, conveyance and delivery, handling, unloading, storing, fabrication,
hoisting, all labour for finishing to required shape and size, setting, fitting and
fixing in position, straight cutting and waste, return of packing and other
incidental charges.
7.2 Levels and heights shall be as indicated in BOQ.
7.3 Preparation of surface shall be as approved by the EIC.
7.4 Trimming off the projections on masonry shall be included in the price.
7.5 Scaffolding and working platform shall be included in the price.
7.6 Materials as detailed and as required to complete item as specified shall be
included in the price.
7.7 Curing of plaster or pointing shall be included in the price.
7.8 Cleaning of adjacent areas, windows, doors, frames etc. including masonry
surfaces in exposed masonry work, shall be included in the price.
7.9 Forming grooves, for joints, between beams/columns and masonry etc. shall be
included in the price. Any special treatment if detailed shall be measured
separately and billed in BOQ.
7.10 Providing & fixing chicken mesh at junction of R.C.C. brick work, edges, corners,
chiselled and repaired brick to plaster over concealed conduit etc. shall be as
directed by the Engineer In Charge it shall be considered as part of item and no
separate charges will be payable.
SECTION - H
FLOORING & WALL FINISHES
1.0 INDIAN STANDARDS
All relevant standards as specified in elsewhere in this volume are also applicable.
1.1. The Indian Standards to be followed are
1. IS 777 Specification for glazed earthen ware tiles.
2. IS 1237 Specification for cement concrete flooring tiles.
3. IS 1443 Code of practice for laying and finishing of cement
concrete flooring tiles.
4. IS 2114 Code of Practice for laying in situ terrazo floor finish.
5. IS 2571 Code of practice for laying in situ cement concrete flooring.
6. IS 4457 Specification for ceramic unglazed vitreous acid resisting
tiles.
7. IS 5318 Code of practice for laying of flexible PVC sheet and tile
flooring
8. IS 5491 Code of practice for laying in-situ granolithic concrete floor
topping.
2.0 MATERIAL
2.1 Cement, sand, aggregate, lime, water shall conform to concrete and mortar section
of this volume.
2.2 Stone
Stone for soling shall be hard, sound, durable and free from defects like cavities,
cracks, sand-holes, flaws, injurious veins, patches of loose or soft materials and
weathered portions etc.
2.3 Terrazo aggregates
2.3.1 The aggregates used in topping shall be marble chips only. The type of marble
shall be as specified or as approved. It should be hard, sound, dense and
homogenous in texture with crystalline and coarse grains.
2.3.2 Marble powder used along with chips must pass through IS sieve Terrazo 30.
2.3.3. Pigments
Pigments used in the mix shall conform to Appendix „A‟ of IS 2114.
2.3.4. Dividing Strips
Dividing strips used in flooring shall be of brass or aluminum or glass as specified
in the BOQ or as approved by the EIC. Strips shall be at least 45mm wide and
3mm thick or as specified in the BOQ/drawings.
2.4 Glazed tiles
Glazed earthenware tiles shall be of specified size and make or equivalent but
shall conform to ISS 777. Tiles shall be free from cracks, grazes, spots, chipped
edges and corners. Variation in size shall be limited to +/- 1.5mm. Thickness shall
be as specified in BOQ, but in no case shall be less than 6mm.
2.5 Marble
The marble used shall be as approved by the EIC and shall be hard, sound, free
from cracks, cavities, holes, patches of injurious veins, weathered portions, flaws,
etc. 4 nos. of 300 x 300 mm sized marble pieces shall be submitted for approval.
Material received shall conform to the said approval group 4 marbles and no other
type shall be accepted. Colour, grain, vein, etc. must conform to the approved
sample only. Size and thickness shall be as specified. The marble may be ordered
in various sizes to suit the pattern selected by the Architect/ EIC. Required pattern
matching of marble shall be carried out by the contractor while cutting the marble.
2.6 Kota Stone
Kota stone shall be of approved size to achieve the pattern to be approved by the
EIC/Architect. Thickness shall be as specified. Stone shall be dense, hard and free
from cracks, decay, weathering and flaws.
3.0 SUB-BASE
Sub-base for all flooring shall be prepared and kept ready for further applications.
All items shall be defined and detailed on the drawing. Measurements shall be as
per the BOQ of these items.
Preparation of sub-base may be by doing excavation or back filling in plinth.
Back filling shall be with the selected earth in layer of 150mm to 20mm
maximum and adequately watered and well-compacted to achieve 90%
compaction at optimum moisture content.
In case of excavation, the base shall be well-dressed to the desired level and
inspected. All loose spots shall be excavated till the hard surface is reached and
then filled as directed by the EIC. Surface shall be watered with just sufficient
water and rolled and compacted with vibratory compactor.
3.1 Rubble soling
Good quality 150mm to 230mm thick rubble soling shall be carried out depending
upon the grade of soil. Rubble used shall be at least 100mm for 150mm thick
soling and 150mm for 230mm thick soling. Stone shall be hand packed as close as
possible and bedded firmly with the broadest face downwards and the greatest
length across, voids filled with chips and small stones. These shall be hammered
down to achieve packing and the complete filling of interstices. To achieve the
desired levels and slopes. Pegs at suitable intervals (about 12m) shall be fixed.
Soling shall be watered and again packed with sand or murum to fill interstices
created by watering. Then it shall be rolled with vibratory compactor. Filling sand
or murum, watering and compaction shall continue till full compactness is
achieved to the satisfaction of the EIC.
3.2 Metal packing
3.2.1 Coarse aggregate used for metal packing shall be crushed or broken stone, hard,
durable and free from excess of flat, elongated, soft and disintegrated particles,
dirt and other objectionable matter Grading shall be as referred in table 16 of the
Annexure.
3.2.1 Prepared sub-base surfaces as detailed in 3.0 above shall be uniformly spread with
well-graded metal. Templates shall be used for levelling. Levelling shall be true
and checked with 3m straight edge. Any raised areas or depressions of more than
12.5 mm shall be corrected. This shall be rolled with power wheel roller of 6 to 10
tons as required or as asked by the EIC for the intended purpose. Rolling shall
continue till aggregate is thoroughly keyed and the creeping of the aggregate
ahead of the roller is no longer visible. The rolled surface shall be checked and all
irregularities corrected by loosening the surface, adding or removing necessary
amounts of aggregate and rerolling until the complete area conforms to the
required datum.
3.2.3. After the coarse aggregate has been thoroughly keyed and set by rolling,
screening shall be carried out to fill the interstices. This shall be in 3 to 4 layers.
Material shall be dry and no sprinkling of water shall be allowed.
3.4 Base floor
This shall be regular reinforced concrete floor or plain cement concrete floor as
specified. Its thickness shall vary from 50mm to 150mm as the case may be. In
case of RCC floor concrete this may be nominally reinforced with reinforcement
bars.
All specifications of concreting shall be the same as per concrete and
reinforcement section of this volume (Section II and Section III).
4.0 FLOOR FINISHES
4.1 Indian patent stone.
4.1.1. Cement concrete floor of specified grade of 40 to 75mm thickness shall be laid in
panels. Cement concrete shall conform to concrete and mortar section II
specifications.
The concrete surface finish may be monolithically laid with structural slab or laid
over hardened structural slab. For convenience and to protect final finish in the
period of construction laying of concrete over-hardened structural slab shall be
preferred.
a. Hardened structural slab shall be thoroughly wire-brushed, hacked with
mechanical scabbler to remove all scum, laitance of cement mortar and
allowed to expose coarse aggregate. Surface shall be wetted and cleaned
thoroughly.
b. Concrete shall be laid in panels. Panels shall be such as to minimize shrinkage
and curling. Their length to breadth ratio shall be 1:5:1 It is advisable to keep the
maximum length of each panel as 2.0m.
Panels shall be formed by providing shuttering of timber or steel angles to dead
accurate level. They shall be rigid and watertight.
c. In case dividing strips are to be provided, the same shall be fixed to dead accurate
level and concrete poured into them (not required to be in alternate bays).
4.1.3 a. The concrete mix used shall be as stiff as possible yet sufficiently
workable When mix is held in hand it shall form a ball but when released
will crumble by itself.
b. All excess water from the surface shall be mopped up by tremix machine
keeping surface just wet.
c. Thick cement plaster/ slurry shall be brushed into the surface just prior to
laying of the concrete. It must be noted that slurry shall not be brushed
over area where concrete laying is likely to be delayed.
d. Concrete laid shall be vibrated and compacted as required. It shall be
levelled with 3m straight edge.
e. Surface shall be well trowelled and rubbed smooth to the satisfaction of
the EIC.
f. No additional dry cement or cement mortar shall be sprinkled on the
stiffened concrete surface to achieve smoothness.
g. Concrete shall be kept moist for 14 days.
h. Edges of panels shall be well-compacted to minimize lifting and curlings.
4.1.4 IPS-laid monolithic with structural concrete shall be carried out as under :
a. Floor concrete slab shall be allowed to stiffen enough but still be in a
plastic stage.
b. Mix shall be laid in position and well-compacted with wooden float and
levelled with 3m straight edge.
c. After the surface has become slightly hard, steel trowelling shall be carried
out to achieve smooth, levelled surface.
d. No additional dry cement of cement mortar shall be sprinkled on the
stiffened concrete surface at any stage.
e. The concrete shall be wet cured for 14 days.
4.1.5 Measurement shall be square meter for specified thickness and for specified mix.
4.2 Precast terrazzo tiling.
4.2.1 Tiles shall conform to IS 1237.
Metric size of tiles as per IS 1237 are :
Nominal Actual Minimum
Size Size Thickness
200mm x 200mm 198.5mm x 198.5mm 20mm
300mm x 300mm 298.5mm x 298.5mm 25mm
250mm x 250mm 248.5mm x 248.5mm 22mm
Tolerances on length and breadth shall be maximum 1mm and in thickness 3mm.
Tiles shall be hydraulically pressed with a minimum pressure of 140 kg.sq,cm.
Tiles shall be single coat polished prior to receipt at site. Backing of tiles shall be
in ordinary cement aggregate in proportion of 1:3 by weight. Top wearing course
shall be minimum 6mm at any point in the tiles.
4.2.2. Bedding
It is advisable to provide a lime mortar bed. This gives workability and helps
achieve dead accurate levels. Lime mortar in a ratio of 1:2 (1 lime putty : 2
coarse sand) shall be provided for bedding.
Structural concrete or base slab shall be cleaned, wetted, and mopped as detailed
in 4.1.2 a of this section . Mortar shall be spread uniformly, tamped and levelled
with a 3m straight edgy. The bed shall be keyed prior to finishing of the day‟s
work. Thickness shall be as specified but at no point shall the bed be less than
10mm.
4.2.3 Laying of tiles.
A thick cement slurry/paste shall be spread over the bedding and cleaned tiles laid
over this grouted area. Grouting shall be such that the area is covered within 15-
20 minutes. Joints shall be as thin as possible and limited to 2mm at the
maximum.
Laying shall start after due consideration is given to following points and
approved by the EIC.
1. Datum levels of floors in rooms, adjacent rooms, passages, etc.
2. Slopes, if provided, the flooring should be given by adjusting thickness of
mortar.
3. Tiles in openings and doors are equally placed.
4. Passage may be laid first to achieve evenness in doors.
5. Tiles in room shall be symmetrical and equal cut tiles shall be around the
edges.
6. In case of differently coloured tiles in passages and rooms, a dividing strip
shall be provided and change over of colour shall be under the shutter.
7. In case there is any other architectural or structural feature, the same shall
be considered and the pattern adjusted accordingly.
8. Tiles may be allowed to go under plaster or dado about 10mm.
4.2.4 After the tiles are laid, surplus cement slurry from the joints shall be cleaned. The
following day the joints shall again be cleaned, washed and wire brushed.
Grouting of joints shall be carried out with coloured (pigmented cement) cement
or gray cement that matches the colour of tiles. Grout shall be worked into joint.
Excessive grouts shall be cleaned off.
4.2.5 The floor shall be kept wet for a period of 7 days. No traffic shall be allowed on
the bedding and bedded tiles for atleast 2 days.
4.2.6 Polishing
Polishing and grinding shall be done only after 14 days. Machine cutting or
grinding shall be carried out. At first the grinding shall be with rough stone of
grade 48 to 60. All chips shall be visible and grinding shall be uniform. It shall be
cleaned with water. All pin-holes and opened out joints shall be grouted with
matching coloured cement grouts supplied by the tile manufacturer. It shall be
cured for a period of 7 days by keeping it moist.
Second coat cutting/grinding shall be done with carboundum stone of grade 120.
The same procedure as for the first coat shall be repeated till curing is completed.
The final cutting/grinding shall be with a fine stone of 220-320 grade and shall be
done with ample water.
Oxalic acid powder shall be spread 33 gm/sq.m. and polished by machine fitted
with hessian bobs. The floor shall then be washed, cleaned and dried with a soft
cloth or linen. Wherever corners of tiles are slightly low and remain unpolished,
they should be hand polished by using rubbing stone.
In case of wax polishing, wax polish shall be applied to the surface. It shall be
rubbed with machine. Then clean saw-dust shall be spread over the floor and
rubbed with polishing machine. This will remove wax, leaving a glossy surface
under-neath.
4.2.7 Precast terrazzo tiles are measured in square metres. Their rate shall include all
material and labour costs required to complete the item to the satisfaction of the
EIC. No extras shall be admitted on account of cutting of tiles in shape, preparing
a pattern from different coloured tiles or a special border or a band. Landing of
staircase shall be paid for in square meters. Treads and risers shall be measured in
running meters for a particular width of tread and height of riser.
4.4.1 KOTA STONE FLOORING
Machine cut kota stone slabs used shall be of 20, 25, 30 thickness. As far as
possible colour shall be uniform. Tiles used at site shall be machine-cut.
4.4.2.1 In machine-cut edge tiles, edges shall be protected from any damage in transit. No
breakage shall be permitted. All edges shall be sharp, perfectly rectangular and all
tiles otherwise shall be rejected outright. Edges shall be pencil-rounded and
polished for exposed corners and faces.
4.4.3. Bedding shall be of lime mortar or cement sand mortar as detailed in clause 4.2.2.
of this section. In all cases of cement-sand-mortar mix, a ratio of 1:6 will be
maintained unless specified otherwise in the BOQ/drawings.
4.4.4 Laying of kota stone flooring shall be as in clause 4.2.3., 4.2.4 & 4.2.5 of this
section.
4.4.5. Polishing and grinding shall be carried out as in 4.2.6 of this section.
4.4.6 Measurement shall be in square metres. Steps and risers for specified width and
height shall be measured in running metres or as detailed in BOQ. Rates shall
include costs for all labour, material, cutting, dressing, polishing of exposed faces
and edges, wastage etc. including laying in pattern and polishing to the required
standard. No extras shall be permitted on any account.
4.5 Marble Flooring/Granite Flooring
4.5.1 Machine cut marble/granite stone slabs shall of 20, 25, 30, thickness as specified
by the Architect, Colour shall be uniform and the slabs free from all defects.
Tiles used at site shall be machine-cut.
4.5.2 In machine-cut tiles, edges shall be protected from any damage in transit. No
breakage shall be permitted. All edges shall be sharp, perfectly rectangular. Edges
shall be pencil-rounded and polished for exposed corners and faces.
4.5.3 Bedding shall be of lime-mortar or cement-sand-mortar as detailed in clause 4.2.2.
of this section. It shall in all cases be in cement-sand-mortar mix in a ratio of 1:6
unless specified otherwise in the BOQ/drawings.
Laying of marble stone flooring shall be as in clause 4.2.3, 4.2.4 & 4.2.5 of this
section.
Polishing and grinding shall be carried out as in clause 4.2.6 of this section.
4.5.5. Measurement shall be square metres. Steps and risers for specified width and
height shall be measured in running metres or as detailed in BOQ. Rates shall
include costs for all labour, material, cutting, dressing, polishing of exposed faces
and edges, wastage etc. including dry laying in pattern, providing dividing strips,
special cut pieces of various sizes to create the pattern as shown in the drawing
and polishing to required standard etc. No extras shall be permitted on any
account.
4.6 Glazed ceramic tiles.
4.6.1. Glazed ceramic tiles shall be laid on structural concrete slab or floor concrete
slab. Tiles shall be laid in accordance to IS specifications and instructions of
manufacturer.
4.6.2 Tiles do not require any special bedding as for Terrazzo and stone floor tiles. But
to achieve the required slopes, an average 30 to 40 mm thickness bedding of IPS
as underlayer should be provided. Over this, tiles shall be laid in a cement mortar
ratio of 1:4 on a bed of 12mm thickness.
4.6.3. Sub-grade shall be cleaned, wetted and mopped. IPS shall be laid in required
slope/gradients. It shall be cured for 7 days and the surface shall be kept rough to
achieve key with bedding of cement mortar. Cement mortar of about 12mm shall
be spread over the area uniformly and compacted with 3 meters straight edge to
achieve dead uniform levels. Surface shall be allowed to harden but in plastic
state a thick cement paste by using cement @ 4.4. kg/sq.m shall be worked into
the bedding. Cement paste shall be applied to the area only where immediate
laying of tiles is carried out. Wetted tiles shall be cleaned and fixed in the thick
cement pasted bedding. Tiles shall be positioned by tapping with wooden hammer
and level checked with straight edge 2-3 metre long. Joints shall be as specified
or as thin as possible. Points to be noted prior to start are as under :
1. Dry laying of tiles should be done first in a nearby place and should be got
checked and approved by the Engineer.
2. Tiles of the same solour and shade should be grouped together.
3. End cut tiles are more than half.
4. Floor and wall tiles are in the same line.
5. Change of tiles is below the door shutter.
6. Dividing strip is provided.
7. Cutouts of floor drains are in line with the tiles. Tiles around cutouts are
greater than 50mm or half the tile whichever is greater.
8. Joints should be very thin and in any case not more than 2 mm width.
9. Joints shall be cleaned thoroughly and grouted with colour or white
cement as specified.White or colour grout shall be prepared with colour
pigments added to cement as per colour of tiles or as directed by EIC.
Grout shall be a thick paste and tooled into joints and area of the tile
cleaned with a damp cloth. Grouting shall be cured by wet curing for 7
days. Grouting material fallen on the tiles should be immediately wiped
out by using clean cloth. It should be ensured that no stins are left on the
tiles.
10. After 24 hours of grouting, tiles shall be cleaned with water and after 7 to
10 days or prior to handing over, tiles shall be washed with mild acid.
Care shall be taken that grout does not develop any stain mark.
11. All expansion joints shall be carried out right through and finished by
sealing with silicon sealant.
4.6.4 Tiles shall be measured in square metres. Rate shall include for all material,
labour, cutting, fixing, grouting, cleaning etc. completed to the satisfaction of the
EIC.
5.0 SKIRTING/DADO/STEPS/RISERS
5.1 Material for skirting, dado, steps, risers shall be as specified in 2.0 above.
5.1.1. Surface preparation shall be same as for flooring for each type. Backing coat,
plaster for dado and skirting shall be done as detailed in the plaster section. It
shall be combed for creating a key and better adhesion with skirting material.
In case of steps, bedding shall be laid exactly as flooring and all operations
described therein shall be carried out.
5.1.2. External and internal facings shall be fixed with adequate provision for expansion
and compression joints.
The contractor shall supply and fix all necessary supports, anchor slots, anchor
cramps and dowels required for the satisfactory completion of all vertical marble
or any other stone cladding work. Fixing will be made from suitable non-ferrous
metal stainless steel. They shall be in such shape and dimension that they are
adequate to carry the loads to be imposed upon them.
Notwithstanding the above stipulation, the contractor shall be entirely responsible
for the sufficiently of fixing.
All anchors and other fixing shall be concealed when the work is completed.
Great care shall be taken to protect delivered and laid marble/granite and other
stones from dripping and staining during the course of work.
5.1.3. Skirting or dado tiles shall be fixed as under :
1. Sufficiently hardened backing/undercoat must be damp.
2. Tiles shall be buttered with gray/white or pigmented cement paste on the
back side as directed.
3. Tiles shall be fixed on the undercoat and tamped with wooden mallet or
rubber mallet to achieve full adhesion to the undercoat. Edges shall be
tamped to secure line and level.
4. Care shall be taken to achieve pattern of laying with respect to floor or
ceiling.
5. Tiles shall be mopped with wet cloth to remove grout coming out from
joints.
5.1.4 Polishing and cleaning shall be as described in type of tile referred above, except
that the operation shall be manual.
5.1.5 Measurement shall be in running meters for skirting, steps, risers for specified
width. Dado shall be measured in square meters.
Rates shall include material and labour required to complete the item as specified
and approved by the EIC. It shall include dividing strips, treating expansion
joints, sealing corners and edges around fittings and fixtures etc. all completed as
approved by the EIC.
SECTION - I
DOORS & WINDOWS
1.1 Teakwood work:
Timber used for joinery shall be of good approved quality teak wood unless
otherwise specified (Ref IS:4021) and shall be well seasoned (IS:1141) cut
square, free from excess work from sapwood, dead knot or other defects (Ref.
IS:3364)
All timber for carpentry, joinery, rough frame work backings, fixing strips and
the like shall be treaded with an approved wood preservative (Ref. IS:401) and the
contractor shall strictly observe the manufacturer‟s instructions for using this
material. The maximum permissible moisture content in timber shall be in
accordance with IS:287 - latest.
All workmanship shall be of the best quality (IS:6534). Scantlings and boardings
shall be accurately sawn and shall be of uniform width and thickness throughout.
All carpenter‟s work shall be left with a sawn surface except where otherwise
specified. Work shall be accurately set out in accordance with the drawings and
be framed together and securely fixed in the best possible manner and with
properly made joints. All screws, plugs, pins etc. to be provided as necessary and
as directed and approved.
Timber of approved quality is to be purchased at the commencement of the
contract for further seasoning on the site. Preparation of timber is to commence
simultaneously with the beginning of the work generally and to proceed
continuously until all the wood work is prepared and stacked on or near the site.
All the timber of large scantlings is to be sawn immediately on arrival at site to
allow for any shrinkage that may take place. All timber brought to site shall be
given anti-termite treatment.
Joints in various members forming any timber frame shall be provided only as
shown in the drawings or as directed by the Engineer. Two millimeters will be
allowed for each wrought face of the sizes specified except when described as
finished in which case they shall hold good to the full dimensions specified.
All work is to be properly tenoned, shouldered, wedged, pinned, etc. to the
satisfaction of the Engineer and all properly glued with best quality glue.
All joinery shall be finished off in a proper manner planned and sand papered as
required (IS:2888)
Use of nails shall not be permitted. Fixing of members shall be done by using
screws or rounds brads, heads of which shall be properly punched in ends of
timbers built into walls shall have air space left between themselves and the walls.
All exposed faces of woodwork shall be sand papered once before erection for
approval of the Engineer. No colour or other preservatives shall be applied
without prior approval of the Engineer.
Frames for doors and windows will be provided with mild steel holdfasts made of
25mm x 6mm thick flats 250mm long and fixed into jambs in Concrete block of
grade M-15/10 P.C.C. Each holdfast will be fixed to the frame with 3 nos. 50mm
GI screws.
For fixing timber frames to concrete, rawl plugs and screws of 16 gauge shall be
used wherever specified. Rawl plugs and screws of gauge 16 shall also be used
for fixing rawl rough grounds, framing, hangers, hat hooks, curtain rails etc.
unless otherwise specified, screws used for the work shall be galvanised.
All timber surfaces coming into contact with masonry or concrete shall be given
two coats of wood preservative or solignum approved by the Engineer.
Panelled and glazed shutters, styles and rails shall be as shown in the drawings,
moulded and mortised together (Ref. IS:1003). The shutters shall be square and
free from twist. All glazing is to be of sheet glass of selected quality and
approved by the Engineer. It shall be clear and free from defects. it shall be cut
to the required size and fixed to frame with spring clips, with approved quality
putty, or with teakwood beading as per details.
The Engineer may order any timber frame to be put together on the ground and
subject it to suitable tests to his satisfaction before being placed in position. The
cost of any such test shall be borne by the contractor.
All surface of timber resting on or bedded in masonry or concrete shall be well
coated with coal tar.
All fixing holes shall be palleted and concealed from view.
flush type block board (IS:2202) shall be manufactured from selected timber well
seasoned and shall be solid particle board, solid core construction with 25m thick
teak wood lipping all around the edge. The stiles and rails shall be of one piece.
The thickness of the cross band shall not be less than 3mm and the thickness of
the facing shall be of best quality commercial ply of thickness not less than
1.5mm. Where veneer finish or formica finishes or any other type is specified it
shall be glued separately. All the plywood shall be glue under pressure. Glue
used shall be phenol formaldehyde resins.
Fixtures: All doors and windows shall be provided with best quality fixtures as
specified in the drawings. Samples of all fittings shall be submitted for approval
by the Engineer. Unless otherwise specified, hinges, tower bolts, aldrops,
handles, latches, etc. shall be of best quality brass oxidised of specified size.
Mortice lock, hydraulic closer and other fixtures shall be of approved make. All
the fittings shall be fixed with brass screws.
Painting: Painting shall be carried out only after joinery has been inspected and
approved by the Engineer Surface preparation and applying of primer coat of
paint and final coats of paint shall be carried out as per specification for painting.
Unless otherwise specified a minimum of 2 coats of primer paint and 3 coats of
final paint to be applied. Where polishing or varnishing is specified, the surface
to be varnished or polished shall be protected from contamination such as
inadvertent painting and surface damage. The polishing or varnishing shall be
according to the specifications for varnishing or polishing under the section
Painting.
2.1 Aluminium windows and doors : IS: 1948 & IS:1949.
Aluminium alloy shall conform to IS:733 and IS:285. Contractor shall submit for
approval a sample of section he is proposing to use for the frame. He shall also
indicate weight of section per one metre length. he shall also submit for approval
the sample of hinges, handles, pegstays or any other item that may require the
approval of the Engineer.
The glass panes, unless otherwise specified, shall be of a thickness for windows
and 5.5mm thickness for doors and shall be free from flaws, specks and bubbles.
They shall have proper squared corners and straight edges. Fixing to frames shall
be done with approved glazing pins and approved quality rubber beading.
Corners of frames consisting of extruded hollow tube sections or other profiles
shall be to a true right angle. The hinges shall be either projection type, or
friction hinges. Necessary coupling of approved shape shall be provided for
composite windows. All holes required for fixing frame and for fixing glazing
shall be provided. Only brass screws shall be used for fixing the frame to
concrete members.
Vertical and horizontal members shall be of adequate rigidity to resist lateral
forces. Design calculation shall be submitted for deflection of members.
All the fixtures for centre hung shutters, top and bottom hung shutters, or side
hung shutters shall be got approved before they are used. The fixtures used
should be such that it should be possible to open the shutter to any angle.
Unless otherwise specified, aluminium doors shall be provided with floor springs
of approved quality and make.
All aluminium members shall be supplied in either matt or polished finish
including anodising them by electrochemical process to an approved colour and to
a thickness of average of 0.25mm. The frame shall be protected with a layer of
clear transparent lacquer based methacrylates or cellulose butyrate. Temporaary
coating on Aluminum Sections. The coating shall be removed after installation is
completed and after completing finishing work in the adjoining area.
The erection of frame shall be same as detailed under steel windows. Where
aluminium frames come in contact with steel members, they shall be separated by
either a 3mm thick rubber gasket for full width of aluminium member or any
other approved film so as to avoid metallic corrosion.
2.2 SPECIFICATIONS FOR ED-4 SERIES ALUMINIUM DOORS.
The outer frame shall be made out of 101.60mm x 44.45mm x 3.18mm
rectangular tubular sections weighing approx. 2.508 kgs/rmt.
The outer frame for fixed glazing shall be of size 101mm x 44.45mm x 2mm thick
weighing 1.7 kg/rmtr for single leg and 1.8 kg/rmtr for double leg.
The shutters shall be made out of specially extruded tubular sections provisions
for weather stripping shall be made in the vertical jambs. Vertical shutter frame
shall be of size 48.44mm x 44.45mm x 44.45 x 3.18 mm weighing 1.542 kg/rmtr.
Beading shall be of size 15mm x 15mm weighing 0.130 kg/mtr.
Bottom cill shall be 44.45 mm x 99.24 mm 3.18 mm and shall weigh 2.579
kgs/rmt and the top cill shall be of size 48.44 mm x 44.45 mm x 3.18 mm and
shall weigh 1.490 kgs/rmt.
The cleats for mechanical horizontal/vertical joints of the fixed frame and shutters
shall be of specially extruded aluminium sections so as to avoid any play between
jointed members.
Single action doors shall be fixed by heavy duty aluminium hinges.
Single action doors shall be provided with overhead door closer.
Double action doors shall be provided with floor spring.
Inactive leaf shall be provided with concealed shootbolt.
The active leaf shall have a unity lock, the active leaf shall also have one
concealed shootbolt which can be operated from inside.
Shutters shall be provided with PVC/EPDM weather stripping.
The glazing beads, both on shutters as well as fixed glazing, shall be of screwless
type.
EPDM/PVC gasket shall be used in the glazing beads for shutters.
For fixed glazing, the glass shall be encased in PVC channel so as to avoid metal
to glass contact.
The aluminium sections shall be anodised in natural matt finish. Thickness of
anodic film shall be minimum 15 microns (+/- 3 microns).
2-3 Rolling shutters (IS:6248)
Rolling shutters shall be as per the size to suit the dimensions of the openings
shown in the drawing. Unless otherwise specified, they shall be fabricated out of
18 gauge thick mild steel laths of convex corrugation with rolling centre 65mm
and width minimum 12mm corrugation depth. The laths shall be interlocked by
alternate and clips.
The side guides shall either be of rolled section or one piece pressed construction
and shall be of size 25mm wide, 75mm deep. Thickness shall not be less than
3mm.
The shutter shall be provided with bottom lock plate 3mm thick and reinforced by
an angle iron stiffener at the bottom and MS flat at the top.
The suspension shaft shall be of adequate design and unless otherwise specified
shall be formed from 8 guage seamless tube 6mm ).D. with suitable flange
coupling.
The springs shall be of approved high tensile steel flat or coil spring hardened and
tempered. These shall be fitted inside the fabricated housing.
The ball bearings shall be double self aligning ball bearings fitted inside CI
housing fixed on side brackets holding the suspension brackets at either end.
The suspension of the shutter shall be bolted in specially fabricated cages formed
from MS flats and plates all arc welded.
The hood cover shall be made of 20 gauge MS sheets with necessary stiffeners
and framework.
The locking arrangement shall consist of hoop and start on the bottom plate,
locable from both the sides,
Unless otherwise specified, for overall area of rolling shutters upto 5 sq.mtrs pull
and push type hand operated shutters shall be provided, for area from 5 sq.mtrs to
10 sq.mtrs pull and push type with ball bearings shall be provided and area larger
than 10 sq.mtrs mechanically operated gear and/or electrically operated shutters
shall be provided.
The shutters, hook covers, etc. shall be given 2 coats zinc chromate primer after
thorough surface preparation and further 2 coats of paint of approved quality and
colour.
The erection of these shutters shall be carried according to manufacturer‟s
specifications. While fixing concrete members, only shell anchors shall be used.
Chiselling of concrete for fixing bolts will not be allowed.
2.4 COLLAPSIBLE STEEL GATE:
It shall consist of vertical double channels at 10cm. centres. The sizes of channels
T. Section for top and bottom shall be as approved by the Consultants. The gate
shall be provided with necessary bolts, nuts, locking arrangements, stoppers and
brass handles on both sides. The gate shall be painted with one coat of
anticorrosive paint before erection and two coats of synthetic enamel paint of
approved quality and shade.
2-5 Mode of payment and measurement:
Wooden doors and windows: the rate quoted shall include the cost of all frames,
shutters, glass panes, if any and the necessary fixtures, wooden preservatives,
fixing them in position and embedding the holdfasts in concrete and /or fixing the
frame to concrete members with rawl plugs, screws, surface preparation either
applying specified number of coats of approved paint/ polishing complete, and
shall be paid on square metre basis.
For measurement of doors, the width shall be overall width of the frame measured
prior to plastering, and height shall be measured from finished floor level to the
top of topmost frame prior to plastering.
For measurement of windows, the width and the height shall be overall frame size
measured prior to plastering.
Where only door shutters are to be paid separately as in the case of partition walls,
they shall be paid on actual dimension of shutters.
For woodwork other than doors, shutters: unless otherwise specified, the
woodwork shall be measured in cubic metre basis.
The length, breadth and depth of the member shall be measured after planning.
Steel Doors & Windows: The rate quoted shall include the cost of supplying
fabricating and fixing in position frames, putty, glass panes, all necessary fixtures,
applying paints as specified, embedding holdfasts in concrete or fixing to concrete
members with rawl plugs and GI screws etc. complete and shall be paid on square
metre basis.
For measurement for windows, the width and height shall be the overall
dimension measured prior to plastering.
For doors, the width shall be the overall width prior to plastering and the height
shall be from finished floor to the top of top frame measured prior to plastering.
Aluminium doors and windows: The rate quoted shall include the cost of
supplying, fabricating and fixing in position frames, glass panes, rubber beading,
all fixtures including floor springs, hinges, etc. anodising, applying protective
cover embedding the holdfasts in concrete and/or fixing the frames to concrete
members with rawl plugs and brass screws and where necessary the cost of rubber
gasket (3mm thick) barrier between aluminium member and steel member etc.
complete.
Measurement shall be on square metre basis for the actual work provided.
Rolling shutters: The rate quoted shall include the cost of supplying, fabricating,
fixing in position with shell anchors, or rawl plugs, bolts, all necessary fixtures
including surface preparation and applying paint as specified and shall be paid on
square metre basis for the area of clear opening.
SECTION – J
WATER PROOFING
J.1 Bitumen felts based waterproofing and damp-proofing :
IS - 1322 Specification for bitumen felts for waterproofing and
damp-proofing.
IS - 1346 Code of practice for waterproofing of roofs with bitumen
felts.
IS - 1609 Code of practice for laying damp-proof treatment using
bitumen felts.
IS - 3067 Code of practice for general design, details and preparatory
work for damp-proofing and waterproofing of building.
IS - 1580 Specifications for bituminous compounds for
waterproofing and caulking purposes.
J.2 The waterproofing work shall be got carried out by approved contractors
such as M/S. Overseas Water Proofing Co., or M/S. Leak Proof etc. who
have experience in doing waterproofing work and shall give a guarantee
on a stamped paper for good performance of the waterproof treatment
for a minimum of seven years period and shall, at their own cost,
rectify the defects if any found during the guarantee period.
If approved by the Engineer, in situ fiber glass tissue reinforced
bitumen layers equivalent to bitumen felt may be used.
J.3 Surface preparation :
Concrete and masonry surface :
Any cracks in the surface (other than hair cracks) shall be cut to V-
shape, cleaned and filled with cement mortar 1:2 or with bitumen
conforming to IS-702 as directed by the Engineer.
All fungus growth, if any, moss, dust shall be removed by wire brushing.
Masonary drain mouth shall be widened to two and a half times the
diameter of the drain and rounded with cement mortar.
When a pipe passes through RCC slab a cement concrete fillet shall be
built around the pipe and waterproofing taken over the fillet.
In brick parapet walls a chase shall be made in the parapet wall to
terminate the bitumen felt. No chasing shall be made in the RCC parapet
walls.
J.4 Bitumen based waterproofing shall consist of either Normal Treatment
or Heavy Treatment or extra heavy treatment as specified.
J.5. Waterproofing of roof, bathroom, water tanks etc. by cement based
waterproofing compounds and by injection grouting :
Where specified this work shall be carried out by the Contractor who
has specialized in carrying out this work. The contractor shall give a 10
year guarantee on a stamped paper for good performance of his work
and shall undertake to rectify the work at his own cost if any defects are
observed during the guarantee period.
In general the waterproofing shall be carried out as per specification
of the specialist but duly approved by the Engineer.
The roof surface before waterproofing shall be cleaned thoroughly
and watered and shall be kept wet at least 12 hours prior to carrying out
of waterproofing. If any leakage is observed the source of leakage shall
be located and it shall be treated either by injection grouting or by
closing of the cracks with application of cement mortar 1:2 after cutting a
V-shape groove. The treatment shall be continued till the leakage is
stopped.
Brick-bat coba in special waterproof cement mortar shall be laid to
required slope, and shall be well compacted. A40 mm thick IPS type
finishing using waterproof extensive trowelling. A false square shall
be provided by pressing string, 3 mm dia, on the surface. The top
finish shall be continued upto 300 mm height in the parapet wall (in the
case of bathroom it shall be carried out upto 1000 mm high without
fillet). Necessary grooves shall be provided in the walls to terminate the
waterproofing treatment. At the junction of the wall and the floor a round
or triangular fillet of size 200 mm x 200 mm shall be provided. The
entire surface shall be cured for minimum 14 days, by storing water to a
depth of at least 150 mm in the entire area. During this period if any
leakage is observed the same shall be rectified.
WATERPROOFING WITH CHINA-MOSAIC FLOORING.
The mosaic shall consist of broken, flat pieces of glazed tiles, 1/4” thick and of
approved colour and quality. All pieces of tiles shall be of overall uniform size
but not uniform in shape.
The bedding for the tiles shall be with lime mortar 1:2 (1 lime putty : 2 surkhi) or
as specified in the description of the item. The average thickness of the bedding
mortar shall be 1/4” to 1”.
Graded brick bat coba on which the tiles are to be laid shall be cleaned, wetted
and mopped, Specified mortar bedding shall then be spread, tamped and corrected
to proper levels and allowed to harden sufficiently to offer a fairly rigid cushion
for the tiles to be set .
Cement slurry of paste like consistency shall be spread over the bedding at the
rate of 1/4 cft. of cement/100 sft.
Immediately on application of cement grout, assorted pieces of coloured/white,
China, previously soaked in water shall be set closely on the fresh surface and
properly tamped to the required grade. The cement grout freshly laid shall work
its way to the top surface.
The surface, after completion of work shall be finally cleaned with saw dust and
waste and if so directed by the Architect, with diluted acid.
China mosaic shall be taken up the parapet walls to a height of 6”. Necessary
watta shall be provided towards drain pipes as shown on drawings or as directed
by the Architect.
China mosaic shall be cured for at least ten days. The entire surface of the floor,
after curing, shall be washed and finished clean. The finished floor shall not
sound hollow when tapped with a wooden mallet.
The Contractor shall give a guarantee for all types of waterproofing for a
minimum period of ten years against bed or faulty material/construction and shall
rectify the work at his own cost during the guarantee period.
Payment for work executed shall be made for projected area only between the
inside of plastered walls. No payment shall be made for rounding off at corners
or for work carried on vertical faces of walls, column projections, etc.
WATERPROOFING BY APPROVED AGENCY.
Basement Waterproofing.
The underground structures shall be treated by „Box Method‟ 15cms. thick layer
of 1:3:6 cement concrete using No. 2 metal shall be laid with smooth surface
finished. With trowel on well compacted soil or rubble soling or plum concrete in
accordance with the soil strata.
On this „Certroof‟ waterproof layer on cement base and about 7.5 cm. thick shall
be laid, using 1 layer of shahabad stone placed diagonally with cut joints. After
the R.C.C raft is laid this treatment shall be carried along the outer surface of the
wall and upto a height of 30cm. above ground level. The thickness of the
treatment to vertical sides is about 4 cms.
Waterproofing of Water Storage Tank:
In case of water storage tank, after the plumbing work is complete, the outer
surface of the walls is plastered by the & surface methods to floor and walls
including partition walls which includes the internal plaster finished smooth with
trowel. The thickness of treatment of the floor shall be 6.5 cms, and on the walls
2.5 cms. and finished smooth with the help of trowel. The tank shall be filled
immediately after the treatment is completed.
Lawn Terrace.
The terrace shall be treated with “Surface” method which after the slab shall be
very through cleaned and brickbat coba with necessary gradient shall be laid for
the easy flow of rain water. The coba shall be finally covered with „Cetroof‟
pointless waterproof plaster, finished smooth with trowel in cement colour with
false markings of 30 cms. square. The treatment shall be carried along the
vertical surface of the parapets of adjoining walls upto a height of 30 cms. in the
shape of a round vata. The average thickness of the treatment shall be 11.5 cms.
thickness and at the rain water outlet it shall be 7.5 cms.
The treatment on the walls in this case will be for height of 300mm. above the
final level.
Waterproofing to Toilet Blocks:
All toilet blocks shall be treated with waterproofing on floors including 12 cm.
brick bat coba, in lime mortar 1:2 laid to slope and upto 1M. height of wall dado
and shall be made properly watertight around all plumbing work.
Terrace Waterproofing:
The terrace shall be first treated with waterproofed brick bat coba in cement
mortar 1:2 laid to slope and of thickness as per the detailed drawings. the slopes
shall be properly graded for even flow of water towards the down take pipes.
The junction of the slab and the parapet wall shall be treated with waterproof
flashings or fillet. The treatment of waterproofing shall be carried over to the
parapet wall.
Guarantee for all waterproofing work:
The item of waterproofing shall be carried out by M/s. India Waterproofing
company or equivalent to be approved by the Consultants and to their
specifications.
A written guarantee in approved form shall be furnished to certify that the
waterproofing shall be free from defects of materials and workmanship for a
period of 10 years. The leakage, failure to stay in place, splitting, pulling loose,
illegatoring, tearing, undue expansion and contraction shall be judged as defective
work.
Waterproofing of Under Ground Swimming Pool :
Providing and laying waterproofing for Under Ground swimming pool as per
specifications listed below with a minimum guarantee period of 15 years :
Checking the swimming pool by filling it with water fully and marking the
defective porous areas.
The first part consisting of grouting the porous concrete with non-shrink
cementitious grout.
The second part consisting of treating the cracks and construction joints by
routing – out to a minimum ¾” x ¾” groove and treating it with a specialized non-
shrink cementitious compound ( TAMMS “ Tammspatch”).
The third part consisting of making vata ( gola) at the interface joint of the RCC
slab and wall with a specialized non-shrink cementitious compound ( TAMMS “
Tammspatch”).
The fifth part consisting of providing and applying “ Catalytic” In – depth
Crystalline Waterproofing System ( TAMMS “ HEY „DI”) as per manufacturers‟
specification to permanently fix non-soluble crystalline growth throughout the
capillary tracts and pores of concrete at a speed of 60 – 65 cms per year inside
concrete. The “ Catalytic “ In-depth Crystalline Waterproofing System shall be
able to withstand atleast 460 ft. of water head pressure. The “ Catalytic” In-depth
Crystalline material shall be applied by brushing / spraying at the coverage rate of
0.8 – 1.0 kg. /sq.m on the entire concrete slab and walls from inside as well as
outside.
The sixth part consisting of providing and laying leveled, avg. 20 – 25 mm thick,
CM 1:4 plaster admixed with ZUPA Santulan Integral waterproofing Compound
@ 1 packet / bag of cement, to facilitate laying the tiles.
Guarantee Period:
Contractor should note that the work done is subject to free service guarantee
from the date of completion of Treatment for a period of TEN YEARS against
any damage. This guarantee shall include periodical (once in 3 months)
inspection and treatment if necessary to check the damage. Amount equivalent to
5% of the value of Water proofing work will be retained from the contractors final
bill towards performance guarantee for a period of 10 years However contractor
can furnish a Bank Guarantee of equivalent amount in lieu of cash retention on a
renewable basis. After the successful completion on 10 years. The B.G. will be
released.
SECTION - K
PAINTING & FINISHING.
Painting (General)
All paints shall be of the make approved by the Architect ready mixed paints as
received from the manufacturer without any admixture shall be used. If thinner is
necessary in the case of ready mixed paints, the name shall be as recommended
by the manufacturers.
The Contractor shall bring all the approved paints to the site of work in their
original containers in sealed condition. Paints which will be sufficient for the
entire work or at least for a fortnight‟s work shall be brought in at a time. The
empties shall be removed from the site only when the item of work has been
completed and permission obtained from the Architect.
Paintings shall be started only when the Engineer has inspected the items of work
to be painted, satisfied himself about their proper quality and given his approval
to commence the painting work.
Painting, except the priming coat, shall be taken in hand only after all other
builder‟s work is practically completed. The entire building cleaned up at least
one day in advance of the paint work being started.
The surface to be painted shall be thoroughly cleaned and dusted. All rust, dirt
scales, grease etc. shall be removed before painting is started. The prepared
surface shall be got approved by the Engineer before painting work is
commenced.
The paint shall be thoroughly stirred in their original containers before pouring
them into smaller tins for use. While applying also, the paint shall be
continuously stirred in the smaller tins so that the consistency is kept uniform. If
required, a thinner shall be used to bring the paint to the required consistency.
Two or more coats of painting shall be done either with brushes or by spraying as
stipulated in the items of work.
Each coat shall be allowed to dry out thoroughly before the next coat is applied.
Each coat except the last coat shall be thoroughly rubbed down with sand paper or
fine pumice stone and cleaned of dust before the next coat is applied. The
finished surface shall present a smooth and even surface without any hair marks
from the brush or clogging of paint puddles.
White painting doors and windows, the putty round the glass panes shall also be
painted. Tops of shutters and other similar hidden locations shall not be left out in
painting. After painting the glass panes shall be thoroughly cleaned. By using
solution available in market specially made for cleaning glasses
All painting work shall be measured in sq.m. Unless otherwise specified. In
measuring painting of joinery and steel work, etc., the co-efficient as given in
IS:1200 - 1964 shall be used to obtain the area payable, unless otherwise specified
in the description of the item.
All furnitures, fixtures, glazing, floors, etc. shall be protected by covering and
stains, smears, splashings if any shall be removed and any damage done shall be
made good by the Contractor at his own cost.
The rate shall include the cost of all labour and materials involved in all the
operations described above and any other specifications given under the relevant
item.
PAINTING PRIMING COAT ON WOOD, IRON OR PLASTERED
SURFACE.
The priming coat shall be as specified in the description of the item. The primer
shall be prepared at site or ready made paint of approved brand and manufacture.
At site, the primer for wood work shall be prepared from a mixture of red lead,
white lead and double boiled linseed oil in the ratio of 7 lbs: 7 lbs : 1 gallon. For
iron work, the same shall be prepared from a mixture of red lead, raw linseed oil
and turpentine in the ratio of 29 lbs: 1 gallon : 1 gallon. All the ingredients of
primer shall conform to Indian Standard specifications and shall be of approved
manufacture and shall be brought to site in their original packings in sealed
condition. the primer for the plastered surface shall be either distemper primer or
cement primer of approved make.
The surface shall be prepared to receive priming coat as follows:
WOOD WORKS: The surfaces to be painted shall be dry and free from
moisture. All unevenness shall be rubbed down smooth with sand paper and shall
be well dusted. Knots, if any shall be covered with a preparation of red lead made
by grinding red lead in water and mixing with strong, hot glue. The surface
treated for knotting shall be dry before the primer is applied.
After the priming coat is applied, the holes etc. on the surface shall be stopped
with glazier‟s putty or wood putty. Stopping shall not be done before the priming
coat is applied as the wood will absorb the oil in the stopping and the later is
therefore liable to crack.
IRON AND STEEL WORK: All rust and scales be removed by scrapping or by
brushing with steel wire brushes. All dust and dirt shall be wiped away from the
surface. If the surface is wet. It shall be dried before the priming coat is applied.
PLASTERED SURFACE: Ordinarily, the surface shall not be painted until it
has dried completely. Trial patches of primer shall be laid at intervals and when
drying is satisfactory, painting shall be taken in hand. Before primer is applied,
all holes and undulations shall be filled up specification for doing POP to
obtained.
When the surface to be primed is finally okayed the primer shall be applied with
brushes, worked well into the surface and spread over and smooth.
PAINTING WITH READY MIXED PAINT:
All ready mixed paints shall be of approved brand and manufacture and of the
required shades. The different surfaces to be painted shall be prepared in the
same way as described under „Painting Priming coat in wood, iron or plastered
surface”. The priming coat shall have dried up completely before painting is
started.
The number of coats to be applied shall be as stipulated in the description of the
item. the painted surface shall present uniform appearance and glossy finish, free
from streaks, blisters etc.
WHITE WASHING WITH LIME:
Double scaffolding or stage scaffolding shall be provided for white washing to
walls or ceiling as the case may be. Where ladders are proposed to be used, their
tops shall be tied with pieces of old gunny bags to avoid scratches to walls.
Before white washing the new works, the surface shall be properly brushed free
from mortar droppings and other foreign matter.
The wash shall be prepared from fresh stone white lime. The lime shall be well
slaked, mixed and stirred with sufficient water to make a thin cream. This shall
be allowed through a clean coarse cloth. 4 oz. of gum dissolved in hot water, shall
be added to each cft. of cream. For making the cream one gallon of water shall be
added to 2 lbs of lime.
No. of coats to be seen in discription of item shall be applied with brushes on new
work till the surface presents a smooth and uniform finish. Each coat shall be
allowed to dry before the next one is applied. Further each coat shall be inspected
and approved by the Architect or his representative before the subsequent coat is
applied.
The finished dry surface shall not show any signs of cracking and peeling nor
shall it come off readily on the hand when rubbed.
White washing shall be measured in sq.m of the finished area. The deductions for
openings etc. shall be regulated as per IS:1200 - 1964. The rate shall include the
cost of all materials and labour involved in all the operations described above.
WATERPROOF CEMENT PAINT.
Water proof cement paint of the brand, make and shade approved by the Architect
shall be used.
The surface shall be thoroughly cleaned of all mortar droppings, dirt, dust, algae,
grease and other foreign matter by brushing and washing. The surface shall be
thoroughly wetted with clean water before the paint is applied.
Waterproof cement paint shall be mixed in such quantities as can be used up
within an hour of its mixing. It shall be mixed with water and applied strictly as
per manufacturer‟s instructions. The lids of cement paint drums shall be kept
tightly closed when not in use.
The paint solution shall be applied on the clean and wetted surface with brushes
or spraying machine. The solution shall be kept well stirred during the period of
application. The completed surface shall be watered after the days work.
The second coat shall be applied after the first coat has set for at least 24 hours.
before application of the second or subsequent coats, the surface of the previous
coat shall not be wetted. Three or more coats as found necessary to get a uniform
shade shall be applied on new work.
The specifications for scaffolding, measurements, etc. shall remain the same as
described under „white washing with lime‟.
SECTION – L
MISCELLANEOUS WORKS
ANTI-TERMITE TREATMENT.
PRE-CONSTRUCTION SOIL TREATMENT:
General:
The formation of the chemically treated soil barrier shall be accomplished in
stages as the building construction work progresses and due care shall be
exercised to ensure that each stage of treatment is well integrated with that
previously applied stage so that unprotected avenues of entry are not left open to
the termites.
Chemicals.
The Chemicals used for the soil treatment will be any one or of combination of
the following with the concentration shown against each in aqueous emulsion.
Treatment to Foundation and Plinth:
a. Treatment to sides of Col. pits/trenches/basement:
The bottom surface of the excavations made for column pits, trenches and
basements shall be treated with the chemical emulsion mentioned at 5
litres per 10 sft.
b. Treatment to backfill to Col. pits/Trenches/Basement:
The return earth in foundations in layers of 6 inches shall be treated as the
layers are filled in, in stage at the rate of 20 litres per 10 sft. of the vertical
or inclined surfaces of the concrete/masonry foundations. The chemical
emulsion should be directed towards the concrete/masonry surface of the
columns and foundations walls so that the earth in contact with these
surfaces is well treated with the chemical.
c. Treatment to natural soil surfaces:
Areas other than those occupied by the plinth beams and masonry walls
within plinth area of the building shall be treated with chemicals at the rate
of 5 litres per 10 S.F.
d. Plinth Filling:
Surface of the earth filled within the plinth shall be treated with chemical
emulsions at 5 litres per 10 S.F.
e. Forming of barrier around the external perimeter of the Building:
Earth around external perimeter of the building upto a depth of half metres
shall be treated at the rate of 1.67 litres per sft. of the plinth wall. In order
to create a direct barrier to the path of the pests treatment shall be carried
out by driving in 1” solid M.S. rods as close as possible to the plinth walls
at intervals of 12” and upto a depth of 18” and roads moved backwards
and forwards in a direction parallel to the wall to break up to the earth so
that the chemical emulsions poured into the holes formed mixed intimately
with the soil.
f. Treatment to critical areas:
Areas such as opening of the trenches made for soil pipes electrical cables,
floor draining etc. shall be well soaked with the chemical emulsions.
Measurements:
The rate quoted by the contractor for the item in the Schedule of Quantities for
treatment to foundations & plinth shall include for all items specified in clause 3
above. Payment shall, however, be made on the measurements of plinth area
(Horizontal plane) i.e. area covered by the depth of foundations excluding areas
open sky.
ANTI-TERMITE TREATMENT
1. Guarantee Period and Periodic Inspection:
Contractor should note that the work done is subject to free service guarantee
from the date of completion of Treatment for a period of TEN YEARS against
any infestation/and/or damage due to white ants. This guarantee shall be for non-
appearance of termites and shall include periodical (once in 3 months) inspection
and treatment if necessary to check the damage due to infestation. Amount
equivalent to 5% of the value of anti-termite treatment work will be retained from
the contractors final bill towards performance guarantee for a period of 10 years
However contractor can furnish a Bank Guarantee of equivalent amount in lieu of
cash retention on a renewable basis. After the successful completion on 10 years.
The B.G. will be released.
2. The work shall be taken up in stages and contractors shall carry out the work in
bits as and when he is called upon to do so by clerk of works/any other authorised
period. there shall be no claim whatsoever on account of carrying out the work in
stages.
3. Supervision:
The entire work of termite treatment at various stages of general work building
shall be carried out under supervision of clients‟ representative. The Contractor
shall employ experienced staff approved by the Architects to carry out such work.
Further, the termite proofing agency shall appoint an experienced representative
permanently posted at work site right from the commencement of treatment upto
its completion of treatment.
Acoustical Work
1. The contractor should understand the importance of Acoustics & work accordingly, as
the purpose and success of each & every indoor place is to provide best possible
acoustical environment for the any kind of programmers.
2. All the materials to be used for the work of ceiling / paneling shall be of the best quality
confirming to relevant I.S. code & approved by Architect / consultant.
3. All the exposed timber shall be of as per sample approved, with moisture contain as per
I.S. 287 & well seasoned, free from knots, cracks, warps, and other defects and shall be
treated against white ants with Aldrex – Aldrin or equivalent chemicals, as per
specifications of the manufacturers (minimum 2 coats).
4. All the internal timber frame shall be 1st quality teak wood as per approved sample
well seasoned free form knots, cracks, wraps, and other defects and shall be treated
against white ants with Aldrex – Aldrin or equivalent chemical ( Minimum 2 coats ).
5. The hardwood for supports & framing shall be seasoned Teak Wood of approved
quality.
6. Rate of all items include the cost of finishing timber with synthetic enamel paint / spirit
/ wax polish / melamine as specified to match with surrounding surface. The decision of
Architect on the nature of finishing shall be final and binding on the contractor without
any extra cost or as per B.O.Q.
7. All particle boards / ply sheets both marine and veneered block boards ( Phenol Bonded
) will be water proof quality with ISI mark ISO – 9001 off approved 1st class
manufacturers like Indian Plywood, Green Valley, Euroboard, Goyal, Products /
Marino Ply or equivalent. As per I.S. 710.
8. Glue shall be Fevicol / Vamicol or equivalent brand and approved product. All glue
joints shall be pressed / till glue has dried thoroughly and confirming to IS 848.
9. No nails shall be used except for temporary purpose for holding lapping or laminations.
10. All the edges shall have teak wood lapping of 6mm thick.
11. The contractor shall obtain the approval regarding shade, quality, type & make of color
in respect of fabric, paint and polish , carpet from Architect/ Consultant before
purchasing. The contractor, if required, shall produce the reasonable number of samples
and put up such samples on wall, partitions, and furniture as directed by Architect.
12. All unexposed surface of paneling/ ceiling will have coat of plating, primer or polish as
specified or directed by The Architect.
13. The frame work for false ceiling / paneling etc. shall be laid in true line, level in both
the directions, the wooden scantlings shall be straight and fixed rigidly with screws of
appropriate size, at appropriate distance as directed at required level. The framework
shall be painted with two coats anti-termite solution or Black Japan before the same is
covered with ceiling / paneling boards etc.
14. The G.I. suspenders for false ceiling shall be straight and fixed rigidly to R.C.C.
structures/ slab / roof truss / purlin or wood support etc. If required, for structural
stability, M.S. fabrication must be used.
15. All the G.I. suspenders, ceiling sections perimeter channels, intermediated channels,
ceiling angles, connecting clips, soffit cleats etc. used for Gypsum panels, Anutone
panels & ceiling should be as specified by the manufacture „India Gypsum Ltd‟ ( GS-
MFSC-41) & as per directions given by the Architect/ Consultant.
16. The gypsum panels / Anutone panels should be fixed as per detailed procedure given by
India Gypsum Ltd. Fixing of these panels, filling joints, finishing & painting should be
done as per the respective manufacturers specifications & directions given by the
Architect/ Consultant. I.S. 2542 & 2095.
17. The Resin bonded fiber glass wool insulation shall be made of fine, long inorganic
glass fibres bonded by high temperature resin and shall have energy conserving and
sound insulation properties. The glass wool made of UP Twiga Fiber glass Ltd. Or any
equivalent product and confirming to I.S. 8183 specification will be of required density
as per B.O.Q.
18. All the hardware to be used in furniture paneling and partitions will have to be
approved form the Architect.
19. Hardware fitting shall be from approved manufacturers and shall be confirming to
respective I.S.I. specifications.
20. Pain shall be Asian / ICI / Garware / Jenson & Nicolson or equivalent. The rates of
items shall include the cost of primer, preparation of proper surface by sand papering,
filling with required grade putty, two coats of paints and removing of stains on floors,
walls, ceiling and other movable items.
21. Different types of paints may required for different paneling or sections of paneling &
ceiling & contractor should follow the specifications & direction given by the
Architects about this.
22. Melamine polish – preparation of surface-filling grain completely with putty made of
whiting powder with required strainer and Acrypol N 83 ( Pidilite Ind. Ltd. ) Sand &
Surface mildly with 120/150 Emery paper softer drying for 15 min. polishing – 1 Mix
Acrypol SP 85 matt in equal proportions. Spray the mixture uniformly with a spray gun
at a pressure of 30 psi. 2. Allow it to dry for 6-8 hrs. 3. Sand surface with 120 / 150
Emery paper. 4. Repeat 1, 2 and 3 for two more coats up to required surface or
approved by Architect.
23. The rates quoted for various items included in this tender such as wooden framework,
false ceiling , paneling etc. shall be inclusive of the cost of necessary framework,
scaffolding, lifting or materials etc. As the work is proposed to be executed at various
heights / floor. The measurement of items included in this work shall not be taken and
pain separately for different floor level and varying heights.
24. On completion of work, contractor should perform the complete acoustical testing of
the auditorium & submit the reports to Architects / Consultant.
ROADS AND WALK WAY :
Dry Rubble Packing
Dry rubble packing shall first be leveled up and thoroughly consolidated by
means of heavy log hammer or frog rms. Rubble of specified thickness shall then
be laid and set with hand. It shall be consolidated by either, hand roller or wooden
leg hammer, free use of water being made during consolidation. All hollows and
hammer, free use of water being made during consolidation. All hollows and
interstices after consolidation shall be filled up with quarry, spalls, stone ships
etc., and the packing blinded with stone grift and watered and consolidated by log
hammer.
Rubble packing in road work shall be thoroughly consolidated by means of power
roller of 8 ton capacity instead of log, hammers and the surface shall be brought to
proper grade and camber. After checking the level, grade and camber the surface
will again be watered and rolled to receive road structure.
ASPHALT ROAD :
The asphalt road shall be constructed as follows : -
i) The ground shall be excavated in earth, murum upto the required level for
the road work including carting away the debris. This item of work shall
be carried out as per the general specifications for earth work.
ii) 23cm. thick rubble soling, shall then be carried out over the above. The
rubble soling shall be property hand packed with interstices filled in with
smaller stones, watered and rolled with a tons power roller.
iii) Black trap hand broken metal size 6cm. to 1 cm . to average 12 cm .
thickness shall be spread over the 23 cm. dry rubble soling. This shall then
be rolled to through compaction with 8 tons power roller.
iv) The metal shall then be grouted with hot bitumen of grade 20/40 at a
temperature of 350 degree – 375 degree F. The quantity of bitumen shall
be 50 kg. / 10 sq.m of the surface. This shall again be rolled with 8 tons.
Power roller.
v) Premix : Chippings of hard stones of size 2 cm to 1 cm coated with
shelspar B.S. at the rate of 4 1bs/ cft. Of metal, shall be a road uniformly
at the rate of 10 cu.ft. / 100 sq.ft.
The coated chippings shall be spread with rakes and rolled with 8tons.
Power roller, consolidated to 4 cm. average thickness. The shelspar B.S.
shall be heated to a temperature of 300 degree F and mixed with the
chipping in paddle mixers or hand operated drums.
vi) Seal coat : the surface shall be given a seal of premixed stone grit 1 cm.
size at the rate of 3 cu. Ft. and rolled with 8 ton power roller.
The stone grit 1 cm. size shall be mixed with shelspar B.S. at the rate of 20
1bs. Per cu.ft. of grit and carefully spread over the premixed chippings so
as to fill in voids of chippings.
CONCRETE DRIVEWAY :
The concrete driveway shall be constructed as follows :
Laying 15 cm .thick 1:2:4 mix concrete with nominal reinforcement as per
consultant‟s instruction ( as per the plain concrete specification ) rough finished ,
surface vibrated laid in alternate panels as directed by the consultants with dowel
Bars. The joints to be filled in with a hot mixture of 40% by weight of Mexphalte,
5% by weight of asbestos fire and 55% by weight of clean san. The temperature
of hot to be 350 degree F. and poured into the joints and allowed to set. On
cooling the surplus mix to be removed from the joints by a heated knife or crowel.
KERB STONES :
These shall be of precast concrete kerb stones of size 45 CM. X 30 CM. X 10 CM
and fixing in foundation concrete 1:3:6 mix. The joints between each stone shall
be cement pointed.
METAL WORK:
Steel used in the manufacture of rolled steel sections shall conform to IS 226 and
IS 1977 latest edition or any alternative quality of steel subject to structural
Consultant‟s approval.
ROLLING SHUTTERS:
Shall be of approved manufacture suitable for fixing in the position ordered i.e.
outside, inside, below lintel or between jambs. Shutters upto 12 Sq.m. in area
shall be manually operated or „Push Up‟ type while bidder sizes shall be of
reduction gear type mechanically operated by chain or handles.
These shall consist of 8 gauge sheet or as specified with 75 cm. M.S. lathes of
best quality mild steel strip machine rolled and straightened with an effective
bridge depth of 16 mm and shall have convex corrugation. These shall be
interlocked together through their length with and locks. These shall be mounted
on specially designed pipe shaft.
The spring shall be approved make coiled type. These shall be manufactured from
tested high tensile spring steel wire or strip of adequate strength to balance the
shutters in position. The spring pipe shaft etc. shall be supported on strong M.S.
or mallable cast iron brackets.
Both the side guides and bottom rail shall be jointless and of single piece in
pressed steel.
Top cover of shaft, spring etc. shall be of the same materials as that of lathe.
For rolling shutter with wicket gate night latch shall be provided free of cost.
The shutter and cover etc. shall be painted with one coat of anticorrosive paint
and two coats of synthetic enamel paint of approved quality and shade.
COLLAPSIBLE STEEL GATE:
It shall consist of vertical double channels at 10 cm. centres. The sizes of channels
T. Section for top and bottom shall be as approved by the Consultants. The gate
shall be provided with necessary bolts, nuts locking arrangement , stoppers and
brass handles on both sides. The gate shall be painted with one coat of
anticorrosive paint before erection and two coats of synthetic enamel paint of
approved quality and shade.
WROUGHT IRON GRILLS
Gills shall be manufactured as per drawings and the welded joints shall be
smooth. The grilles shall be painted with one coat of Anti-corrosive paint before
fixing and two coats of synthetic enamel paint of approved quality and shade.
PLUMBING SERVICES
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR
PLUMBING DRAINAGE AND WATER SUPPLY WORKS
1.0 GENERAL 1.1 Completeness of Contract -
1.1.1 Contractor shall be deemed to have carefully examined the specifications, general conditions and tender drawings etc. and to have been fully informed and have satisfied himself as to the nature and character of the work to be executed, site conditions and other relevant matters and details.
1.1.2 Contractor shall provide all terms whether specifically mentioned or not
but which are usual or required to make a complete working system and to ensure safe and satisfactory operation. All apparatus, appliances, material or labour which may be necessary to complete the work in accordance with the intent or purpose of these specifications shall be considered to be in the scope of work of the contract and shall be furnished without extra charge, as if fully described and called for in these specifications. In case of doubt or doubts, the tenderer shall clearly point out his understanding of the specifications, before award of contract.
1.1.3 Contractor shall study the site conditions before tendering and shall
satisfy himself before submitting his Tender as to the nature of the ground and subsoil, form and nature of the site, the hydrological, climatic and physical conditions at the site, the quantities and nature of work and materials necessary for the completion of the work and means of access to the site, the proneness of site to floods as also the highest flood levels, recorded, observe or found in the past, as also accommodation required by him, and, in general, shall himself obtain all necessary information as to the risks, contingencies, and other circumstances which may influence or affect his tender.
1.1.4 Unless otherwise agreed in writing, these specifications, drawings and
general conditions etc. form the contract documents and all clauses and conditions specified by the contractor stands null and void.
1.2 References - 1.2.1 References to standards, code, specifications, recommendations shall
mean the latest edition of such publications adopted and published at date of invitation to submit proposals.
1.3 Drawings and Literature - 1.3.1 Before proceeding with the work, the contractor shall submit general
layout and working drawings for approval as are necessary to demonstrate fully that all parts of the materials to be furnished will conform to the specifications.
1.3.2 Within 30 days of the acceptance of the tender the contractor shall furnish
three (3) prints of layout, assembly and erection drawings for approval. If any modifications are proposed by the owner / Consultant, six (6) further prints of the modified drawings shall be submitted. No modifications shall made in drawing after it has been approved by the Consultant/Owner without prior consent.
1.3.3 Approval by the owner/Consultant of the drawings shall not relieve the contractor of any
part of his obligation to meet all the requirements of the Contract or of the correctness of his drawings.
The contractor shall be responsible for and pay for all alterations of the works due to discrepancies or
omissions in the drawings or other particulars supplied by him, whether such drawings have been
approved or not.
1.3.4 After execution of works, contractor shall furnish a set of original tracings
of as-built drawings incorporating the modifications if any during execution.
1.4 Inspection and Testing at Contractor's premises - 1.4.1 Owner or its authorised representative shall have full power to inspect
drawings of any portion of the work or examine the materials and workmanship of the plant at contractor's works or at any places from which the material is obtained. Acceptance of any material shall in no way relieve the contractor of his responsibility for meeting the requirements of the specifications. The cost of any special tests and/or analysis not called for in this specification shall be borne by the owner in case the material proves satisfactory but shall have to be paid by the contractor in case the material or work is found defective or of inferior quality.
1.5 Material Availability 1.5.1 The successful contractor shall ensure that all materials are processed
well in advance to avoid any delay in completion of the project. They will intimate in writing to the consultant in the daily report proforma.
1.5.2 In case of non-availability of any particular material the contractor shall
procure next best available material and install the same at no extra cost to the Owner after written approval of the Engineer – in – charge..
2.0 BASIS OF TENDERING
2.1 The tender shall be complete covering the entire work of plumbing &
Sanitation system and ancillary services including all building system and outside utilities as shown in drawing and specified in the tender documents.
2.2 The contractor shall consult specification & drawings which give an idea
on these system and seek clarifications from the Engineer – in – charge. Where ever found necessary before quoting and before executing the work.
3.0 DRAWING 3.1 The drawings accompanying these specifications are design drawings
and generally are schematic. They do not show every off-set, T's, cross, Y's, Junctions coupling/flanges etc. which are required for installation in the space provided. The contractor shall show the drawings, as closely as is practicable and install additional bends, elbows or junctions, etc of required type and size. where required to suit local site conditions, from actual site measurement taken, subject to approval and without additional cost of the Owner. The Engineer – in – charge. reserves the right to make any reasonable change in outlet location prior to roughing in. All connections and appurtenances, shown in the various diagrams, shall be included in the finished job.
3.2 It shall be the contractor's responsibility to coordinate with all others, for
proper and adequate installation clearances. 4.0 ORDINANCE, CODE AND REGULATIONS 4.1 It shall be the contractor's responsibility to provide complete system,
as indicated and as required by applicable code of practice / Local bye laws etc. All clarifications, which have to be cleared with appropriate authorities shall be carried out without additional cost, to owner. Unless otherwise approved, the product shall bear the mark of approval of I S, as required, by the governing bodies, code and ordinances and local authorities whose permission are required for occupation of the building on completion.
5.0 SHOP DRAWINGS 5.1 The contractor shall prepare and submit for approval, detailed shop
drawings of all items, not detailed on the drawings, setting drawings, clearance drawings where required, for proper coordination and all changes to the drawings. It shall be the contractor's responsibility to see that all deviations from drawings and specifications, noted on the drawings and brought to the attention of the consultants, otherwise approval shall be automatically voided.
5.2 The Contractor shall prepare plumbing and water supply shop drawing coordinating with Electrical and HVAC layouts to avoid any conflict at the time of execution of work.
5.3 The Contractor shall prepare a shop drawing for sanitary ware, fixtures
and fittings showing positions planned with reference to tile line, height & all other aspects for approval of Engineer – in – charge.
6.0 MEASUREMENT LINES AND LEVELS 6.1 Before proceeding of with the work check, dimension of the building site
and establish lines and levels for the work specified. 6.2 All inverts, slopes and manholes elevations shall be established by
instruments, working from an established datum point. Elevation markers and lines shall be provided for consultants' use, to determine that slopes and elevations are in accordance with the drawings and specifications and local bye-laws.
6.3 Established grid and area lines shall be used for location of trenches in
relation to building and boundaries. Trenches shall be carried out to the true alignment and to required levels. No refilling will be allowed for the purpose of making up the bed of trenches, but to make the same with lean concrete mix 1:4:8.
6.4 Use of sight rails, boning rods shall be adopted during the whole process
of excavation and laying of the pipes. 6.5 Sight rails shall be fixed at suitable intervals which shall not exceed
twenty metres before the excavation is begun. No extra charges will be paid for excess excavation.
6.6 Sufficient width shall be available in the trenches to allow a space of 300 mm. on the either side of the body of drain pipe to facilitate laying of the pipes and jointing.
6.7 When the trenches are in deep or bad ground, the sides of the trenches
shall be supported with suitable timbering. 6.8 All pipes, water mains or gas mains, telephones and cables etc. met
within the course of excavation, shall be carefully protected and supported without any extra charges.
7.0 STONEWARE PIPES, BENDS, JUNCTIONS, JOINTING AND TESTING. 7.1 All stoneware pipes, bends, junctions, gully traps, intercepting traps shall
be salt glazed inside and outside and shall conform to the specifications of IS 651.
7.2 The pipes shall be 1st grade hard, sound, truly circular in cross Section, perfectly straight, free from all flaws and projections.
7.3 Before being laid, the pipes shall be thoroughly cleaned specially from the
inside. Cracked or chipped pipes shall not be used on the work. 7.4 WORKMANSHIP
Tarred gasket or hemp yarn soaked in thick cement shall first be placed
round spigot of each pipe and the spigot then be placed well home into the socket of the pipe previously laid. The pipe shall then be adjusted and fixed in the correct position and the gasket caulked tightly home so as to fill more than 1/4 of the total depth (13 mm. in depth) of the socket.
7.5 The remaining space in the socket shall then be tightly and completely
filled with cement mortar comprised of one part of cement and one part of sand, and shall be neatly leveled off, outside the socket of the pipe at an angle of 45 . A wooden caulking tool shall be used for forcing the mortar home into the socket. The inside of each pipe shall then be carefully wiped with the mop or scraper, sufficiently long to pass two joints from the end of each pipe and any projecting or extra cement shall be removed to leave the inside of the pipe clean as the work proceeds. All the joints shall be kept moist by means of wet Hessian bags to protect them from the sun or wind. All pipes entering manholes shall be set in cement mortar to effect a complete water tight junction.
All around the pipe, there shall be a joint of cement mortar 13 mm. thick between it and the bricks. The end of all pipes shall be properly built in and neatly finished with cement mortar with the manhole/ancillary structure.
The approximate quantity of cement and spun yarn per joint shall conform to IS 4127.
7.6 After sufficient interval has been allowed for the joints to set and before
filling the trench, the joints of the pipes and drains shall be proved water tight by filling the pipes with water in between two successive manholes to a level above the top of the highest pipe in the length to be tested, closing the ends of the sections and maintaining the water level for a period of one hour with a water head of 1500 mm. and water level dropping not more than 25 mm. during that hour.
7.7 All such testing shall be done wholly at the Contractors' expenses,
inclusive of apparatus, provision of water, etc., and the rate covers all the above work.
7.8 The pipes shall be laid to the alignment and gradient shown on the plan.
The maximum permissible slopes to the various diameters of pipes are as follows:
100 mm dia. pipe ... 1 in 40 150 mm dia. pipe ... 1 in 60
200 mm dia. pipe ... 1 in 80 230 mm dia. pipe ... 1 in 90 7.9 Where necessary, pipes shall be laid on a bed of plain cement concrete
1:3:6 and minimum 150 mm. thick, and shall be projected by providing haunching upto half the diameter of the pipes. The width of the concrete bed for various diameters shall be as follows:
100 mm. dia. pipe ... 380 mm. wide 150 mm. dia. pipe ... 450 mm. wide 200 mm. dia. pipe ... 600 mm. wide 230 mm. dia. pipe ... 700 mm. wide 7.10 BED CONCRETE FOR SEWER LINES 7.11 Where the pipes are laid on a soft soil, with the maximum water table
level, lying at the invert level of the pipe, the pipe shall be bedded in concrete.
7.12 Haunching - Where the pipes have to be laid in a soft soil with maximum water table
level above the invert level of pipe, but below the top of the barrel, the pipe sewers shall be haunched.
7.13 Encasing The sewer pipes shall be completely encased or surrounded with
concrete.
a) Where the maximum Water table level is likely to rise above the top of the barrel.
b) Where the sewers are to be laid adjacent to growing trees,
to avoid damage or displacement to pipe joints or to the pipe likely to be caused by the roots of the trees.
c) Where the top (Overt) of the pipe is less than 1200 mm.
under the road surface. d) Wherever the intensity of loading on pipes are expected to
exceed the normal limit of 1600 kg per metre length for stoneware.
8.0 CONCRETE PIPE DRAINS, LAYING, JOINTING AND TESTING 8.1 Cement concrete pipes, where called for on the drawings, shall be
centrifugally spun reinforced cement concrete pipes of an approved manufacture. Pipes shall be true, perfectly sound, free from cracks,
cylindrical, straight with a uniform bore throughout. Cracked or warped pipes with uneven texture shall not be used. These pipes shall conform to Indian Standard 458-NP2 Class.
8.2 The pipe shall be straight and free cracks.The end of the pipe shall be
square to their longitudinal axis, so that when placed in a straight line in the trench, no opening ends in contact shall exceed 1/8" (3 mm.) from 6" (150mm.) including and upto 24" (600 mm) dia.
8.3 The outside and inside surface of the pipes shall be smooth dense, and
hard, and shall not be coated with cement wash or other preparation. The pipes shall be free from local dents and bulges greater than 1/8" (3 mm.) in depth and extending over a length in any direction greater than twice the thickness of the barrel.
8.4 The pipes, before being laid, shall be brushed throughout to remove any
soil or stone, that may have accumulated therein, the inside of the socket and outside of the project being carefully cleaned. For small pipes, they should be titled up to remove any accumulations.
8.5 The pipes shall then be carefully laid in position.
8.6 Concrete Pipe Shall be jointed as described in I.S. 783. After setting out the pipes, the
collar shall be centered over the joint and filled in with tarred gaskin, till sufficient space is left on
either side of the collar to receive the mortar (1:2-1 cement :2 washed coarse sand) and caulked by
means of proper tools. All joints shall be finished at an angle of 45 to the longitudinal axis of the pipe
on both sides of the collar. The joint shall be cured for at least 4 days with wet Hessian bags.
9.0 Cast iron pipes & fittings
C I L A to IS 1536 and 1538 for laying, jointing and testing and for application in water main- embedded in foundation or through building drain lines above false ceiling, or below slab in horizontal position.
9.1 C I Spun pipes as per IS 3989 and Sand cast pipes as per IS 1729 for
laying, jointing and testing and for application in Soil Waste Vent and Roof drain system – Fixed vertically of hanging pipes below floor slab.
9.2 The fittings shall be medium type cast iron conforming to the latest I.S.
Specification 1538. 9.3 The pipes shall be lowered into the trench by means of suitable pulley
blocks, shear legs, chain, ropes, etc. After lowering the pipes they shall be arranged to coincide the centre line with the centre line of alignment. The pipes shall be laid in position Socket and of all pipes facing the direction of flow. (This shall also apply to double socketed specials as per IS).
9.4 Preparing the Joint -
The interior of the sockets and exterior of the spigots shall be thoroughly cleaned and dried. The yarn shall be placed around the spigot of the pipe, and shall be of proper dimensions, to centre the spigot in the socket. Making up of required length by knotting of strands of yarn shall not be allowed. Required length of yarn strands shall be in one place. When a single yarning material is used it shall have an over-lap at the top of not more than 50 mm. When more than a single strand is required for a joint, each strand shall be cut to sufficient length so that the ends will meet on opposite sides of the pipe and not on top or bottom. When the spigot is shoved home, the yarning material shall be driven tightly against the inside base or hub of the socket with suitable tools.
9.5 Leading - The leading of pipes shall be made by means of ropes covered with clay
or by using special leading rings. Lead shall be heated to proper temperature in a melting pot kept in easy reach of the working area so that molten metal will not be chilled on being carried from the melting pot to the joint (Molten lead at proper pouring temperature when stirred shows a rapid change of colour). The lead used shall be pig lead with 99.8% purity and shall conform to latest I.S. specification.
Before pouring, all scum or dross which may appear on the surface of the
lead during melting shall be skimmed off. Each joint shall be filled in one continuous poured or imperfectly filed joints shall be burnt out and repoured.
9.6.1 Precaution shall be taken for melting the lead as under :
i) The pot and the ladle in which lead shall be put shall be clean and dry.
ii) Sufficient quantity of lead shall be melted.
iii) Lead shall not be overheated. 9.6.2 The approximate depth of pig lead for each joint of Cast Iron pipes and
fittings shall be as under with a tolerance of + 5% :- Dia of pipe Depth of lead (Min)
80 mm. to 125 mm. dia. 45mm. 150 mm. to 250 mm. dia. 50mm. 300 mm to 450 mm dia. 55mm. 500 mm and 600 mm. dia. 60mm.
9.6.3 Quantity of lead and spun yarn for each joint in cast iron pipes and
fittings shall be as under, unless otherwise indicated.
Nominal dia. Lead required Spun yarn of pipe(in mm.) per joint required per
[in kg.] (Min) Joint (in Kg) (Min) 80 1.8 0.10 100 2.2 0.18 125 2.6 0.20 150 3.4 0.20 200 5.0 0.30 250 6.1 0.35 300 7.2 0.48 350 8.4 0.60 400 9.5 0.75 450 14.0 0.95 500 15.0 1.00 600 19.0 1.20 9.6.4 After the joints have been run, they must be thoroughly bulked until they
are perfectly watertight. Caulking of joints will be done after a convenient length of pipe has been laid and leaded. The leading ring shall first be removed with a flat chisel and the joint caulked round three times with caulking tools of increasing thickness and hammer 2 to 2.5 Kg. weight. Lead joints shall not be covered till the pipe lines are tested under pressure, but the rest of the pipe lines many be covered to prevent expansion and contraction due to variation in temperature.
9.6.5 Lead wool joint - Wherever it is impracticable or dangerous to use cast molten lead, such
as inverted joints or in wet drainages or under water where there is a need for cold application, joints may be made with caulking lead wool or lead yarn. Joints caulked with lead wool or lead yarn shall withstand greater displacement than cast lead joints.
9.6.6 i] Approximate weights and depths of lead wool required for each joint
of various dia. of Cast Iron pipes and fittings shall be as given in the following table. Just sufficient quantity of spun yarn shall be put so as to give specified depth of lead wool. A allowance of five percent variation in the specified weights and depths shall be permissible.
Diameter of pipe Wt. of lead Depth of lead in mm. wool in kg wool spun yarn [min] required in mm. [min] 80 0.80 19 100 0.90 19 125 1.25 20 150 1.60 23
200 2.05 23 250 2.95 25 300 3.50 25 350 4.65 29 400 5.70 31 450 6.70 32 500 8.30 33 600 10.00 35 9.6.6 ii] Jointing shall be made of with caulking lead wool or yarn inserted in
strings of not less than 5mm. thick and the caulking shall be repeated with each turn of lead wool or yarn. The whole of the lead wool or yarn shall be compressed into a dense mass. When working with lead wool, it is very important to use caulking tools of appropriate thickness to fill the joint space to thoroughly consolidate the materials from the back to the front of the socket.
9.7 Jointing Flanged Pipe - The pipes and fittings shall be accurately aligned in the back. The
jointing materials shall be inserted in between the flanges and the nuts shall be carefully tightened, in opposite pairs, until the joint ring is only just sufficiently compressed between the flanges to ensure water tightness of the joint under the desired water pressure.
The packing used should be rubber insertion cloth three-ply and of approved thickness. The packing should be of the full diameter of the flange with proper pipe hole and bolt hole neat and even at both the inner and outer edges. Where the flange is not fully faced, the packing may be of the dimension of the facing strip only. Its proper placing should be tested before another pipe is joined on.
9.8 The led joints shall be tested to a pressure of 150 1bs/sq. inch minimum
[10.54 kg./sq.cm] or such head as otherwise specified after being caulked and should any leakage occur, the leaking joints shall be remade and section re-tested at contractor's expenses, until satisfactory results are established.
9.9 Water Pressure Mains - Shall conform to IS 1538 - 1967 Class LA as specified in the schedule.
They shall be laid, jointed, and tested along with Cast Iron pipes as described in the specification for Cast Iron S/S pipes.
After each section of the pipe line has been completed it shall be tested for water tightness before
being covered. This can be done by closing each end, by means of a valve or blank flange, or plug
and fill the pipe with water. The pressure should then be raised by means of a small hand operated
pump till it registers fifty percent more than the 150 p. s. i. [10.54kg./Sq. cm] and the test
pressure should be ascertained by means of a reliable gauge. When the pipe is laid on any appreciable
gradient, the test should be carried out at the lower end of the section with an air vent at outer
end. Any leaking joint should be made good and the above test reapplied until no further leaks are
apparent.
10.0 SOIL, WASTE, RAIN-WATER, VENT AND ANTI - SYPHONAGE PIPES & FITTINGS. 10.1 Material and Fixing - All soil, waste and anti-syphonage pipes and fittings with in toilet areas
or within plumbing shafts vertical run, shall be centrifugally cast iron socket and spigot conforming to IS 3989 - or its subsequent revision. All cast iron pipes and fittings shall be of the best approved Indian make of soil variety and free from flaws, air bubbles, cracks, sand holes and other defects , truly cylindrical and in uniform thickness. They shall not be brittle but shall allow for heavy cutting, chipping and drilling, and shall not be less than the diameter, mentioned in the Drawing and shall be fixed against the wall or on M S brackets & `U' Bolts- & painted with two coats of paint.
10.2 JOINTS Jointing shall be carried out with molten lead. The spigot of the pipe must
be forced well home into its socket and must be entered, so that the joint may be of even thickness all round. At least, one complete lap of clean white hemp spun yarn shall be drawn into the bottom of the socket without being forced through the joint into. As many laps as may be needed to leave the space of not less than 25 mm. for the lead shall than be poured into the joint and caulked tight. The joints shall then be run with molten lead in sufficient quantity so that after being caulked solid, the lead may project 3 mm. beyond the face of the socket against the outside of the spigot but must be flush with the outside edge of the socket.
10.3 Clean outs at the head of cast Iron horizontal pipes running under the
floor shall be of cast Brass screwed in type. Floor and wall clean outs shall be of cast brass screwed type. The connection pieces shall be of G.I. threaded to suit the clean out with lead caulked joint.
10.4 Inspection chambers, gully traps, etc. , within the building shall be of
`Patel Pattern' cast iron with bolts, nuts to close the cover, all to be fabricated as per actual requirement, if so specified.
10.5 Supports, pedestals and base for inspection chambers gully traps and
pipes shall be in 1:3:6 cement concrete mix. 10.6 Pipe sleeves and inserts, etc., through RCC walls either external or
internal shall be of G I. provided with M S water bar flange. 10.7 During installation openings of pipes shall be plugged with wood cut into
required shape of gunny bags and to be maintained free from dirt.
10.8 G.I. waste pipes and fittings shall be of heavy class with G.I. unions, tail pieces, reducers and connections to be provided between joints to either lead or Cast Iron pipes.
10.9 The size of branch waste pipes for different fittings shall be as follows : Wash Basin 32 mm. dia. Urinal 40 mm. dia. Sink 40 mm. dia. Nahani Trap 80 mm. dia. P Trap 80 / 100mm. dia.
Special Floor Trap 80 or 100 mm.as required with bolted aluminium grating in 25 x 25 M.S.
angle.
10.10 W.C. pan connectors shall be to suit the requirements as per drawing,
with 40 mm. Vent horn for connection to the anti-syphonage pipe with pan connector of cast iron or lead.
10.11 Connection to the sewage or storm water collection sumps to be perfectly
water tight and as specified. 10.12 Rainwater flashing shall be made as per details with cast Iron dome
shape grating and extension piece . 10.13 All Roof drain pipes and fittings shall be soil pipe variety conforming to
IS 3989 / IS- 1729. This shall apply to pipes outside building or within the building or separate shafts.
10.14 The floor traps for toilet blocks shall be cast iron deep seal with C.P.
brass grating, bolted down design. 10.15 Bathroom C. P. grating shall be of bolted down design out of heavy
cast brass with the chromium plating of the best approved standard. 10.16 Cast iron gratings shall be flat with perfect edge of the best quality
procurable of the specified width and thickness and in the available lengths.
10.17 Spigot and socket. cast iron pipes shall be of heavy pattern for the
portion below the floor and embedded and laid over 150 mm. cement concrete 1:4:8, the width of the concrete being :-
80 mm. dia. ... 320 mm. wide 100 mm. dia. ... 400 mm. wide 150 mm. dia. ... 450 mm. wide 200 mm. dia. ... 600 mm. wide 10.18 The connection between the main pipe and branch pipes shall be made
by using branches and bends with access doors for cleaning.
10.19 Floor trap shall be provided with 25 mm. dia. puff pipe where the length
of the waste is more than 1.80 meter or the floor trap is connected to a waste stack through bends.
10.20 The waste from lavatories, basins, sinks, baths and other floor traps shall
be separately connected to respective waste stack of upper floor. The waste stack of lavatories will be connected directly to manhole while the waste stack of others shall be separately discharged over gully trap.
10.21 The main anti-syphonage pipe shall be of 80 mm. internal diameter.
When more than one branch from water closet, sink are connected with soil pipe and discharged into it anti-syphonage from the lowest one should pass through and be carried up parallel to the soil for a point 1.5 metres minimum above the highest branch. It can then be connected to the soil pipe or it can be carried independently. The anti-syphonage pipes of all the intermediate floors water closets should be joined with main anti-syphonage pipe. The ventilating pipe shall have internal diameter of not less than 80 mm. in all parts and shall be connected
with arms of soil pipe on trap through a 45 branch, at a point not less than 75 mm. and not more than 300 mm. from the highest part of the trap and on the side of the water seal which is nearest to the soil pipe. The jointing shall be done according to the specifications for piping materials used in soil, vent or connected to the drain. On no account should lime or lime concrete come in direct contact.
11.0 G.I. PIPES AND FITTINGS 11.1 All pipes shall be “ C “ class ( heavy ) I.S. quality and out of the
specified make to the requirement of the local authorities unless specified otherwise.
11.2 Pipes shall be galvanised inside and outside treated and fixed in
accordance with the Municipal requirements. The joints shall be distributed in strict conformity with the regulations. They shall be secured clear of the wall surface by means of G.I. holder bats. All control values, stop cocks, ball valves, bib-cocks shall be of the best approved quality procurable, of heavy cast drawn brass. All branches shall have individual control arrangement with fullway [peet] valves, to enable regulation and cut off as required. They shall be of best Indian manufacture specified in the schedule of quantities and of tested stampings and bear I. S. I. markings. all fittings shall be either `RR' or Ring & Cross make.
Laying and fixing Where pipes have to be cut or re-threaded, ends shall be carefully filled
out so that no obstruction to bore is offered. In joining the pipes, the inside of the socket and the screwed ends of the pipe shall be rubbed over with zinc and few turns of hemp yarn wrapped round the screwed
and of the pipe which shall then be screwed home in the socket with a pipe wrench. Care must be taken that all pipes and fittings are kept at all times free from dust and dirt during fixing.
11.2.1. The water tightness of joints shall be assured by approved methods of
jointing material. 11.3 Internal Work - All internal water supply pipes should be concealed pipes of GI C
class.For fittings outside the walls shall be fixed either visible by means of standard pattern holder-bat clamps, keeping the pipe clear off the plastered wall by 15 mm. for cold water and 38 mm. for hot water. Wherever indicated on the drawing or as directed by the Consultants, chasing of walls shall be done to embed pipes. All pipes and fittings shall be fixed truly vertical and horizontal or as directed by the Engineer-in-charge. All embedded cold water pipes are to be covered with bituminous polyethylene wrapping or equivalent approved by local regulations and National Building code. All embedded hot water pipes are to be painted with at least three coats and wrapped as above and then wrapped with three ply asbestos twine wrapped tightly around the pipe.
11.3.1 External Work For external work, G.I. pipes and fittings shall be laid in dug or prepared
trenches as called for or directed by the Engineer-in-charge. They should be wrapped, as specified above. The width of the trench shall be of minimum width required for working. The pipes laid underground shall not be less than 600 mm. from the ground level. They shall be surrounded on all sides by soft earth. The work of excavation and refilling shall be done in accordance with the general specification for earth work.
11.3.2 The wrapping of pipe shall be with 0.3 mm. thick FRP tissue as per
manufacture's specifications. 11.4 All G.I. pipes and fittings are to be tested to a pressure of 10.54 kg/cm2
for 2 hours to ensure that pipes have proper threads and that proper materials [such as white zinc and hemp] have been used in jointings. All leaky joints must be made leak proof by tightening or redoing at Contractor's expense.
11.5 All water fittings shall be of approved make and shall in all respects
comply with the latest Indian Standard Specification I.S.1239 [part II] The brass fittings shall be fixed in the pipeline in a workman like manner. Care shall be taken to see that joints shall be repaired, redone or replaced.
11.6 Wherever a G. I. pipe crosses a floor, the H D P E sleeve with 15 mm. all round clearance and projection by 80 mm. and below the floor should be provided. On no account should lime or lime concrete come in direct contact with G.I. pipe and fittings. This important condition shall not be waived under any circumstances.
12.0 MANHOLE, INSPECTION CHAMBERS, GULLY TRAPS,
INTERCEPTING CHAMBERS, DROP CHAMBERS ETC. 12.1 General: Unless otherwise specified, manholes or inspection chambers
of required depth shall be provided on all external drains, at all change of direction of the drain and where branch drain meets the main drain. They shall be of rectangular shape with a clear opening of 900 x 450 mm. Manholes shall be constructed of 230 mm. thick brick over P.C.C. bedding extending 230 mm. beyond the external face of the brick wall. Manholes beyond 1500 mm. depth shall be conical in section and circular at top with clear opening of 600 mm. diameter.
Masonry chambers shall be of such size as will allow necessary
examination and clearance of drains. The minimum internal bases as per the requirement of MCGM and their bye-laws if any, shall be adhered to.
In the absence of local bye-laws, the requirements stipulated in I.S. 4111
[Part-I] code of practice for ancillary structures on sewerage system, shall be followed.
12.2 Excavate to the sizes and depths required for the manholes. Construct
the manholes and refill outer space with selected excavation materials and dispose off surplus earth, as specified in "Excavation" 14.3 The specified size of manholes and chambers refers to inside dimensions. Build the manholes and chambers to the sizes and depths specified with brick wall in cement mortar as specified.
12.3 The manhole shall be built on a base of concrete of thickness of at least
150mm. for manholes up to 1000 mm. depths, 230mm. for manholes from 1000mm. to 2000 mm. depth and 300 mm. for manholes of greater depths. For special soil conditions, the thickness has to be as per structural design.
12.3.1 The thickness of walls shall be 230 mm. brickwork up to 1500 mm. depth
and 350 mm. for depths greater than 1500 mm. The actual thickness for deeper manholes shall be based on structural requirements.
12.3.2 In the case of manholes deeper than 1500 mm. but up to 1800 mm.
where conical manholes have been specified, the inside shall be 1200 mm. Up to 900 mm. below G.L./R.L and then taper off to 600 mm at the top, to conform to regulations. For greater depths, the internal dia. shall be increased as directed as per drawings.
12.3.3 Benching in manholes shall be in P.C.C. 1:2:4 and formed in position
with necessary channels as required. Bench up bottoms in fine cement rising 80mm. above the entire channel
with rounded edge and launched up to the sides, at an angle of 45 degree and rendered in cement and sand [1:3] trowelled smooth.
Proper cement concrete channel shall be provided at the bottom and the
branches from the various pipes shall discharge in the chamber with a suitable slope.
12.3.4 In all manholes over 900 mm. in depth, provide and build into walls
approved cast Iron catch-ring and steps at 300mm. interval beyond 450 mm. depth and make good cement rendering around as per I.S. 1742.
12.4 Cover the manholes with single seal cast iron heavy Duty manhole cover
and frame( 135 kg for 900 x 450 mm size & 225 kg for conical chamber ) of approved make. Fill the seal with prepared manhole grease.
12.5 The top level of the manhole with the cover on must be in line with the
finished ground level. However, if required and the finished ground level is not ascertained during construction of the manhole, the contractor shall temporarily fix the manhole cover till such time the final/paved ground level is established, or temporarily cover the built up manhole at no extra cost to owner. In case of any damage to the covers due to traffic or any other reasons during the course of the project, or in the maintenance period attributable to the negligence of the contractor, the same shall be replaced immediately by the contractor at his own cost. The frame and the cover shall be painted with black Bitumen Anti-corrosive paint.
12.6 Drop Connections: In case the difference in invert levels between
main drain and branch line requires a drop more than 600 mm., a drop connection should be provided generally as described below.
Cast iron or stoneware four way junction shall be fixed in position, at right
angle to the drop pipe, at the level where branch pipe enters the manholes; provide suitable height of vertical drop pipe terminating into a plain bend, duly benched into the cement concrete [1:2:]. Access for cleaning the bend should be provided at finished ground level.
12.7 Gully traps in all waste pipes shall be of best quality 150 x 100 or 230 x
150 as indicated and laid on a 150 thick 1:3:6 cement bedding. They shall be enclosed in brick and cement mortar masonry with cement plaster forming as inspection chamber with full size 230 x 300 cast iron frame and cover ( 15 kg ) or open grating 300 x 300 as required. Location and details will be indicated in the drawing.
12.8 There shall be 100 mm. dia vent pipes at the sewer trap chamber and 100 mm. ventilating pipe at the manhole at the head of the drain to be routed aesthetically as directed.
12.9 TRAPS Exposed trap for all wash basin and urinal in public area shall be
chromium plated cast brass. 12.10 Traps installed in connection with cast iron pipe shall be of the same
quality and grade of the pipe; the size of outlet all correspond to the socket of the pipe receiving it.
12.11 Provide 150 x 100 size heavy cast iron sealed gully trap with
extension piece having single or double inlet as shown. where required provide cast iron sealed cover, for such trap, secured with threaded gun metal bolts and felt gaskets.
12.12 An intercepting trap of required size shall be installed in the last inspection chamber prior to connecting with the public sewer or disposal system. this chamber shall be about 2000 mm. within the boundary of the property.
13.0 SANITARY FITTINGS All sanitary fittings shall be as specified in drawings and as approved by
the Engineer- in- charge 13.1 All setting and bedding of sanitary fittings shall be done carefully to suit
the required levels. Mortar drops, paint splashes etc. shall be removed from fittings, walls and floors immediately before these get dry.
13.2 Wooden plugs - The plugs shall be of hard wood and of size 50 mm. x 38 mm. at a top
and of length 50 mm. These shall be fixed on wall in cement mortar 1: 3 (cement : 3 sand), after the plugs are fixed in wall, the mortar shall be cured till it is set.
13.3 Wall Hung Water Closets - Wall hung box rim closets in pastel shades of approved make having
back inlet and "p" trap outlet shall be fixed an appropriate cast iron or M S Brackets of suitable design to suite the thickness of toilet wall and ensure that the chair is self supporting and independent of the wall.
13.4 Plastic Seat and Cover - The Seat shall be fixed to the pan by mean of two 8 mm. dia corrosion
resistant C.P. hinge bolts with a minimum length of shank of 65 mm. and threaded to within 15 mm. of the head. Each bolt shall be provided with
two suitably shaped washers of rubber of or of other similar material for adjusting the level of the seat while fixing it to the closet. In addition one 8 mm. non/ferrous metal of stainless washer shall be provided with each bolt. The maximum external diameter of the washers fixed on the underside of the pan shall not be greater than 25 mm. One arm of the hinge in each bolt shall be fixed to the underside of the seat by three nos. 20 mm. long C.P. screws. The other arm of the hinges shall be fixed to the underside of the cover flush with the surface by means of 3 nos. 10 mm. long C. P. Screws.
13.5 Flush Valve The Brass C P / S .S concealed Flush valve shall be of approved make
and shall be fixed as per tile pattern as shown in detail drawing 13.6 Health Faucets The Health faucets ( Jet spray ) shall be of approved make along with C P
angle cock and wall flange and shall be fixed as per tile pattern as shown in detail drawing
13.7 Coat Hook The Brass C P coat hooks shall be of approved make along with S.S
screws and shall be fixed as shown in detail drawing. 13.8 Toilet Paper Holder - The S S Concealed / Open Toilet paper holder of approved make shall be
fixed in position by means of C.P screws embedded in the wall to suit tile pattern
14.0 Half stall Urinals - Urinals shall be Large flat back in pastel shade fixed in position by using
screws, and shall be at a height of 600 mm. from the floor level to the top of the lip of urinal, unless otherwise directed.
14.1 Each urinal shall be connected to 32 mm. dia G I waste pipe which shall
discharge into the channel or floor trap. The connection between the urinal and flush or waste pipe shall be made by means of C.P. Bottle Trap heavy type.
14.2 All urinal pans will have individual Auto flush electronic sensing system of
approved type and make complete, including all accessories / wiring etc.. 14.3 C P Spreaders, Intel, outlet connections shall be prepared to actual site
measurement, to ensure proper verticality and elegance. These shall be full bore and shall not form any dents.
15 Wash Basin -
The basin shall be Oval / Round below counter type in pastel shade of
approved make supported on a pair of concealed cast iron brackets 15.1 Each Wash Basin shall be connected to 32 mm. dia G I waste pipe which
shall discharge into the floor trap. The connection between the wash basin and waste pipe shall be made by means of C.P. Bottle Trap heavy type.
15.2 C P Single leaver Pillar cock , C P Angle cock with wall flange, C P
flexible connection shall be of approved make and range and fixed as per tile pattern as shown in detail Drawing.
16 S. S. Sink - The Sinks shall be of large size with bowl and single drain board of
approved make supported on a pair of concealed cast iron brackets 16.1 Each Sink shall be connected to 40 mm. dia G I waste pipe which shall
discharge into the floor trap. The connection between the sink and waste pipe shall be made by means of C.P. Bottle Trap heavy type. 16.2 C P Single leaver swinging sink cock , C P Angle cock with wall flange,
C P flexible connection shall be of approved make and range and fixed as per tile pattern as shown in detail Drawing.
17.0 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 17.1 General:- Provided proper solid angle iron/channel section. supports for all pipes
complete with clamps. Wherever insulation comes, provided wooden guide to support pipe on the angle iron hanger / supports. In general where a bunch of pipes run as far as possible MS plates inserts are provided in the beams / slabs to facilitate welding of angle iron supports. For attachment in concrete, use "DASH" fasteners or Anchor plug type inserts or equivalent. Provide hangers within 1 mtr. of all changes in direction of mains and a minimum of 3 hangers per expansion bend. provide all additional structural steel angels, channel or other members not specifically shown but are required for proper support.
17.2 Where necessary additional hangers to be provided to arrest water
hammers or hydraulic resonance with proper rubber padding. 17.3 Space hangers, as noted below, except on all soil pipe which shall have
a hanger of multiple fittings, sufficient hangers shall be provided to maintain proper slope without sagging; in case of angle suspended lines, the following is suggested :
A) Pipe sizes Hanger Road Dia
20 mm. through 50 mm. 10 mm. 63 mm. through 125 mm 13 mm. 150 mm. and over 16 mm. B) Pipe Sizes Spacing of supports 13 mm. to 20 mm. 1500 mm. apart 25 mm. to 38 mm. 1800 mm. apart
50 mm. and above 2000 mm. apart as per I.S.
17.4 Provided floor stands, wall brackets or masonry piers etc. for all lines
running near the floor near walls so that those lines can be properly supported or suspended from the walls or floors. pipe lines, near concrete or masonry walls may be hung also by hangers carried from wall brackets at a higher level than pipe. Hanging of one pipe from another is prohibited.
18.0 VALVES AND PRESSURE GAUGES 18.1 Pressure gauges shall have not less than 115 mm. dial, 10 mm gas
threads, brass body syphon and gauge cock of 10 mm. size. Dial ranges shall be adequate for the pressures encountered and as specified.
18.2 Provided valves on branch pipe connection to mains and at connection to equipment
where indicated. All valves are to be located for easy access and are to be full bore of pipe
connected together. Support all valves wherever necessary. Valves are to be as per I.S 780 (Class I)
for cast iron sluice valves and to I.S 778 for G. M valves and tested and approved by local
authorities as per bye-laws in force.
18.3 All globe and check valves shall have working parts suitable for cold
water, as required. Valves shall be tagged with permanent label under hand wheel indicating type and duty.
18.4 All valves over 150 mm. dia. in equipment rooms located over 2000 mm.
above floor shall be provided with chain wheels with chains extending upto 1800 mm. above floor.
18.5 Where indicated and specified, angle pattern stop cocks, at each
cold water inlet to be provided. They should be anti-scalding pattern same as faucets of approved manufacture.
18.6 Provide C.I. body with brass disc spring loaded & straineof approved quality.
19.0 Strainers :- Cast iron pot strainer with G.M. mesh screen in perforated brass strainer
body of approved manufacture are to be provided before valves. Provide each Strainer with a cock for blowing down. Screening area of the
strainer shall be minimum of 5 times more than pipe area, with 1 mm. maximum size holes.
20.0 CLEANING, OPERATION AND TESTS 20.1 Plumbing equipment fixtures, piping etc. shall be free of stampings,
markings (except those required by codes) iron cuttings and other foreign materials.
20.2 cold and drinking water systems shall be cleaned thoroughly, filled and
flushed with water.
20.3 The entire mechanical apparatus shall operate at full capacity without objectionable
noise or vibration.
20.4 The system has to be periodically given the tests specified in the
presence of site engineer and the client's representative as herein specified.
All test equipments, accessories, materials and labour necessary for
conducting the tests and for inspection and repair work shall be arranged well in advance of the test date.
After shortcomings are repaired or defective items replaced the test will
be repeated until the entire system found satisfactory. If the local regulations insist on similar tests before approving authorities, the same shall be complied with and acceptance from the authorities lodged with the Consultants/Owner.
20.5 The entire system of soil, waste and vent piping to be tested with
water after the roughing-in is completed and before the fixture are set. After setting the fixtures, provide smoke test, after sealing all types.
20.6 Water Test entire system or sections of system by closing all openings in piping
except the highest opening and filling system with water to the point of overflow. If the
system is tested in sections, plug each opening except the highest opening of the section filled with water. Keep the water in system or in the specific section under test for atleast 45 minutes before inspection starts with test pressure/head lasting for two hours. The system must be tight at all joints.
20.7 Final Test : After fixtures are set, test system with smoke as follows: Smoke Test : Fill traps with water, then introduce into system a pungent thick smoke
produced by one or more smoke machines. When smoke appears at stacks on the roof, plug, stacks and allow pressure of 25 mm. water column to build up in system. Maintain pressure for 15 minutes before inspection starts. The system shall be tight at all joints. Sulphur smoke shall not be allowed.
20.8 Test all down spouts or rain headers and their branches within the
building by water as described for the above soil, waste and vent system. 20.9 All Water Piping : Hydro-static test 10.54 Kg/cm2 for a minimum of two hours without
drop in pressure as required. 20.10 On completion of the works, the following tests shall be performed to the satisfaction of the consultants/client's representative before issue of
Virtual Completion Certificate, if so required. a) Smoke test. b) Hydraulic test. c) Self induced test for fixtures. d) Tests for anti-syphonages system. e) Pump rating and output. f) Inspection of all units and fixtures. 20.11 The contractor shall arrange on his own initiative for similar tests during
the progress of works, to ensure that there are no defects in material/workmanship in portions of work to be concealed or embedded under the floor or walls in ceiling.
20.11.1 Air or Smoke Test :-
A uniform gauge pressure of 0.5 Kg/cm2 or sufficient to balance a column of mercury 250 mm. in height. This pressure will be held for a period of at least 15 minutes without any loss of pressure.
20.11.2 Hydraulic Test :-
i) All underground drains for a static head of 2 metres with the down stream and plugged.
ii) All vertical drains also for a static head of 2 mtrs. iii) Water lines for 11.25 Kg/cm2 test pressure for minimum 24 hours. iv) Section wise isolation and test. v) Air-locks.
20.11.3 Manholes :-
Clean the manhole free from all dirt, soil and other extraneous material and wash it with water to clear all mortar, mud etc. The pipe outlets to be plugged with gunny bags or wooden stopper to ensure proper closure.
Clean water from an approved source shall be filled into the manhole to depth not exceeding 1.2 mtrs, as directed by the Engineer-In-Charge and the same is kept for about 2 hours. Test should be conducted early in the
morning before 9 a.m so that tendency for evaporation losses are minimum.
20.11.4 Self induced test for fixtures:- All units will be operated individually and the flow checked. 20.11.5 Inspection of individual units and fixtures for visible defects in shape
etc. 20.11.6 Test for anti-symphonage system :- Units on a single system will all be operated to check up the effect on
symphonage. 20.11.7 Pump rating and output :- Checking discharge and terminal head both at the free end as well as
the overhead storage tank. 21.0 PAINTING 21.1 Equipments :- After complete installation and testing all the equipments including
mounting frames etc. shall be painted with 3 coats of paints, as per colour code required by the client or a directed by the consultants.
21.2 Piping :- After all the piping has been installed and tested, the piping shall be
given one coat of anti-corrosive paint followed by two coats of paint as per colour code required by the client or as directed by the consultants.
21.3 Colour code :- Identification of the pipe lines shall be as per standard colour prescribed
by IS : 2379. 22.0 EQUIPMENT AND PIPING IDENTIFICATION 22.1 Pipe Markers :-
Each piping system shall be provided with a name plate properly
clamped or stenciled. Letters are to be 80 mm. if 3 mtrs. above the floor and 50 mm. minimum if below that height. Name plates on parallel groups
of pipes etc. shall be neatly lined up. Wording of lettering shall correspond to the equipment designations used in piping legend and
shall be as approved. Name plate to be of G.I sheets (gauge 20 SWG on 25 x 25 mm. angle) secured on to sheet metal and angle iron to be welded on main pipe. In case of insulated pipe the 25 x 25 mm. angle bracket should be projecting beyond insulation thickness.
22.2 Valve Register :- To be submitted in triplicate along with location and identification
number in final drawing to be furnished by contractor. . 23.0 TOOLS AND MATERIALS AND STORAGE 23.1 The Contractor at his own cost and charge shall provide all materials,
tools, tackles, measure, scaffolding, labour and water, necessary for the completion of the whole work in all respect.
23.2 The contractor shall pay the fees for testing the materials to local
authorities, or other statutory authorities. 23.3 The Contractor will obtain, from time to time various permissions and
the completion certificates as per rules of all local and statutory authorities.
23.4 The Contractor shall insure the work against damages, for such sum as the Engineer - in
- charge may, from time to time, direct.
23.5 All the brackets and hangers for pipe shall be fixed to the wall or R.C.C
slab using `Dash' fasteners, wherever necessary. Exposing reinforcement bars for hooking will not be permitted.
24.0 GENERAL SERVICES The Contractor shall pay the fees for testing the materials by the
Municipal Corporation. The Contractor will process and arrange from time to time various
permissions and obtain the drainage completion certificate, storm water drainage completion, rain water harvesting and adequate water supply certificate will be obtained by Owner / Architect, under the rules of the local authorities.
24.0 BUREAU OF STANDARDS, COLOUR CODE
In industrial and multi disciplinary installations like Hotels and Hospitals, additional item may be added for other systems. To indicate the class of its contents, each pipe and appurtenances connected therewith shall be marked as under.
i] Water Drinking -Sea Green ii] Non Potable Water -orange iii] Treated effluent -Admirably Blue iv] Fire installation -Fire Red v] Steam & Hot water -Silver Gray vi] Compressed Air -Sky Blue
vii] Vacuum -Canary Yellow viii] Liquified petroleum Gas -Red
ix] Diesel oils -Light Brown x] Sprinkler pipes -Dark Violet
Charts showing the colours for primary identification should be displayed at points where they are likely to be needed for reference.
LIST OF APPROVED BRANDS / MAKES FOR PLUMBING WORK
1.0 Cast Iron Pipes and NECO fittings I S 3989 2.0 R.C. NP2 Pipes Pranali Enterprises
.
3.0 Stoneware Pipes and Trimurti, TM, Rajura. fittings - 4.0 Cast Iron LA class - I.T.S Company, Kesoram, Pressure Pipes and fittings Electrical Steel Casting. 5.0 G.I. Pipes-Heavy Grade - Zenith,.Tata, Jindal (C Class) as per IS 1239. 6.0 Gun Metal Valves, and Leder, Zoloto
fittings 7.0 G.I.Fittings. Unique, Zoloto, 8.0 C. I. Sluice valves, check Kirloskar, Zoloto.
valves etc. 9 Butterfly Valves C & R, Audco 10. Chromium Plated Brass Gem, Jaquar.
Fittings 11 Bottle Traps and Waste fittings Gem, JAQUAR
11A Vitreous China Pottery Hindustan, EID Parry 12. W.C. Seats & Cover „Commander ;Patel 13. Stainless Steel Sinks NIRALI, Neelkanth 14. Polysterine & FRP Low Level Champion Commander, Hindware Cistern 15. Flush Valves Gem, Jaquar, 16. Water Meter Leeds, Capstan, Atlas, 17. Pressure Reducing Valves Watsila, Zoloto 18. Electric Pumps for cold water Kirloskar, HBD, Grundfos,Darling 19. Sump Pumps DARLING ,HBD, Grundfos 20. Motors. Crompton, Kirloskar 21. Starters Crompton, LT-LK, Siemens 22. C.I. Manhole covers and grating Ashok Foundary, , NECO 23. Float/Equilibrium Valves L & K, HINDKO 24. Ball Valves with copper floats L & K, Techno 25. Pressure guages Figi, H.Guru, Prico 26. PVC Pipes/HDPE Pipes Supreme, Prince, 27. Electronic Senser Jaquar, ASCON 28. Bath Accessories Gem, JAQUAR NOTE : a) To comply with the Bureau of Standards Act enacted
by Parliament the fixtures selected should have ISI making along with brand name of manufacturer.
b) Fittings without ISI make if selected as a Functional/aesthetic requirement
should be got tested in an approved test House prior to installation. c) The Engineer-in- charge will have the discretion to select from the
above list, in consultation with the Architect./ consultants .
BANK OF INDIA BLDG. ANDHERI, MUMBAI
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
ELECTRICAL WORK
1. PREAMBLE
The intent of this specification for wiring works to be carried out in bank premises. The Scope of Work shall include :-
Supply, Installation, Testing & Commissioning of the Electrical wiring work and also includes transportation, handling, receiving and storage of the materials, safe guarding the installation till the same is handed over.
Laying of conduits in the slab prior to casting and extending these conduits as required. Also included in the scope is the supply and fixing of wiring, switches, socket outlets, call bell push, switchboards etc.
All accessories, hardware and sundry items shall be included and no additional payment shall be made whatsoever in this regard.
All work shall be carried out in a neat manner with good workmanship. All materials shall be of approved quality and makes only. Samples of approved materials shall be placed on a sample board and kept with the Client‟s Engineer. All material supplied shall be ISI approved makes.
All works shall be carried out in accordance with Indian Electricity Rules and Regulations and Code of Practice.
In case of any discrepancy between the specifications and the BOQ, the stringent of the two shall apply. The Clients decision in this regard shall be final and binding on the Contractor without any extra cost implication. The specification shall be read and construed in conjunction with other sections of the bidding document. The work shall be carried out by an Electrical Contractor having valid Contractors Licence, at least one Supervisor & authorized workmen holding valid permits for such type of installation. Copies of the relevant licences/permits are to be submitted along with the offer.
The Electrical Contractor shall prepare the conduit layout drawing based on the schematic drawing provided and get the same approved by the Client‟s Engineer prior to start of conduit laying work. Details of the conduit size along with the number of wires, phase etc shall also be incorporated in the drawing. The Contractor shall prepare conduit layout drawings including all details like size of conduit, number of wires being taken in the conduit and other relevant information and submit 3 sets of the same for approval by the Clients Engineers. Similarly fabrication drawings for the Panels shall be submitted for approval. Upon completion of the work, 4 sets of “As Built” drawings of the Panels & Installation shall be submitted incorporating all changes that have been carried out during the course of installation. One set of drawings shall also be furnished on CD.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
1.1. Scope of Work
The scope of work is described in the Preamble and is for Electrical Installation to be carried out in bank premises.
1.2. Applicable Codes and Standards
Sr. No.
Description Reference Standard
1 Code of practice for electrical wiring installation (System voltage not exceeding 650 V)
IS : 732
2 Code of practice for fire safety of buildings (General) Electrical installation.
IS : 1646
3 Rigid steel conduits for electrical wiring. IS : 9537 ( Part - 2 )
4 Flexible steel conduits for Electrical wiring. IS : 3480
5 PVC insulated cables IS : 694
6 Rigid non-metallic conduits for electrical wiring IS : 9537 ( Part - 3 )
7 3 pin plugs and sockets. IS : 1293
8 Guide for electrical layout in residential buildings Indian electricity act and rules.
IS : 4648
9 Fittings for rigid non-metallic conduits. IS : 3419
1.3 Conduit
The conduits are of following types :-
PVC Conduits shall be used for concealed wiring.
MS Conduits shall be used for surface wiring.
1.3.1 PVC Conduits
PVC conduits shall suitable for heavy duty, ISI marked and conforming to IS: 9537 (Part – 3, latest edition). The conduit shall be of smooth finish and without any sharp burrs or uneven finish. The wall thickness of the PVC conduit pipe shall be 2.0 mm for 20 mm dia PVC conduit pipe and 2.5 mm for 25 mm dia PVC conduit pipe. The PVC conduit pipes shall be round and without any deformities.
1.3.2 PVC Conduit Accessories
All accessories like circular boxes, bends elbows, couplers that are required shall be ISI marked and conforming to IS 3419 (latest edition). Circular boxes shall be deep type. The number of ways on the circular boxes shall be suitable for the number of PVC to be fixed. No spare outlet ways are to be kept as these are likely to allow leakage of cement slurry during concreting.
1.3.4 Installation of Concealed PVC Conduits
The PVC conduit pipes shall be laid as per approved drawing before concrete is poured. The conduit pipes shall be laid in a straight line as far as possible. The PVC conduit pipe shall be bound at regular intervals to the reinforcement using binding wire. Appropriate solvent shall be used for joining of PVC conduit pipes with circular boxes, bends, couplers etc. Circular boxes shall be protected in such a manner to prevent cement slurry from entering clogging the box.
Circular boxes shall be fixed in a rigid manner so as to prevent the boxes from being displaced during pouring of concrete and use of the vibrator. The conduits shall be laid in such a manner so as to prevent any damage to the PVC conduit pipes to by workmen during reinforcement binding and when concrete is being poured. The ends of conduit shall be sealed to prevent seepage of concrete/ slurry. The conduit ends shall be brought out of the shuttering in such a manner so that these pipes can be extended las required. Wherever necessary bends or offsets are required these may be achieved either by using appropriate normal bends or by bending the PVC conduit pipe. No bends shall have radius less than 2.5 times outside dia. of the conduit. For bending or for offsets on the PVC conduit pipes these shall be achieved using the bending spring. During the bending process the profile of the pipe should not be damaged. 16 SWG GI fish wire shall be provided in all conduit pipes prior to concreting work. The end lengths shall be long enough to facilitate pulling of wiring later. If conduit pipes are later found choked with cement slurry, the Contractor shall clear the same, at his cost, without damage to the concrete. Suitable pull through boxes shall be provided at regular intervals in the conduit run. For conduits concealed in masonry walls, necessary chasing of the masonry shall be carried out by the Contractor in a neat manner. In places there two or more conduits are installed together, chicken mesh shall be provided and at least 25 mm beyond the chase prior to making good the surface.
1.4 Metal Conduits
Metal conduits shall hot dip galvanized and conforming to IS: 9537 (Part - 2). No metal conduit shall be less than 20 mm. in diameter. The conduit shall be round and free from deformities. The conduits shall be ERW and free from burrs and other sharp edges.
The conduits shall be delivered to the site of construction in original bundles and each
length of conduit shall bear the label of manufacturers, ISI mark and other relevant details. The conduit accessories such bends, coupling etc. shall also be hot dipped galvanized. 1.4.1 Installation of Surface Conduits
Wherever surface wiring is carried out, GI conduits shall be used. The spacing of the clamp/saddles shall not be more than 1.50 Metre. The conduit pipes shall be terminated in suitable metal switch boards/box end and appropriate circular box at the fitting end. Where the conduits pass through the flooring the same shall be passed through a galvanized pipe of suitable size fixed in the flooring. The galvanized pipe shall extend 75mm above the flooring and shall be flush with ceiling surface on other side. GI spacer bars and GI saddles shall be used for conduit fixed on surface of walls, ceiling etc. PVC fasteners of appropriate size shall be used to secure spacer bars on surface. All the holes shall be drilled neatly only. Punched holes are not acceptable. Non corrosive screws shall also be provided. Jute rawl plugs or wooden plugs are not acceptable.
For metallic/PVC fastenings, galvanized bolts and nuts shall be used. No holes shall be punches for the purpose of fixing or suspending conduit, fitting etc, for this purpose suitably size holes are to be drilled. The run of the conduit installed in a straight and neat manner. All the conduits entering or leaving a DB or switch should be neatly arranged. Any crossing of conduit should be avoided as far as possible but if required to cross the conduits shall be neatly bend and fixed. Sufficient number of inspection bends and junction boxes shall be provided for easy drawing in of wires. Normal bends shall only be used after obtaining specific approval. Conduit pipes terminated in switch boards/socket outlets/junction boxes shall be provided with two check nuts. Insulating bushes of appropriate sizes screwed tight onto the end of the conduit so as to prevent any damage to the wire insulation. Conduits should be free of burrs left after threading has been done. The continuity of whole conduit system shall conform to the requirements of the regulations. All threads, running couplers, lock nuts, joints at the entry into boxes and abrasions resulting in exposure of the metal shall be given two coats of approved brand of black enamel paint or any other color shade as approved immediately after installation of the conduit pipes. The entire conduit system including boxes shall be thoroughly cleaned after completion of installations and before drawing of wires. All conduits shall be fixed in a straight line as far as possible. Where offsets are required, the same can be achieved by bending the conduits or by employing normal bends. No bends shall have radius less than 2.5 times outside diameter of the conduit. PVC conduits shall be bent using suitable bending springs while metal conduits shall be bent using a suitable machine. Separate conduits shall be provided for the following system :-
Lighting Points and 6A Power outlets.
16A Power outlets.
Low voltage applications.
Telephone/intercom system.
T.V. system
1.4.2 Conduit Capacity
The maximum capacity of FR PVC insulated copper conductor wires to be taken in a single conduit shall be in accordance with the following table. No conduit shall be used having its diameter less than 20 mm. Not more than two circuits of the same phase and purpose shall be taken in a single conduit :-
Sr. No.
Size of Wire (As per IS:694)
Maximum No. of Wires in single conduit
20mm. dia. 25 mm. dia.
1 1.5 Sq.mm. 5 10
2 2.5 Sq.mm. 5 8
3 4 Sq.mm. 3 6
4 6 Sq.mm. 2 5
5 10 Sq.mm. - 4
1.4.2 Outlets
All the outlets boxes for fittings, switches etc. shall be robust construction. Fixing between conduit and boxes, outlet boxes, switch boxes and the like must be provided with entry spouts and smooth PVC bushes.
1.5 Point Wiring
Point wiring for lights, fans, switched socket outlets, exhaust fans, call bell etc shall be carried out using 1100 grade FR PVC insulated stranded copper wire conforming to IS: 694. The point wiring shall include the circuit/sub circuit wiring from the DB/Switchboard and also includes fittings like switches, switched socket outlets, call bell push, switch and socket for call bell, switch and regulator wiring provisions for ceiling fans, ceiling rose and other accessories that are required to complete the installation. All points shall be directly controlled by switches fixed on switchboards. There shall be no looping of point wiring unless specifically stated. The wiring shall be of single length and without any joints. Only corridor and staircase light points shall be looped and grouped controlled. All wiring shall be looped in the fittings. Wiring shall be drawn accordingly.
The point wiring in conduit shall consist of conduit with wiring from the distribution board in conduit with insulated earthing and its ancillary work such as bends, couplers, junction boxes, FR PVC insulated wires upto the fixed terminals of ceiling roses, connectors of fixtures, etc. through the switches.
Circuit wiring for Ligthing from DB to SB & SB to SB Shall be with using to wires of 2.5 sq.mm. & one wire of 1.5 sq.mm. cu. Conductors pvc insulated. For easy identification, wires with different colours shall be used (e.g. Red, Yellow, and Blue - for Phases, Black for neutral, and Green for Earth).
The PVC insulated wires used for the point wiring shall be of 1100 Volts grade FR PVC insulated stranded copper conductor single core wires manufactured to IS : 694 with cross sectional area specified in the Preamble to schedule of quantities. Number of strands per wire shall be as given below :-
Sr. No. Wire Size No. Of Strands
1. 1.5 Sq.mm 3
2. 2.5 Sq.mm 7
3. 4.0 Sq.mm 7
Point wiring shall be divided as follows :-
Primary Light Points
A Primary Light point is the first point in a circuit and shall include the circuit wiring, switchboard, controlling switch, wiring from the switch to the light point, conduit pipe, accessories and other hardware, concealing of the conduit, ceiling rose, interconnection, looping wire and any other item needed to complete the installation.
Secondary Light Points
A Secondary Light point is the subsequent light point tapped either from the switch board or from the Primary light point and shall include the wiring from the switch to the light point, switch board, controlling switch, conduit pipe, accessories and other hardware, concealing of the conduit, ceiling rose, interconnection, looping wire and any other item needed to complete the installation.
Fan Points
A Fan point is tapped either from the switch board or from the Primary light point and shall include the wiring, switch, regulator, conduit pipe, accessories and other hardware, concealing of the conduit and outlet box, interconnection, looping wire and any other item needed to complete the installation.
Light Socket Outlet Points
A Light Socket Outlet point is a socket outlet point tapped either from the switch board or from the Primary light point and shall include the wiring, switch board, switch socket outlet, conduit pipe, accessories and other hardware, concealing of the conduit and outlet box, interconnection, looping wire and any other item needed to complete the installation.
Primary Socket Outlet Points
A Primary Socket Outlet point is the first point controlled directly from the DB and shall include the wiring from the DB to the point, switch and socket outlet, conduit pipe, accessories and other hardware, concealing of the conduit, interconnection and any other item needed to complete the installation.
Secondary Socket Outlet Points
A Secondary Socket Outlet point is the subsequent socket outlet point tapped from the Primary Socket Outlet point shall include the wiring from the Primary Socket point switch and socket outlet, conduit pipe, accessories and other hardware, concealing of the conduit,
interconnection and any other item needed to complete the installation.
1.6 Switches and Switched Socket Outlets
Switch boards shall be installed at 1200 mm above finished floor level unless otherwise stated. Individual socket outlets shall be installed 50 mm above the skirting level.
The switch controlling the light and fan points shall be connected to the phase wire of the circuit and neutral shall be continuous. All fan regulators shall be fixed on the switchboards. In case the fan is provided by the Client, the Contractor shall make provisions for installing the regulators. Necessary looping wires for the regulator shall also be provided.
All cover plates for switchboards/ boxes shall be fixed by means of countersunk cadmium plated brass screws.
Where two or more switches and fan regulators are installed together, they shall be provided with a single gang cover plate with knockouts to accommodate required number of switches, sockets and regulators.
The switch controlling the socket outlet shall be on the phase wire of the circuit. The third pin of the socket shall be connected to the earth continuity conductor of the circuit
When switch boxes are installed on both sides of the same wall these shall be staggered by 150 mm horizontally.
All switchboards shall be provided with a 6A switch socket outlet.
Exhaust fan socket outlets shall be installed near the exhaust fan and the switch shall be installed on the switch board.
1.7 Telephone Points Point wiring for Telephone outlets shall be carried out using 2 pair 0.5 mm PVC sheathed in insulated telephone cable in 20 mm dia PVC conduit. The telephone wire PVC compound shall be fire retardant and shall conform to „ITD S/SW 113C‟. The telephone point wiring shall be drawn from the ‟Krone‟ tag block fixed under the staircase to the points located in the flat. The point shall be terminated in a RJ11 outlet with suitable plate and box.
1.8 TV Points
The TV point shall comprise of concealed 20 mm PVC conduit with all accessories, junction boxes, ISI make co-axial cable, and TV socket in a suitable box with cover plate. The wiring shall be terminated at one end in the outlet socket and at the other end in the splitter located on ground floor.
2.0 Lighting Fixtures
The lighting fittings, fans, exhaust fans etc. shall be of approved makes and types as indicated in the BOQ. All Lighting Fittings shall be complete with lamps, ballast and all accessories necessary for installation whether so detailed under item description or not.
Fixture shall be completely wired and constructed to comply with the regulations and
applicable Standards for electric lighting fixtures, unless otherwise specified. Fixtures shall bear manufacturer's name and factory inspection label unless otherwise approved. Wiring within the fixture and for connection to the branch circuit wiring shall be not less than 1.5 Sq. mm. copper for 250 Volt applications. Wire insulation shall suit the temperature conditions inside the fixture. Internal wiring shall be neatly clipped and where the wiring is passing the ballast, suitable heat resistance barrier or sleeve shall be provided.
Metal used in lighting fixtures shall be not less than 22 SWG or heavier Gauge if so
required to comply with specification of standards. Sheet steel reflectors shall have a thickness of not less than 20 SWG. The metal parts of the fixtures shall be completely free from burrs and tool marks. Solder shall not be used as mechanical fastening device on any part of the fixture.
Ferrous metal shall be given a corrosion resistance phosphate treatment or other approved rust inhibiting prime coat to provide a rustproof base before application of finish.
The finish shall be capable of withstanding 72 hours exposure to an ultraviolet sun lamp placed 10 cm. from the surface without discoloration factor after exposure. Test results shall be furnished for each lot of fixtures.
All reflectors shall be made from 99.90% pre-anodised aluminium sheet in the required profile.
Ballasts shall be electronic in enclosed casing. Ballast temperature and sound ratio rise shall be specified by the manufacture and guaranteed. Ballasts shall be suitable for operation at the voltage and frequencies indicated and under prevailing temperature conditions. The ballasts shall have inbuilt preheat start and cut-off circuits to ensure enhanced life of the lamp. Wherever specified in the schedule of quantities or preambles, high frequency electronic ballast (HF Ballast) should be provided in the fluorescent tube light fixture or compact fluorescent tube light. The HF Ballast should confirm to IEC928 standard. EMI should comply with U.S. FCC class „A‟. The high frequency should be > 40 kHz. The operating power factor of the HF Ballast controlled fixture should not be less than 0.95. Constant wattage , constant lumen output electronic high frequency ballast with total harmonic distortion less than 10 % and with system power consumption not exceeding 72 watts for a twin 36 W TL configuration and 4 X 18 W TL as well. Ballast shall confirm to following international specification with conformance marked upon casing. Lamps The Fluorescent Tubes (TLs) and Compact Fluorescent Lamps (CFLs) should have cool daylight colour designation. However the Owner reserve the right to prescribe either Cool Daylight or Bright White or Incandescent Colour designations for TLs and / or CFLs. No extra payment will be made over the quoted rate of bidder for this. Fixtures shall be installed at mounting heights as detailed on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer – in – Charge. All fixing accessories, down rods, terminals, etc required for completing the installation shall be provided by the Contractor including the connection wire from the point to the light fitting or other fixtures.
Flush mounted recessed fixtures shall be installed so as to completely eliminate leakage light between the fixture and adjacent finished surface. Fixture mounted on outlet boxes shall be rigidly secured to a fixture stud in the outlet box. Earthing of all the fixtures shall be carried out by Green insulated copper cables of suitable size from the ceiling rose / connector.
3.0 Earthing
All the non-current carrying metal parts of the electrical installation shall be earthed properly. Metal conduits, cables armour and sheath, Panel and Distribution Boards, light fixtures, ceiling and exhaust fan and all other fixtures shall be bonded together and connected by means of specified earthing system. An earth continuity conductor shall be installed with all the feeders and circuits and shall be connected from the earth bar of the panel boards to the conduit system, earth stud of the switch box, light fixture, earth pin of the socket outlets and any metallic wall plates used. All the enclosures of motors shall be also connected to the earthing system.
For concealed wiring green coloured PVC insulated copper wire shall be provided. The earth wire shall be taken within the PVC conduit. The scope of work shall cover supply, laying, installation, connecting, testing and commissioning of :-
Earthing stations.
Earthing conductor of copper/GI strips, copper flexible cables from earthing station to earth bus.
Earthing conductors from the earth bus to the various equipment, outlets etc.
3.1 Standard
The following standards and rules shall be applicable :-
a. IS: 3043 - 1966 Code of practice for Earthing.
b. Indian Electricity Act and Rules
All codes and standards mean the latest. Where not specified the installation shall generally follow the Indian Standard Code of Practice or the British Standard Codes of Practice in absence of Indian standard.
3.2 Earthing Stations
The earth electrode shall be 3 M long 50 mm dia class "B", perforated GI pipe. G.I. pipe with funnel of approved quality shall be used for watering the earth electrode \ station. All hardware and other consumables for earthing installation shall be hot dip GI.
The earth resistance shall be maintained with suitable soil treatment as per regulations. The resistance of each earth station should not exceed 1 ohm.
The earth electrode shall be installed vertically and shall be surrounded with 150 mm. thick layers of Charcoal dust and Salt mixture.
20 mm. dia. GI watering pipe shall run along the pipe electrode to the top of masonry chamber. At the top of the pipe a G.I. funnel with a mesh shall be provided for watering the earth station.
The funnel with screen over the G.I. pipe for watering to the earth shall be housed in a block masonry chamber as shown in the drawing.
Construction of the earthing station shall in general be as shown in the drawing and shall conform to the requirement of the latest edition of Indian Standard IS: 3043. .
The earth conductor shall be fixed to the pipe with a nut. The clamp shall be permanently accessible. The earthing conductor shall be hot dip GI flat of the size as indicated.
3.3 Installation and Connection
The earth electrode shall be buried below permanent moisture level but in no case less than 3 M below finished ground level. The earth electrode shall be kept clear of the building foundation and in no case, it shall be nearer by less than 2 M from outer face of the respective building wall / column.
The earth conductors inside the building shall properly be clamped/supported on the wall with GI spacer bars with earth clamps and GI screws/bolts. The conductors outside the building shall be laid at least 600 mm. below the finished ground level.
The earth conductors shall be terminated in an earth bus near the meter board. From the earth bus on earthing shall be taken for the installation as required
Where joints in the earthing strip are made, there shall be an overlap of 75 mm. The joints shall be rivet or brazed as directed by the Engineer. In case of brazing the joint shall be cleaned after the brazing work is completed and then painted with 2 coats of bitumen paint and finished with two coats of aluminium paint.
The earth conductors shall be of one length between the earthing grid and the equipment to be earthed.
3.4 Earth Conductor Connections
Earth lead shall be bare Copper or GI as specified. Earth conductors buried in the ground shall be protected with bitumen and hessian wrap or polythene faced hessian and bitumen coating. At entries into the buildings, suitable GI pipe sleeves shall be provided. Earth lead run on surface of wall or ceiling shall be fixed on saddles so that strip is at least 6 mm away from the wall surface.
The complete earthing system shall be mechanically and electrically bonded to provide an independent return path to the earth source.
Metallic conduit is not considered as an earth continuity conductor. Separate bare earth continuity conductor of size equivalent to 100% of the phase conductor subject to the minimum shall be provided for both metallic & PVC conduits.
Nominal Cross-Sectional Area Nominal Cross-Sectional Area of Largest Associated Copper Area of Earth-Continuity Conductor
Circuit 2.5 2.5 4 4 6 6
The earth continuity conductor be drawn inside the conduit shall be insulated. All metal junction and switch boxes shall have an earth stud inside the boxes to which the earth conductor shall be connected. Insulated earth conductor shall be coloured (Green or Green / Yellow ) for easy identification.
Armoured cable shall be earthed by two distinct earth connections to the armouring at both the ends and the size of connection being as for the metallic conduit.
In the case of unarmoured cable, an earth continuity conductor shall either be run outside along with the cable or should form a separate insulated core of the cable.
Three phase power panel and distribution boards shall have two distinct earth connections of the size correlated to the incoming cable size.
4.0 Panels The Main Panel Board shall house the incomer along with the metering unit and outgoing
feeders. The board shall be cubicle type fully compartmentalized, vermin proof, front operating and floor mounting, IP 52 degree of protection. H.T. Panel , H.T. Cubicle metering as per ISI
Specifications no SW-HTS/LBS PWD specifications. Transformer as per pwd specification no
SS-TR ISI 2026 and Generator as per pwd specification no GEN-PG. Metal Work
The frame of panel shall be fabricated using suitable mild steel structural sections or pressed and shaped cold rolled sheet steel of thickness not less than 2.5 mm.
Frames shall be enclosed by cold rolled sheet steel of thickness not less than 2.0 mm. smoothly finished, leveled and free from flaws. Doors, top covers and partitions shall be made of cold rolled sheet steel of thickness not less than 1.6 mm. Stiffeners shall be provided wherever necessary. Black sheet is not acceptable. All bends/folds shall be free from sharp edges. Cut-outs shall be true in shape and devoid of sharp edges. The complete structure shall be rigid, self-supporting and free from vibration, twists and bends.
The metal steel frame made of structural steel channel section properly drilled for mounting
the switch gear along with necessary mounting hardware which shall be zinc plated and passivated, provided with neoprene gaskets all round the perimeter of removable covers and doors and busbars of adequate rating.
All manually operated equipment shall not be less than 300 mm above floor level and while the maximum operating level shall not exceed 2,100mm from floor level.
Cable alley of adequate size shall be provided with suitably hinged doors or bolted cover. It shall be possible to safely carry out maintenance work on cable connections to any one circuit with the busbars and adjacent circuits live. Adequate number of slotted cable support arms shall be provided for clamping the cables.
All doors shall be neatly folded type. All covers and doors to be provided with neoprene gaskets. Ordinary rubber gaskets are not acceptable. Provision shall be made for insulating covers on outgoing terminals for protection against accidental touch. Base Channel of ISMC-75 shall be provided in case of floor standing panels. Suitable number of lifting Lugs per each shipping section shall be provided. Cable entry for all panels will be top. The cable alley shall be of adequately size to accommodate the required number of cables.
Busbars
The busbars shall be of uniform cross section throughout their length and up to the incoming terminals of the incoming feeder. The busbars shall be made of high conductivity copper and shall be provided with at least the minimum clearances in air as per applicable standards for a 500 V, 3 phase system. Adequate sized busbar alley shall be provided.
All busbars shall be insulated with close fitting sleeve of hard, smooth, dust and dirt free insulation of high dielectric strength (450 V/mil) to provide a permanent high dielectric non-aging and non-tracking protection; impervious to water, tropical conditions and fungi. The insulation shall be non-inflammable and self-extinguishing and in fast colours to indicate phases. The insulating sleeve should be colour coded. Black sleeves with colour bands are not acceptable.
Busbars shall be adequately supported and braced to withstand the stresses due to the specified short circuit currents. Busbar supports shall be made of Hylam sheet, glass reinforced moulded plastic material, or cast resin supports.
Each phase shall be provided with separate supports. If a common support is provided for all three phases, anti-tracking barriers shall be incorporated.
Busbar joints shall be complete with high tensile steel bolts, beveled washers and nuts. Busbars shall be thoroughly cleaned at the joint locations and suitable contact grease shall be applied just before making a joint.
Bus bars shall have uniform cross section with 35ºC rise above ambient with maximum current density of 1.6 amp/ Sq. mm in case of copper busbars and 1 amp/Sq. mm for Aluminium. The Branch busbars shall have 75% of aggregate capacity of connected feeders. The Neutral and Earthing Bars shall have cross-sectional areas not less than 50% of Phase Busbar.
Moulded Case Circuit Breakers (MCCB)
MCCBs shall comprise single units of triple/four pole construction as required and shall be rated for 450V AC. The MCCB shall be provided with front operating rotary handle mechanism. The operating mechanism shall be quick make, quick break and trip free type.
All live parts shall be totally enclosed in a heat resistant moulded insulating material
housing. The MCCBs shall be provided with the following features:-
a) Inverse-time-current tripping characteristics under sustained overload. b) Instantaneous tripping on short circuit.
c) MCCBs shall be of current limiting type only.
d) MCCBs must have its rated service breaking capacity (Ics) equal to or greater than its specified fault level.
e) Variable Thermal setting shall be provided in all MCCB s with thermal Magnetic releases.
Miniature Circuit Breaker (MCB)
MCB‟s shall be 10 KA at 440 volts. MCB shall provided with visible indication to show that they are operated.
MCBs for all other purposes shall have minimum short circuit breaking capacity as indicated in the single line diagrams or schedule of quantities. If breaking capacity is not specified then it should not be less than 10 kA. Where higher short circuit rating is required, suitable HRC fuses shall be provided
Current Transformers
Current transformers shall be of the Cast Resin Type. The class and rating shall be suitable for the application these are required for. All current transformers shall be earthed through a separate earth link.
Indicating Instruments, Meters And Lamps
All indicating instruments shall be Digital type and minimum 96x96 mm and with a class of accuracy of 1.0 and shall have provision for zero adjustment outside the cover. Digital meters should have a suitable coloured readout.
All indication lamps shall be LED type and of the required colours.
Suitably rated control MCBs shall be provided along with back up fuses for indication instruments, meters and indication lamps as required.
Specified sizes of CT operated KWH meter shall be provided. The KWH Metersshall be digital type with either digital/analogue display.
Cable Terminations
Provisions shall be made for termination of cables in the panels/DBs. Cable glands shall be mounted on removable gland plates to be provided to support all cables entering the switchgear.
Internal Wiring
Wiring inside the switchgear shall be carried out with 1100 V grade, single core, PVC insulated, stranded copper conductor wires. Minimum size of conductor for power circuits shall be 4 Sq.mm and 2.5 Sq.mm for Control circuits. Where there is more than one cable to be connected to a terminal, suitable copper connector strips shall be provided.
Terminal Blocks
Terminal blocks shall comprise finely threaded pairs of brass studs of at least 6 mm diameter, links between each pair of studs, washers, nuts and locknuts. The studs shall be securely locked within the mounting base to prevent their turning. Insulated barriers shall be provided between adjacent terminals. Terminals shall be shrouded. Terminal blocks shall be adequately rated to carry the current of the associated circuit. Minimum rating of the terminal block shall be 10 A. Spare connectors shall be provided for uses.
Labels
All labels shall comprise white letters on a black background and shall be made of non-
rusting metal or engraved PVC. Size of lettering shall be 6.0 mm.
Earthing
Switchgear shall be provided with suitable sized copper/aluminium earth busbar running along the entire length of the board. At either end of the earth bus, one clamp type terminal with nuts, bolts and washers shall be provided for bolting the earthing conductor.
Earth busbars shall be supported at suitable intervals. Positive connection between all the frames of equipment mounted in the switchboard and earth busbar shall be provided by using insulated copper wires/bare busbars of cross section equal to that of the busbar or equal to half the size of circuit load current carrying conductor, whichever is smaller.
All instrument cases shall be connected to the earth busbar using 660 V grade, single core 2.5 Sq. mm stranded copper earthing conductor.
All non-current carrying metal and hinged doors shall be earthed. Installation
The Panel shall be installed as required. Suitable sized anchor fasteners shall be used for fixing the board. All associated hardware and accessories shall be included in the rate.
5.0 MCB Distribution Boards
The scope of work includes Supply, Installation, Testing and Commissioning of flush mounting type MCB Distribution Boards as detailed in the Bill of Quantities and Drawing. All associated accessories/fittings not mentioned/indicated but which are essential for the completion of the DBs are deemed to be included in the quoted rates. No extra payment will be made on this account MCB DBs shall be with double doors and suitable for concealing. Required chasing of the wall and making good the same for installing the MCB DB shall be carried out by the Contractor at no extra cost.
MCB DBs shall be fabricated from 1.6 mm sheet. The DB enclosure should be of the same make as the MCBs. A suitable 16 SWG adaptor box shall be provided above the MCB DB for terminating the conduits/cables. Fabrication drawings of DBs shall be furnished for approval prior to start of any fabrication work. The degree of protection for the DBs shall be IP 52.
5.1 Applicable Standards The design, manufacturing process and performance of the Electrical panels /DBs
and all the equipment & instruments incorporated in the same shall comply with the latest Indian Standards set by B.I.S. and particularly to the following :-
BRIEF DESCRIPTION REFERENCE STANDARD
Switch gear General Requirements IS : 13947
Factory Built Assemblies of Switch gear and Control gear IS : 8623
Miniature Circuit Breaker IS : 8828
Indicating Instruments IS : 1248
Busbar Connections and Accessories IS : 5578, 11353
Code of Practice for Phosphating Iron & Steel IS : 6005
PVC Wires IS : 694
Degree of Protection IS : 2147
5.2 Sheet Treatment And Painting
All sheet steel work shall undergo treatment by the seven tank process of degreasing, pickling in acid, cold rinsing, phosphating, passivaiting and then painted with electrostatic paint (Powder coating). The colour of panel inside/outside shall be 631 of IS Code No.5. The sheet metal Pre-Treatment shall follow IS: 3618/1991/6005 /1991.
5.3 Busbars Busbar shall be of uniform cross section throughout their length. The busbars shall be of
suitable rating as indicated in the BOQ. Busbar shall be adequately supported.
5.4 Test
The entire installation shall be tested as per requirements :-
a. The installation shall be megger tested for insulation resistance and continuity.
b. Each earthing station shall be tested with an earth megger in accordance with IS: 3043.
c. Earth conductor resistance for each earthed equipment shall be measured which shall not exceed 1 ohm in each case.
d. Measurements of earth resistance shall be carried out before earth connections are made between the earth.
All tests shall be carried out in presence of the Clients Engineer.
6.0 Cables
All cables shall be FRLS cables of 1.1 KV grade, armoured with stranded Copper/Aluminium conductor as indicated in the Bill of Quantities. All cables shall conform to IS: 1554 and IS: 7098.
All cables shall be suitably derated for grouping and higher ambient temperature. For selecting cable sizes, 45
oC ambient temperature shall be taken as base.
Cables shall be of single length. Splice joints strictly not permitted on any cable. The Contractor shall that the cable lengths brought to site are suitable for the site requirements. The cable quantities are indicative and the Contractor shall assess the correct required before placement of any order for the same.
Cable Accessories
All accessories like cable glands. lugs and terminal markings etc. shall be used conforming to relevant standards as specified. Double compression glands and crimping type lugs shall be used for all cables.
Cables Installation
Cables fixed on walls/beams/ceiling etc. shall be clamped using GI spacers and G.I. saddles. Drilling of holes for fixing the cables shall be neatly done using an electric drill and the cable fixed on walls should be in a straight line avoiding any bends, sagging and kinks. All cables fixed on walls shall following fire insurance and Electricity Regulations. Any procedures as stated in the technical specification shall be complied with. The maximum allowable distance between two cable supports shall be as under :-
Cable Size Horizontal Vertical
Upto 10sqmm 350 mm 450 mm
16sqmm-70sqmm 450 mm 500 mm
120 sq.mm – 400 sq.mm
700 mm 900 mm
All cables shall be properly dressed without unnecessary crossing and overlapping.
Cables Laid Underground.
Cables laid in the excavated trenches shall be at a depth of 0.75 M depth. The Contractor is required to carry out excavation of the trenched, the cost of which is included in the item rate.
After laying of the cables, the Contractor shall obtain clearance from the Clients Engineer for refilling the trenches.
If the trenches are filled without obtaining clearance, the same shall be re-excavated for inspection at no extra cost.
The cables shall be protected by good quality bricks on the sides and top of the cables and fill up the top layer with sand. Necessary barrier and spacing shall be maintained for cables of different voltages in case they are laid side by side.
Telephone cables shall cross the power cables only at about right angles and these two shall not run in close proximity.
LT cables shall be bent in radius not less than 12 times their individual over all diameters.
Routes of these cables shall be arrived at on the basis of the relevant drawings and after consulting the Engineer. Suitable CI cable markers shall be provided at each bend and the distance between two markers shall not exceed 50.0 M.
Cable Termination.
Double compression type cable glands shall be used for cable connections. Cable glands shall be of brass with cadmium or nickel plating. Tinned copper lugs shall be used for cable termination. Cable lugs shall be of the crimping type and proper crimping tools shall be used while carrying out cable terminations. Crimping paste shall also be used for all cable terminations.
7.0 Method of Measurement 7.1 Point Wiring
Primary Light Point is the first light point of a circuit and complete with conduit, circuit/sub circuit and point wiring, switch and switchboard, concealing of conduit and making good the chasing, all accessories and hardware, testing and commissioning shall be treated as one unit for measurement and payment. Secondary Light Point are subsequent light points of a circuit and complete with conduit, sub circuit and point wiring, switch and switchboard, concealing of conduit and making good the chasing, all accessories and hardware, testing and commissioning shall be treated as one unit for measurement and payment.
Fan Points complete with conduit, sub circuit and point wiring, switch and switchboard, concealing of conduit and making good the chasing, all accessories including concealed fan box with suspension arrangement and hardware, looping for regulator, testing and commissioning shall be treated as one unit for measurement and payment.
Light Socket Outlet Points
A Light Socket Outlet point connected to a lighting circuit and complete with conduit, circuit/sub circuit and point wiring, switch, socket outlet and switchboard, concealing of conduit, making good the chasing, all accessories, hardware, looping for regulator, testing and commissioning shall be treated as one unit for measurement and payment.
Primary Socket Outlet Points
A Primary Socket Outlet point is the first point controlled directly from the DB and shall include the wiring from the DB to the point, switch and socket outlet, switchboard, conduit
pipe, accessories, hardware, concealing of the conduit, interconnection and any other item needed to complete the installation.
Secondary Socket Outlet Points
A Secondary Socket Outlet point is the subsequent socket outlet point tapped from the Primary Socket Outlet point shall include the wiring from the Primary Socket outlet point, switch and socket outlet, conduit pipe, accessories and other hardware, concealing of the conduit,
interconnection and any other item needed to complete the installation.
Exhaust Fan Points complete with conduit, sub circuit and point wiring, switch installed on the lighting switchboard and a socket outlet installed near the exhaust fan, concealing of conduit and making good the chasing, all accessories, hardware, interconnection, testing and commissioning shall be treated as one unit for measurement and payment.
Telephone Point shall include concealing the conduit pipe as required including supply of conduit pipes, accessories, hardware, 2 pair 0.5 mm ITD approved telephone wire from tag block, suitable outlet on separate box complete with face plate and RJ11 telephone socket, connection, testing and commissioning shall be treated as one unit for measurement and payment.
TV Point shall include concealing of conduit pipe as required including the supply of conduit pipe, accessories, terminal box, providing of splitters, co-axial cable, connection, testing and commissioning shall be treated as one unit for measurement and payment.
7.2 Earthing
Earth stations complete with electrode, soil treatment as per IS, watering pipe, accessories like funnel, masonry chamber, CI frame with CI hinged cover or MS frame with chequered plate cover, excavation, refilling, all labour etc shall be measured and paid as one unit Earthing conductor/wire complete with spacer bar, earth clamps, all hardware, and labour shall be measured on a running metre basis and paid accordingly. The conductor shall be linear measured and no extras will be paid for overlaps.
7.3 MCB DBS
Shall include the DB with ELCB/RCCBs, MCBs, busbars, adaptor box above the DB, chasing the wall for concealing the DB if required and making good the same, fixing the DBs, connections etc shall be treated as one item for payment.
7.4 Main Panel The Lain Panel complete with all fittings, base frame, accessories, fastening hardware etc, installation, testing & commissioning shall be me, all associated accessories and hardware etc. be treated as one unit for measurement and payment.
7.5 Cables
1.1 KV grade FRLS cables complete with all fixing hardware, accessories shall be linear measured
from termination to termination and payment made at unit rates. Wastage will not be paid.
7.6 Cable Terminations
Cable terminations shall include heavy duty double compression cable glands, appropriate size cable
sockets, accessories, hardware etc shall be measured and paid at unit rates.
7.0 LIST OF APPROVED MAKES
Sr. No Description Make
1 MCBs /ELCBs/RCCBs/ Time Switches Legrand/ Siemens / Schneider Electric/ L&T
2 Selector Switches Kaycee / BCH / L & T Salzer
3 Indicating Lamps 22.5mm dia. (LED type) L & T / Teknic / Siemens/ Schneider Electric/
4 Connectors/ Terminal Blocks Elmex / Connectwell / Essen/ LAPP
5 FR PVC Insulated Copper Wires Finolex / RR Kabel /Universal/ Northwest/Polycab
6 MCB DB‟s Legrand/ Siemens / Schneider Electric/ L&T
7 L.T. Cables Finolex / RR Kabel /Universal /Polycab
8 Cable Glands Comet/Jainsons / or Equivalent.
9 Cable Sockets/ Lugs Dowells /Jainsons or Equivalent.
10 PVC Insulated multistranded copper cables
Finolex / RR Kabel /Universal / RPG
11 Telephone Cables MDS /Delton / ITL
12 Switches, Sockets, Plugs & RJ-11 Telephone Jack(ISI marked)
Legrand /MK Electric / Anchor (Roma)/ Crabtree / Northwest
13 PVC Conduit (ISI marked) Diamond / Precision / Avon Plast
14 Hot Dip G.I. Conduit / Stove Enameled MS Conduit (ISI Marked)
BEC / VIMCO/BI or Equivalent.
15 Ceiling Rose Anchor (Roma)/ MK Electrical
16 Telecom Cables & Terminals Avaya/Delton/ITL
17 Panel Manufacturers Deepak Electro control Kandivali, Mumbai CPRI Approved or Equivalent.
18 Digital Meters Automatic Electric / Enercon / Secure/ Rishab
19 Energy Meters Enercon/ Jaipur/ Universal/ IMP / L&T
20 Current Transformers A.E./ Indcoil/ Kappa/ Ricco
21 Push Buttons Teknic / Siemens/ Schneider Electric/ GE
22 Fuse Units , MCCB, ACB L & T / Siemens / GE
23
24 25
Contactors Light fittings Fans / exhaust fan
Siemens/ Schneider Electric/ L&T / ABB / Legrand Philips/crompton/wipro, Crompton/GEC/Almonard
MAKES ARE ALSO MENTIONED IN THE BILL OF QUANTITIES .
FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
1.0 Scope of work
1.1 The scope of work shall cover supply, installation, testing and
commissioning of the Fire Fighting System covering the following :
a) Fire pump sets, electric motor and diesel engine driven.
b) Jockey pump sets, electric motor driven.
c) Motor control centre, starters & isolators etc. for the pump sets.
d) Hydrant main system including Courtyard hydrants.
e) Wet riser system including landing valves, hose reels, hose cabinets, sluice
valves, non-return valves, Butter fly valves, air-vessels, orifice plates, etc.
f) Fire brigade breaching and Siamese connections.
g) Sprinkler system including electric and diesel engine driven pump sets,
valves, sprinkler heads, flow switches, Installation valve etc.
h) Hand held fire extinguishers and fire buckets.
i) All ancillary items to make the installation complete in all respects and to
meet all requirements of relevant codes and regulations of Fire &
Electricity authorities as well as guidelines from Tariff Advisory
Committee and Local Building Codes and Regulations.
j) Providing interface for Building Management System for activation of
Sprinkler System.
k) Making detailed Drawings of the complete system to meet the intent of the
specifications.
l) Submittal of Shop Drawings ( 4 copies) and As-Built drawings (4 Sets) and complete
operation and maintenance manuals.
m) Getting necessary approval and NOC from C F O and Local Authorities .
2.0 Standards
2.1 The fire hydrant installation shall conform to and meet with the
requirements set out by the latest editions of:
a) IS:1648 - 1961 Code of practice for fire safety of buildings (General) Fire Fighting Equipment and its maintenance.
b) IS:5290 - 1983 Code of practice for installation of internal fire hydrants in multi-storied buildings.
c) Fire Protection Manual issued by TAC
d) IS 1239 Mild steel tubes & tubular fittings
IS 1879 Malleable iron fittings
IS 778 Gun metal gate, globe and check valves.
IS 1537 Vertically cast iron double flanged pipes
Additionally, the contractor shall comply with all regulations and conditions
stipulated by the local Fire Authorities. All the equipment for the fire system
shall be of the type and make as approved by TAC, and / or other respective
authorities; in case of conflict the most stringent specification shall govern.
Sprinkler system in the basement shall be for “Ordinary Hazard” class and that in
superstructure shall be designed for “Light Hazard” class as per TAC norms i.e. at
9 m2 per sprinkler and 21 m2 per sprinkler respectively.
3.0 Fire Pump Sets
3.1 The fire pump set shall be single suction centrifugal end suction type and
direct driven by electric motor and diesel engine with flexible coupling as
specified. The pump rating and performance shall conform to the
Equipment Schedule and meet the TAC duty requirements.
3.2 Pump casing shall be of close grained cast iron with bronze impeller. The
shaft sleeve shall be brass or S.S. 304 and the trim shall be brass or
bronze.
3.3 Pump shall be capable of delivering 150% of the rated capacity at 65% of
the rated head and the shut off head shall be not more than 120% of the
rated delivery head. The pump casing shall withstand 1.5 times the no-
delivery pressure or 2 times the duty pressure whichever is higher.
3.4 The electric drive motor shall be totally enclosed squirrel cage induction
motor conforming to IS 325-1978 and rated for continuous duty (S1).
Motor shall have Class 'F' insulation and enclosure of IP54. Motor rating
shall be at least equivalent to HP required to drive the pump at 150% of its
rated discharge& Head.
3.5 Drive rating shall be based on the largest of the following:
1. Rated pump discharge at rated head.
2. 150% of rated discharge @ 65% of rated head.
3 Maximum power absorbed by the pump in its operating range i.e. no- delivery
to free discharge.
3.6 The diesel engine shall be naturally aspirated (non-turbo charged) &
electrically started. The engine shall have a speed governor to regulate the
rated rpm within 5% of its rated speed. The engine shall be complete with
starting batteries of suitable voltage & ampere rating , full-wave selenium
rectifier charger, isolator, leads, mounting frame, etc. Engine rating shall
be same as for the electric motor. The Diesel engine should be
automatically started with 'Auto main failure circuit with the signal from
the pressure switch on the discharge line. The proposed System should be
explained by a Single Line Diagram.
3.7 Pump discharge pressure and selection should be in line with the
'Guidelines for Fire Protection for High Rise Buildings to avoid undue
high pressure in wet risers.
4.0 JOCKEY PUMP
4.1 The Jockey pump shall be similar to the fire pump.
Capacity of the jockey pump shall neither be less than 3% (with a min. of
180 Lpm) or more than 10% of the pump capacity.
5.0 Accessories
5.1 The fire and Jockey pumps shall be complete with the following
accessories.
1) Suction and discharge eccentric reducers.
2) Pump coupling guard.
3) Common base frame, fabricated mild steel or cast iron.
5.2 Each pump shall have independent set of pressure switches. The pressure
switch shall be snap action SPDT switch rated 10A @ 220 V operated
through a stainless steel diaphragm. The switch shall have a pointer for
manual adjustment of set point, and all electrical connections shall be
terminated in a screwed terminal connector. The entire unit shall be
encased in a cold drawn steel enclosure. The diaphragm shall be designed
for a maximum operating pressure of the System.
5.3 Flow switches shall be S.S bellow type SPDT snap acting contacts rated 10 A @ 220 V. The
bellow shall be made of S.S , brass or phospher bronze terminated in a screwed terminal connector. The entire unit shall be encased in cold drawn steel enclosure and the maximum operating pressure of the parts in contact
with the liquid shall be consistent with the System pressure.
6.0 System Operation and Control Panels
6.1 The fire pump shall be started automatically on loss of pressure. The
operation sequence of the jockey and the fire pumps shall be as follows :
i) Jockey pump shall start when the system pressure drops by 0.35
Kg/cm2 and stop when the system pressure is reestablished,
automatically.
ii) The fire pump shall start when the system pressure drops by 1.0
Kg/cm2 and shall continue to run till manually switched off.
iii) Jockey & fire pump starting shall be indicated with a red
indicating lamp.
6.2 The motor starters shall be direct-on- line with electrically actuated
contactors. The starter shall be complete with ON-OFF push buttons,
timers and auxillary contacts and shall be fully automatic. There shall be
an indicating lamp with each of the pumps and an ammeter and selector
switch with the fire pumps. Fire pump starting shall be annuciated
through an electric siren.
6.3 The starter along with isolator shall be housed in a 14 SWG M.S. box duly
rust inhibited through a process of degreasing and phosphating.
6.4 All cabling to and from the pumps to starters and control switches shall be
carried out through copper conductor of required size & rating armoured
PVC cables of approved makes. Cables shall be laid in accordance with
section “M V CABLING”. The pump motors and panels and all non
current caring metal parts shall be double earthed in accordance with IS
3043-1966 or as per requirement.
7.0 Fire Hydrants & hose reels
7.1 Hydrants shall be provided internally and externally as shown on the
drawings. Internal hydrants shall be provided at each landing of an escape
staircase and additionally depending on the floor area as shown on
drawings. Landing valves shall be single headed gun metal valve
with 63 mm dia outlets conforming to IS 5290-1969.External stand post
hydrants shall be provided as shown on the drawing & as per requirement
of fire brigade. Landing valve shall have flanged inlet and instantaneous
type outlets and mounted at 1.0 m above the floor level. Instantaneous
outlet for fire hydrants shall be of standard pattern approved and suitable
for 63 mm dia. fire brigade hoses. Wherever necessary, pressure reducing
orifices shall be provided so as to limit the pressure to 3.5 Kg/Sq. cm at
the highest landing level or any other rating as required by the local fire
brigade.
7.2 Each staircase landing shall have the following equipment :
( as shown on the drawing )
i) Landing valve.
ii) First-aid hose reel with 30 m long 20 mm dia. high pressure
reinforced rubber lined hose & 20 mm dia. gate valve.
iii) 2 Nos. of 15 m long 63 mm dia controlled percolation hoses with
instantaneous couplings.
iv) One copper branch pipe with bronze rings to take the nozzle at
one end and fit into the instantaneous coupling at the other.
v) Hose reel cabinet (as shown on drawings and/or specified).
The first aid hose shall conform to IS:884 and be wound on a heavy duty
circular hose reel with a cast iron bracket. The hose shall be permanently
connected at one end to the wet riser through a 20 mm G.M. gate valve
with necessary hose adopter and a gun metal nozzle at the other end. The
reel shall swing out by 270 Deg.
Canvas hoses shall be in two lengths of 15 m each, controlled percolation
type with instantaneous couplings, neatly rolled into bundles and held in
position with steel brackets. Canvas hoses shall be tested and certified by
the manufacturers, to withstand an internal water pressure of not less than
35 Kg/cm2 without bursting. The hose shall also withstand a working
pressure of 7 Kg/cm2 without leakage or undue sweating. No part of the
floor served shall be more than 15m from the nozzle when the hose is
fully extended.
8.0 Sprinkler System
8.1 The scope of work shall cover supply, installation, testing and
commissioning of the sprinkler system covering the following :
1) Sprinkler pumps, electric or diesel driven as per requirement.
2) Jockey pumps.
3) Installation valve/s with motor-gong.
4) Sprinklers
5) Sprinkler piping.
6) Branch flow switches connected to the building fire alarm system.
8.2 Sprinkler Pump Sets
The sprinkler pump sets, jockey pumps and accessories shall be identical
to fire pump sets, jockey pumps and accessories (Clauses 3.0, 4.0 and 5.0).
8.3 Installation valve
The sprinkler system shall incorporate one or more (as shown on
drawings) installation valve assemblies comprising :
i) A mains gate valve
ii) IN and OUT pressure gauge
iii) Test connection of adequate size with valve & orifice plate with
pressure connections.
iv) Water gong with necessary piping, isolating valve, strainer and
drain.
The installation valve shall be straight through type suitable for wet pipe
sprinkler systems. Valves shall be of cast iron with gun metal internals
and suitable for vertical or horizontal installation. The valve shall be of
cast gun metal with neoprene seal and retaining ring and shall incorporate
a suitable non-return device to compensate for pressure fluctuations which
should not mal-operate the click. The gun metal internals shall provide for
smooth waterways for :
1) Water valve through a retard chamber.
2) Test connection and drain.
There shall be two pressure gauges, one for the mains side and another for
the installation side. Each gauge shall have pressure damping brass piping
with gunmetal gauge and drain.
A test connection of adequate size as approved shall be provided with a
shut-off gate valve and orifice plate with pressure connections. The
discharge from the test connection outlet shall be led to the nearest sump
or drain as directed.
The water motor shall be of cast gun metal body and internals. The valve
shall have an associated gun metal gate valve and strainer preceding the
water motor. The water motor and gong shall be located on the discharge
lead as directed.
Flow switches shall be as specified under „Fire Hydrant System‟.
9.0 Sprinklers
9.1 Sprinklers shall be thermo-sensitive glass-bulb actuated type and shall be
approved for fire fighting duty .
9.2 All sprinklers shall be brass castings polished/chrome /white (polyester)
unless stated otherwise and rated for 13.5 Kg/sq. cm and factory tested for
3.4Kg/sq. cm. pressure. Sprinklers shall be pendant or side wall type as
specified or as per requirement. All sprinklers shall be provided with
adjustable escutcheons finished same as the sprinkler heads. Wherever
specified sprinklers shall be recessed type.
9.3 Temperature classification of sprinklers in each space shall be as per
requirement. Sprinklers shall be selected for the coverage as required and
ordinarily be 15/10 mm orifice. Wherever this specified size of sprinklers
is not adequate, the tenderer shall quote for the appropriate size required.
10.0 Sprinkler Piping
10.1 All piping shall be G I. ''C' Class as specified under “Piping for Fire
fighting”. Necessary line flushing valves shall be provided as required.
11.0 Sprinkler Testing
11.1 The entire sprinkler piping shall be tested, with the sprinklers in position,
to a hydrostatic test pressure of 13.5 Kg / Sq. cm for a period of 24 hours
at the end of which there shall be no loss in pressure.
11.2 Test valves in each sprinkler installation shall be opened (with temporary
drain connection) and the following observations recorded.
1) Start-up of jockey pump.
2) Start-up of sprinkler pump.
3) Operation of water motor gong.
4) Operation of flow switch in the appropriate branch.
All branches shall be so tested, witnessed & attested by the PMC. All the
operating tests shall be carried out in the presence of any local authority,
Fire Brigade or Insurance Company officials if so required.
12.0 Hydrant Mains
12.1 External
12.1.1 Hydrant ring mains shall be in G I . "C" Class pipes.
12.1.2 Valves 65 mm dia and below shall be heavy duty gun metal full-
way gate valves or globe valves conforming to IS 778 - 20 Kg/Sq.
cm class. Valves shall be tested at manufacturer‟s works and ISI
stamped. Sluice valves above 80 mm shall be cast iron double
flanged, with rising spindle conforming to and stamped to ISI 780
- 20 Kg class. Exposed valves shall be provided with wheel for
operation keys for sluice valves with tops.
12.1.3 Underground mains shall be laid not less than 1000 mm below the
ground level and supported on 1:2:4 concrete pedestals not
exceeding 2.0 m centres and held on with galvanised iron clamps
to allow for lateral movement due to expansion/ contraction.
Underground mains shall be coated and wrapped as per IS10221.
Concrete thrust anchors shall be provided at all bends & tees as
required by thrust calculations. Backfilling shall be done only
after the piping is hydrostatically pressure tested and approved by
the engineering incharge. Piping shall be constantly kept clean till
tested.
12.1.4 All valves shall be housed in brick masonry chambers over 150
mm cement concrete (1:2:4) foundation. The brick walls of the
chamber shall be plastered inside & outside with 20 mm cement
sand plaster. 1:4 with a floating coat of neat cement. Chambers
shall be 650 x 650 mm for depths upto 900 mm & 1000 x 1000
mm for depths beyond. Each chamber shall have a cast iron
surface box approved by the local Fire brigade.
12.1.5 Piping laid above ground shall be supported on cement concrete
(1:2:4) pedestals raising the bottom of the pipe atleast 150 mm
over the ground level & held to the pedestals with galvanised
clamps. Pedestals shall be made 3.0 m centre to centre & shown
on drawings. Cement concrete (1:2:4) thrust anchors shall be
provided at all tee-off points & change of direction as required by
thrust calculations. Pipes fixed on walls & ceiling shall have
galvanised steel brackets.
12.2 Internal
12.2.1 All internal pipes shall, unless otherwise specified be 'C' Class G I.
to IS 1239 using G.S. heavy duty screwed fittings. Flanges shall
be provided to mate with valves and other equipment and shall
conform to IS 6392. Flanges shall be screwed type, designed for
2.0 N/Sq.mm pressure.
12.2.2 Fittings for sprinkler piping shall be extra heavy duty G I screwed
type suitable for the pressure encountered in sprinkler piping. Tap-
offs from vertical riser to floor piping shall have flange or union
connections. Flow switches shall have flanges or unions on both
sides.
12.2.3 Valves shall be as for external piping.
12.2.4 All pipes shall be of approved make and best quality without rust
marks. Pipes and fittings shall be fixed in a manner as to provide
easy accessibility for repair and maintenance and shall not cause
obstruction in shafts, passages, etc. Pipes and fittings shall be fixed
truly vertical, horizontal or in slopes as required in a neat workman
like manner. Pipes shall be securely fixed to walls and ceiling by
suitable supports at intervals specified. Only approved type of
anchor fasteners shall be used for RCC ceiling and walls.
12.2.5 Pipes shall be adequately supported from ceiling / walls with
structural supports fabricated from mild steel structural e.g. rods,
channels, angles, & flats generally as shown on drawings.
Fasteners shall be shear type anchor fasteners in concrete walls &
ceilings & wrought steel spikes of at least 75 mm long in brick
walls. Pipe support shall be painted with 2 coats of red oxide
primer & two coats of approved shade enamel paint. Spacing of
pipe supports shall be as follows:
Upto 50 mm nominal bore 1.7 m
63 mm to 100 mm nominal bore 2.0 m
Over 125 mm nominal bore 2.0 m
12.2.6 All low point loops in the piping shall be provided with 25 mm
gun metal full-way valves with rising spindle for draining the
system. All valves shall have screwed brass caps. Likewise 25
mm gun metal air vents shall be provided at all high point loops to
prevent air-locking.
12.2.7 All exposed piping for fire fighting shall be distinctly painted „Fire
Red‟ shade 536 to IS : 5-1978. Pipes shall first receive two coats
of red oxide primer uniformly applied and two coats of oil paint
applied thereafter. All pipe support shall be painted black as
specified for support & clamps.
13.0 Testing & Commissioning
All piping after installation shall be tested for a hydrostatic test pressure of 1.5
times of the System pressure maintained for 24 hours. All joints and valves shall
be checked for leaks and rectified and retested. During testing all valves except
drain & air valves shall be kept fully open.
14.0 Approved list of Materials &Equipments
14.1 All materials and equipment shall be of the best type available and shall be to the
approval of Fire Brigade and shall be ISI certified /marked wherever applicable.
14.2 The following makes of materials and equipment are approved:
1. G I. Pipes -Tata, Zenith, Jindal.
2. Gunmetal/Brass Fittings - Newage, Shaha Bhogilal
3. Fire Pumps - KSB, Mather & Platt, Kirloskar
4. Electric Motors - Siemens,Crompton Greaves, Kirloskar
5. Cables (Armoured) - CCI, INCAB, Finolex .
6. First Aid Hose Reels braided - Dunlop,Firestone, New Age
rubber
7. Synthetic fibre coated canvas - New Age, Jayshree
hoses
8. Diesel Engines Kirloskar . Ashoka layland,Cum
9. Extinguishers - Minimax, New Age , Firex
10. Booster Pumps at terrace - Kirloskar, KSB, HBD
11. Flow Switches - Procicon .Switzer
12. Butterfly Valve - Audco / C & R
13. Control Valve - Mather & Platt / HD / De‟s Technico
14. Sprinkler Heads - HD/Mather & Platt/Grinal
15. Sluice & Non-return Valve- Kirloskar , Zaloto,
16. Pressure Switch - Indfoss
17. Pressure Gauge - Fiebig / H-Guru
18. Hydrant Valve - Minimax,New Age , Shaha Bhogilal
19. G I fittings Zoloto, Unique, R Brand
20 M S Fittings Guru , Gayatri
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS SECTION FOR HVAC
This section includes Technical Specifications for following equipments/works.
1. Fans 2. VRV system 3. Air distribution 4. Insulation – Duct / Chilled water 5. Electrical
The section includes Data sheets. Bidders have to complete the data sheets & submit the same with the offer.
PART 1
FANS
A. Propeller Fans
Propeller fan shall be direct driven, here or four blade type, mounted on a steel mounting plate with orifice ring.
a. Mounting plate shall be of steel construction, square with streamlined venturi inlet
(reverse for supply applications) coated with baked enamel paint. Mounting plate shall be of standard size, constructed of 12 to16 gauge sheet steel depending upon the fan size. Orifice ring shall be correctly formed by spinning or stamping to provide easy passage of air without turbulence & to direct the air stream.
b. Fan blades shall be constructed of AL or Steel. Fan hub shall be of heavy welded steel construction with blades bolted to he hub. Fan blades & hub assembly shall be statically & dynamically balanced at the manufacturer‟s works.
c. Shaft shall be of steel, accurately ground & shall be of ample size for the load transmitted & shall not pass through first critical speed thru the full range of specified fan speeds.
d. Motor shall be std (easily replaceable) permanent split capacitor or shaded pole for small sizes, totally enclosed with pre-lubricated sleeve or ball bearings, designed for quiet operation with a maximum speed of 1000 rpm for fan 60 cm dia or larger & 1440 rpm for fans 45 cm dia & smaller.
e. Motors for large fans shall be suitable for 415 + 6% Voltage, 50 HZ cycle, 3 Phase power supply & for small fans shall be suitable for 220 + 6% voltage, 50 cycle single phase power supply. Motors shall be suitable for either horizontal or vertical services as required.
f. Each fan should be provided with following accessories 1. Wire Guard on inlet & bird screen at the outlet. 2. Fixed or gravity louvers built into a steel frame at the outlet. 3. Regulator for controlling fan speed for single-phase fan motor. 4. SPP for 3 phase fans.
B. Centrifugal Fans
Centrifugal fans shall be DIDW/SWSI Class I construction arrangement 3 for DWDI fans complete with access door, squirrel cage induction motor, V-belt drive, belt Guard & vibration Isolators, direction of discharge/rotation & motor position shall be as per approved shop drawings. a. Housing shall be constructed out of 14G sheet steel welded construction. It shall be rigidly
reinforced & supported by structural angles. Split casing shall be provided on larger sizes of fans, however neoprene / asbestos packing should be provided throughout split joints to make it airtight.
18 gauge galvanized wire mesh guards of 5 cm sieves shall be provided on both inlets. Housing shall be provided with standard cleanout door with handles & neoprene gasket. Rotation arrow shall be clearly marked on the housing.
b. Fan wheel shall be backward curved non-overloading type. Fan wheel & housing shall be statically & dynamically balanced. For fans upto 450 mm dia, fan outlet velocity shall not exceed 550 m/min & maximum fan speed shall not exceed 1450 rpm. For fans above 450 mm dia, the outlet velocity shall be within 700 m/minute & maximum fan speed shall not exceed 1000 rpm. High static pressure fan speed shall be as per manufacturer.
c. Shaft shall be constructed out of steel, turned, ground & polished.
d. Bearings shall be of sleeve/ball baring type mounted directly on the fan housing. Bearing
shall be designed especially for quiet operation & shall be self-aligning, oil/grease pack pillow block type.
e. Fan motor shall be squirrel cage TEFC with F class insulation suitable for 415 +/- 10%
Volts, 50 HZ cycle, 3 Phase Power supply & should be of approved make. Moor shall be 4 pole -1450 rpm. The Motor & fan selection should be such that it gives the optimum performance & most silent design.
f. Drive to fan shall be provided through belt with adjustable motor sleeves & a standard
Belt guard. Belts shall be of oil resistant type.
g. The complete assembly shall be mounted on the suitable ant vibration mounts designed based on the combination of motor & fan with accessories.
C. Axial Flow Fan
Fan shall be complete with motor, motor mount, belt driven/direct driven, with vibration isolation & suspension arrangement as required
a. Casing shall be constructed of heavy gauge sheet steel. Fan casing, motor mount &
straightening vane shall be of welded steel construction. Motor mounting plate shall be minimum 14 mm thick & machined to receive motor flange. An inspection door with handle & neoprene gasket shall be provided, casing shall have flanged connection on both ends for ducted applications. Incase of ceiling suspension support brackets should be welded to the casing for connection to the hanger bolts. The complete design of the straightening vanes shall be to achieve maximum efficiency & minimizing turbulence.
b. Rotor hub & blades shall be cast aluminium or cast steel construction. Blades shall be die-formed aerofoil shaped for maximum efficiency & shall vary in twist & width from hub to tip to effect equal air distribution along the blade length Fan blades mounting on the hub shall be statically & dynamically balanced. Extended grease leads for external lubrication shall be provided. The fan pitch control may be manually readjusted at site upon installation for obtaining actual airflow values as required.
c. Fan motor shall be squirrel cage TEFC with F class insulation suitable for 415 +/- 10%
Volts, 50 HZ cycle, 3 Phase Power supply & should be of approved make. Moor shall be 4 pole -1450 rpm. For fans upto 450 mm dia impeller, fan maximum fan speed shall not exceed 1450 rpm. For fans above 450 mm dia impeller the maximum fan speed shall not exceed 1000 rpm. The complete design should result into an efficient & silent operation. The motor conduit box shall be mounted on exterior of fan casing & a flexible metal conduit should be used to protect the wires from air stream.
d. Drive to fan shall be provided through belt with adjustable motor sleeves & a standard Belt
guard with vented front for heat dissipation. Belts shall be of oil resistant type.
e. The complete assembly shall be mounted on the suitable ant vibration mounts designed based on the combination of motor & fan with accessories.
f. The fans should be provided with outlet & inlet cone. The silencers may be provided if
required for the application considering the noise level of the system.
PART 2
VARIABLE REFRIGERANT VOLUME SYSTEM (VRV) SCOPE: All variable Refrigerant Volume Air Conditioners shall be fully Factory assembled, charged with refrigerant wired, piped and tested at the factory. The system shall comprise of Air Cooled Multi Split type Outdoor units, and a variety of indoor units connected by common Refrigerant piping and Power and Control Cabling. The appropriate Indoor units are detailed below, however the Units offered shall be as per the Bill of Quantities. The out door unit configuration may be modified by the Bidder giving the same tonnage as specified. SPECIFICATION OF VARIABLE REFRIGERANT VOLUME SYSTEM (VRV): GENERAL: The system selected is a modular system, with number of indoors connected to centrally located outdoor units, as per details designing given in the tender. The outdoor units for all the system shall be air cooled type and mounted on terrace of the building. Indoor units in various areas shall be as per enclosed drawings/Bill of Quantities. Whenever feasible in open spaces or large rooms the indoor units shall be logically split and connected to separate outdoor units. All the VRV air conditioners shall be fully factory assembled, wired, internally piped and tested. The outdoor unit shall be pre-charged with first charge of R 410 a refrigerant. Additional charge shall be added as per refrigerant piping at site. All the units shall be suitable for operation with 415 V +_ 10%, 50 Hz +_ 3%, 3 phase supply for outdoor units & 220 V +_ 10%, 50 Hz _+ 3%, 1 Phase supply for in door units. The VRV system shall provide stable, trouble free & safe operation, with flexibility of operating desired indoor units. The outdoor units must be capable of delivering exact capacity proportional to the number of indoor units switched on & the heat load in the air conditioned area. The proportional operation shall be achieved by varying speed of the compressor in the outdoor units. The operation of the VRV system shall be through independent wired remote controllers (no wireless controller to be used) as specified. The entire system shall be controlled by a system controller and shall be integrated though BACNET protocol with an intelligent building management system. The system controller shall be able to control start/stop on time schedule and also provide common fault from the system. The BMS will be provided by others. OUTDOOR UNITS:
Out doors units of the VRV system shall be compact air cooled type. All the compressors of the out door units must be hermetically sealed scroll type. Each module of out door unit must have separate 1 # inverter compressor, suitable to operate at heat load proportional to indoor requirement. “Anti Corrosive “treatment (Blue Fins) for Al fins of Condenser Coils is mandatory. The treatment should be suitable for areas of high pollution and salt laden air.
The outdoor units must be suitable for up to 150 m refrigerant piping between outdoor unit and the farthest indoor units, total piping of 300m for all the indoor units. Allowable level difference between out door unit and indoor units shall be 50m in case of out door unit on top and 40 m in case of out door unit at bottom. Allowable level difference between various indoor units connected to one out door unit shall be up to 15m. Back up operation, in case of failure of one of the compressors of out door unit, for single module outdoor units or failure of one of the modules in case of multiple module outdoor units shall be possible. The VRV outdoor unit shall always be supplying at least 33% of back up operation, of the full load capacity. The outdoor unit shall employ system of equal run time for all the compressors, inverter or on/off type, within each out door unit-Single Module or Multi Module. The outdoor units shall be suitable to operate within an ambient temperature range of -5 deg C to 43 deg C, in cooling mode. Air cooled condenser shall have Axial Flow, upward throw fan, directly coupled to fan motors with minimum IP 55 protection. The outdoor unit condenser fan shall be able to develop external static pressure up to 6 mm of H2O. The entire operation of out door units shall be through independent remotes of indoor units. No separate Start/Stop function shall be required. Starter for the Out door unit compressor shall be “Direct on Line” type. Inverter compressor of the unit shall start first and at the minimum frequency, to reduce the inrush current during starting. Refrigerant control in the out door unit shall be through Electronic Expansion Valve. Complete refrigerant circuit, oil balancing/equalizing circuit shall be factory assembled & tested. Noise level of outdoor units shall not exceed 63 dB (A) at a distance of 1.5 m from the unit. The outdoor units shall confirm to Technological Guideline for Harmonic Suppression – JAEG 9702-1995. High Harmonic Environmental Target Level for Power Distribution system shall be 5%. Out door units shall be complete with following safety devices:
High pressure switch
Fan driver overload protector
Over current relay
Inverter Overload Protector
Fusible Plug Monitoring from BMS Necessary relays and contacts shall be provided for monitoring the status of the outdoor units from the building management system. The outdoor units shall provide necessary volt free contacts for this purpose. Status shall include start/stop/run and trip. Unit shall be supplied with
Connection pipes
Clamps
Necessary relays for hard wired points to BMS For providing ON/OFF status And trip alarm
Units shall be available in following configuration 5 HP, 8 HP to 48 HP, within increments of 2 HP.
Specifications for Indoor Units: Indoor units:
The indoor units shall be selected for maintaining the required temperature and noise criteria as
specified under Basis of Design.
Ceiling Mounted duct type units: These units shall be ceiling suspended with suitable supports to take care of
Operating weight of the unit, without causing any excessive vibration & noise. The cold air supplied by these units will be supplied to the area to be air conditioned, through duct system specified in the tender. Each indoor unit must have electronic expansion valve operated by microprocessor thermostat based temperature control to deliver cooling/heating as per the heat load of the room. The unit casing shall be Galvanized steel Plate. Unit must be insulated with sound absorbing thermal insulation material, Glass Fiber. The noise level of unit at the highest operating level shall be selected to meet the noise criteria specified for each area. The unit must be able to develop external static pressure of 25mm (250PA) at the specified air quantities- to match the specified supply air ducting, grills and extract grills plus 5 Pa. Unit must have Thermal Fuse for fan motor protection, in case of motor heating. Each indoor unit shall have factory installed as standard equipment, maintenance free long-life filter and resin net with mold resistant. The unit will be connected in series to a suitable out door unit & it must be possible to operate the unit independently, through corded/cordless remote specified in the bill of quantities. The entire system shall be controlled by a system controller and shall be integrated through BACNET protocol with an intelligent building management system. The system controller shall be able to control start/stop on time schedule and also provide common fault from the system. The BMS will be provided by others. The unit shall be supplied with following from the factory
Paper pattern for installation
Drain hose/Clamp metal/Insulation for fitting / sealing pads / Clamps / Screws.
Long life replacement filter The unit must be available in the following class-
1.6 HP, 2.0 HP, 2.5 HP, 3.2 HP, 4 HP, 5 HP, 8 HP, 10 HP Wall Mounted Units:
Wall mounted units must be compact & stylish design that does not detract from the decor of the room. Each indoor unit must have electronic expansion valve operated by microprocessor thermostat based temperature control to deliver cooling/heating as per the heat load of the room. The unit must have provision of adding drain pump kit if required and specified. The drain pump must be suitable to lift drain up to 1000 mm from the bottom of the unit. Unit must be insulated with sound absorbing thermal insulation material, Polystyrene/Polyethylene foam. The noise level of unit at the highest operating level shall not exceed 46 dB (A), at a vertical distance of 1.5 m from the grille of the unit. The unit shall be supplied with Resin Net filter with Mold Resistance. The filter shall be easy to remove, clean & re install. The unit grille must be washable with soap solution. It shall be possible to set minimum 5 steps of discharge angle by remote controller. It shall be possible to fit drain pipe from either side of the unit (Left of right) The unit will be connected in series to a suitable out door unit and it must be possible to operate the unit independently, through corded/ cordless remote specified in the bill of quantities. The entire system shall be controlled by a system controller and shall be integrated through BACNET protocol with a intelligent building management system. The system controller shall be able to control start/stop on time schedule and also provide common fault from the system. The BMS will be provided by others. The unit shall be supplied with following from the factory
Installation panel
Paper pattern for installation
Insulation tape/Clamps/Screws The unit must be available in following class- 0.8 HP, 1 HP, 1.25 HP, 1.6 HP, 2.0 HP, 2.5 HP Ceiling mounted Built- In Type:
These units shall be ceiling suspended with suitable supports to take care of operating weight of the unit, without causing any excessive vibration & noise. The cold air supplied by these units will be supplied to the area to be air conditioned directly through duct collar & grille or, through duct system specified in the tender. Each indoor unit must have electronic expansion valve operated by microprocessor thermostat based temperature control to deliver cooling/heating as per the heat load of the room. The unit casing shall be Galvanized Steel Plate.
Unit must be insulated with sound absorbing thermal insulation material, Glass Fiber. The noise level of unit at the highest operating level shall be selected to meet the noise criteria specified for each area. The unit must have provision to set external static pressure in three stages from max 10 mm to min 2mm, depending on the air supply system plus 5 Pa additional. The unit mist include as standard equipment, maintenance free long ling filter, resin net with mold resistant. The unit must include as standard equipment, a drain pump kit suitable to lift drain water up to 250mm from the drain pipe opening. Unit must have Thermal fuse for fan motor protection, in case of motor heating. The Unit will be connected in series to a suitable outdoor unit & it must be possible to operate the unit independently, through corded/cordless remote specified in the bill of quantities. The entire system shall be controlled by a system controller and shall be integrated through BACNET protocol with an intelligent building management system. The system controller shall be able to control start/stop on time schedule and also provide common fault from the system. The BMS will be provided by others. The unit shall be supplied with following from the factory
Paper pattern for installation
Drain hose/Clamp metal/Insulation for fitting/Sealing pads/ Clamps/ Screws.
Long life replacement filter The unit must be available in following class- 0.8 HP, 1 HP, 1.25 HP, 1.6 HP, 2.0 HP, 2.5 HP, 3.2 HP, 4 HP, 5 HP Outdoor Air Processing Unit:
For fresh air treatment an outdoor air processing unit shall be provided. Size will be as per BOQ. The unit shall be complete with long life filters and a wired remote controller. The unit shall be capable of cooling Mumbai ambient air of 37.7 deg C to a temperature of 18deg C.
The indoor processing unit shall be connected to VRV outdoor units of the specified capacities. Where required drain pumps shall be provided. The unit must include as standard equipment, maintenance free long- life filter, resin net with mold resistant.
Specification for Controls System for VRV air conditioning system: Wired Remote Controller:
Wired remote controller shall be supplied as specified in the “Bill of Quantities”
The controller must have large crystal display screen, which displays complete operating status. The digital display must allow setting of temperature with 1 deg C interval. Remote shall be able to individually program by timer the respective times for operation start and stop for a period of 1 week. Remote shall have 24 hrs. clock function. Programming can be enabled or disabled. Provide scheduling of start/ stop and temperature limit- 5 settings per day. Remote must be equipped with thermostat sensor in the remote controller that will make possible more comfortable room temperature control The remote shall be able to monitor room temperature & preset temperature by microcomputer and can select cool/heat operation mode automatically. The remote must constantly monitor malfunctions in the system & must be equipped with s “self diagnosis function” that let know by a message immediately when a malfunction occurs. It shall be possible to wire the remote upto 500Rmt
Intelligent Control system:
Intelligent control system controller shall be supplied as specified in the “ Bill of Quantities”.
The System supplied must integrate with the VRV system. The VRV system supplied must be provided with a control system, from the supplier of VRV equipments. The required hard ware must be selected, suitable for up to minimum 128 indoor units. Complete operation & monitoring of VRV air conditioning system shall be possible through the control system. Following functions shall be possible
Control shall be capable of following
Controlling 128 indoor units
Zone control
Malfunction code display
All the functions available with wired remote controller
It should be possible to write the remote to 1000m
Scheduling of indoor units,24hrs.clock & programming.
Remote start/ stop of indoor units
Graphical report
Energy saving function
Mal function report
Monitor and report from remote side
Interface for using BAC net or Lon works at Client‟s option
Color LCD touch panel icon display
Multi language (English,French,Italian,German,Spnaish & Chinese)
Yearly schedule
P.P.D. (Power Proportional Distribution Function)
History of 500 actions
Simple Interlock Function
Fire Alarm System interface.
Following major functions shall be provided:
Monitoring Air conditioning status monitoring Indoor unit error monitoring Indoor air inlet temperature monitoring Filters choke sign monitoring.
Control, Operation & Setting Start/Stop Control Temperature adjustment mode setting Remote control setting Temperature setting Filter sign reset
Display Air Conditioner operation setting & Status Set temperature Indoor unit error Indoor air inlet temperature Filter Sign
Measurement
Accurate operation time Number of switching times Power consumption with KWH meter Room temperature Outdoor temperature
Alarm
Fire Alarm interface
Necessary data cabling and connections shall be provided for remote Monitoring and Control of the complete VRV System.
Remote monitoring of the complete HVAC system shall be possible.
System shall be capable to take external signal like Security/Fire For forced shut off.
Required hardware shall be suitable for operation between-10 Deg C to Deg C & humidity range, of 0% To 98%, without condensation.
Refrigerant Piping:
Piping shall be refrigerant grade hard copper piping as required. Pipe jointing shall be done using special fittings. Refnet joints supplied by VRV manufacturer shall be provided where required. Piping shall be suitable for the high pressure of R410a and Piping thickness shall be increased accordingly.
Piping jointing shall be of the brazed type. The piping shall be tested at 38.5kg/cm2.
The indoor and outdoor units shall be connected with refrigerant piping. All piping connections for the units should be performed inside the unit. The refrigerant piping should be insulated with Armaflex insulation as specified under insulation. Brazing shall be carried out to the requirements of relevant code of practice using silver soldered brazing rods. Compression fittings will be accepted on refrigerant pipe work.
After installation of the complete piping the same shall be tested with nitrogen at 38.5 Kg.cm2. After successfully pressure testing the pipe work the same shall be vacuumed to 7mm Hg and vacuum shall be maintained for 4 hours, vacuuming shall be achieved using a vacuum pump. Use of compressor for vacuuming shall not be permitted. vacuum shall then be broken with R-410 a gas to atmospheric pressure. The pipe shall once again be vacuumed to 7mm Hg pressure. This exercise shall be carried out twice before the owner‟s representative before charging the refrigerant in the circuit. All connections of Refrigerant Piping shall be in high grade copper of Refrigeration quality of “York Shire Imperial” make/equal.
DRAIN PIPING:
Drain piping shall be G. I. with necessary fittings and accessories. 25 mm Diameter pipe shall be used for single unit and 40 mm diameter pipe for 2 units and 50mm for 3 units installation. The drain piping piping shall be with P traps and shall be terminated upto the nearest drain.
The drain piping shall be insulated with 1 layer of 13mm thick tubular Armaflex insulation.
OUTDOOR AIR PROCESSING UNIT General Provide factory assembled outdoor air handling unit of the VRV type in accordance with the Contract Documents.
Work Included: Outdoor Air processing unit VRV type unit with Centrifugal Fan of the Draw-Through Type.
Submittals: Manufacturer‟s Data: Submit certified dimensioned drawings, including total weight and support points.
Product Data: Submit fan curves, coil performance and acoustic data for each unit.
The owner and engineer may observe the air handling units for this Project under manufacture at the factory prior to shipment, if they so Desire . The Mechanical Contractor shall notify the Owner and Engineer in Writing of the production schedule and shipment date at least three (3) Weeks prior the first handling unit production date Quality Assurance: Construct units in compliance with all requirement of the latest JIS Standards.
Test rate and certify units performance and characteristics, including cooling coils, in accordance with JIS Standards. All insulation shall have a composite (insulation, facing, and adhesive) fire and smoke hazard rating as tested by Procedure ASTM E84, NFPA 255,
Flame Spread 25 Smoke Developed 50
Confirm all fan drives to industry standard. Comply with local codes Products: Provide factory-built Outdoor Air Processing Units of the horizontal type with coil requirements and capacities as listed on drawings.
Construct exact air handling unit complete with casting, fans, internal spring type vibration isolation, insulation, drain pans, cooling coils,galvanized or painted filter retainer frames or plenums for filter holding frames, factory mounted fan motors with adjustable bases, belt guards and belt drives, flexible connections.
Outdoor Air Processing Unit shall have coil section, filter section and fan section as per manufacturer‟s standard range. The Outdoor Air Processing Unit shall be provided with the following accessories as standard supply.
a. Operation remote controller b. Schedule timer c. Wiring adapter d. High efficiency filters e. Drain pump kit where stated in BOQ.
The Outdoor Air Processing Units shall be connected to the VRV outdoor unit which is serving the other indoor units.
Testing Inspect fan scrolls and remove objects or debris. Inspect and flush coils and remove debris or obstructions. Verify that all fire dampers are open and control dampers are to their proper position.
Record the following design requirement for fans and fan motors from the design drawings and reviewed shop drawings:
A. Manufacturer, model and size. B. Air quantities-cubic feet per minute. C. Approximate fan speed- revolutions per minute. D. Fan static pressure (total or external) 0 inches of water E. Outlet velocity-feet per minute. F. Fan brake horsepower. G. Motor horsepower H. Volts, hertz, amperes and service factor at design conditions. I. Record the following data from fans and fan motors installed at the projects J. Manufacture, model and size.
K. Motor horsepower, service factor and revolutions per minute. L. Volts, hertz, full load ampere and service factor. M. Motor starter and heater size. N. Equipment location. O. Completely adjust fans and duct systems by the adjustment of sheaves, dampers, and other
volume and diverting control devices, to obtain the air quantities indicated in the Contract Documents. Integral dampers in terminal outlets and inlets are not to be used for adjustment of duct branches. Adjust outside air and return air modulating dampers to admit the specified quantities of air under all cycles of operation. Adjust final air quantities within 5% of the design requirements. Balance air outlets, with air pattern as shown on the Drawings.
P. Record the following test data for fans and fan motors installed at project at final balanced conditions: 1. Fan speed –revolution per minute. 2. Fan suction, discharge and total static pressure (external or total)- inches of water Static pressure drops across filters, dampers, coils washers, and eliminators in the 3. Supply fan casing in inches of water. 4. Motor operating amperes and voltage per phase at operating conditions. 5. Fan cubic feet per minute as required above. 6. Calculated brake horsepower.
PART 6
AIR DISTRIBUTION
The scope of this section comprise supply fabrication installation and testing of all galvanized sheet metal ducts, supply installation testing and balancing of all grilles registers and diffusers, in accordance with these specifications and the general arrangement shown on the Drawings.
Duct Materials :
All ducts shall be fabricated from galvanized steel sheets as indicated in the enclose table 1.
Sheet metal ducts shall be fabricated out of galvanized steel sheets. Fabrication of ducts shall be through Triplex lock former or multiple lock formers, conforming to relevant BIS Codes.
Sheets used shall be produced by Hot Dip Process and galvanizing shall be Class VII - Light Coating of zinc.
All ducts shall be fabricated and installed in workmanlike manner, generally conforming to relevant BIS Codes. Round exposed ducts shall be die-formed for achieving perfect circle configuration.
Ducts so identified on the Drawings shall be acoustically lined with thermal insulation as described in the section “Insulation” and as indicated in Schedule of Quantities.
Duct dimensions should be compensated for the thickness of the acoustic insulation proposed wherever applicable.
Ducts shall be straight and smooth on the inside with neatly finished joints. All joints shall be made airtight.
Changes in dimensions and shape of ducts shall be gradual. Air-turns shall be installed in all vanes, arranged to permit the air to make the turn without appreciable turbulence.
Plenums shall be panel type and assembled at site. Fixing of galvanized angle flanges on duct pieces shall be with rivets heads inside i.e. towards G. S. sheet and riveting shall be done from outside.
Rubber lining 4 mm thick shall be used between duct flanges instead of felt, in all ducting installation.
All ducts shall be installed generally as per tender Drawings, and in strict accordance with approved shop drawings to be prepared by the Contractor. While making the drawings contractor will have to consider the other services interference & suit to site conditions.
The Contractor shall provide and neatly erect all sheet metal work as may be required to carry out the intent of these Specifications and Drawings. The work shall meet with the approval of Architect/ Consultant in all its parts and details.
Structural members from floor shall support all vertical ductwork. Contractor will provide necessary additional cost if any for supporting the ducts running on the floor level & rising along the wall.
Where metal ducts or sleeves terminate in woodwork, tight joints shall be made by means of closely fittings heavy flanged collars. Where ducts pass through brick or masonry openings, wooden frame work shall be provided within the opening and crossing ducts provided with heavy flanged collars on each side of wooden frame work, so that duct crossing is made leak-proof.
All ducts shall be totally free from vibration under all conditions of operation. Whenever duct work is connected to fans, air handling units or blower coil units that may cause vibration in the ducts, ducts shall be provided with one flexible connections shall be constructed of fire retarding flexible heavy canvas sleeve at least 100mm long securely bonded and bolted on both sides.
Contractor has deemed to have included the scaffolding & any other cost in their estimate which may be required for installation of the ducting. The quoted unit rate for external surface of ducts shall include all wastage allowances, flanges and gaskets for joints, nuts and bolts, hangers and angles and angle/ flat with double nuts for supports, felt strip between duct and support, vibration isolator suspension where specified or required, inspection chamber/ access panel, splitter damper with quadrant and lever for position indication, turning vanes, straightening vanes, and all other accessories required to complete the duct installation as per the Specifications. These accessories shall not be separately measured nor paid for.
Unless otherwise specified, measurements for ducting, for the project shall be on the basis of centerline measurements described herewith.
Duct Work shall be measured on the basis of external surface area of ducts. Duct measurements shall be taken before application of the insulation. The external surface area shall be calculated by measuring the perimeter comprising overall width and depth, including the corner joints, in the center of each duct section, multiplying with the overall length from flange face to flange face of each duct section and adding up areas of all duct sections.
For tapered rectangular ducts, the average width and depth shall be considered for perimeter, whereas for tapered circular ducts, the diameter of the section midway between large and small diameters shall be adopted, the length of tapered duct section shall be the centerline distance between the flanges of the duct section.For special pieces like bends, tees, reducers, branches and collars, mode of measurement shall be identical to that described above using the length along the centerline.
TABLE - I LOW VELOCITY ( LOW PRESSURE ) DUCTING FOR STATIC PRESSURE UPTO 150 MM W.G. AND VELOCITIES UPTO 600 M / MIN (2000 FPM)
Dimension of Larger size of Duct (mm)
SHEET THICKNESS (SWG)
Transverse seems at joints
Minimum bracing Angle size and Maximum Longitudinal spacing from joints (mm)
Round hangers size
Trapeze shelf Angle size (mm)
Maxi. Spacing of supports (mm)
Up to 750 24 GSS Flanged joint „S‟ slip ( 25 mm high ) or drive slip.
Cross Breaking 8 mm 25x25x3 2400
751 – 1520 22 Companion Angles Flanged joint (25x25x3)
-DO- 10mm Rod 40x40x3 2400
1521-2285 20 Companion Angles Flanged joint (40x40x3)
40x40x3 @ 1200
10mm Rod 50x50x6
2400
Above 2285
18 Companion Angles flanged joint (40x40x3)
40x40x3 @ 600 10 mm Rod 50x50x6 2400
NOTE :
1. Cross breaking shall not be provided for ducts that are to be insulated, and finished with cement plaster. It is not necessary to cross break the air outlet connections of ducts (collars for grilles / Diffusers)
2. The circular duct should be fabricated only on approval of the sample by the consultant. All the circular ducts up to 1000 mm diameter will be fabricated using 20G GSS sheets.
Duct Dampers:
Dampers: All duct dampers shall be louver dampers of robust construction and tight fitting. The design, method of handling and control shall be suitable for the location and service required.
Dampers shall be provided with suitable links levers and quadrants as required for their proper operation. Control or setting devices shall be made robust, easily operable and accessible through suitable access doors in the ducts. Every damper shall have an indicating device clearly showing the damper position at all times.
Dampers shall be placed in ducts at every branch supply or return air duct connection, whether or not indicated on the Drawings, for the proper volume control and balancing of the system.
Supply & Return Air Registers:
Supply & return air registers will be manufactured using anodized or Powder coated extruded aluminium These registers shall have individually adjustable louvers both horizontal and vertical. Supply air registers shall be provided with key operated opposed blade extruded aluminium volume control dampers anodized in matt black shade with stove enamel paint.
The registers shall be suitable for fixing arrangement with concealed or visible screws as approved by Architect. Linear continuous supply cum return air register shall be extruded Aluminium construction with fixed horizontal bars at 0°/15°/30°/45° inclination & flange on both sides. The thickness of the fixed bar louvers shall be minimum 5.5 mm in front and 3.8 mm in rear with rounded edges and flange shall be 20 mm/ 30 mm wide as approved by Architect. The grills shall be suitable for concealed fixing. Volume control dampers of extruded aluminium anodized in black color shall be provided in supply air duct collars. For fan coil units horizontal fixed bar grills as described shall be provided with flanges on four sides & suitable for clip fixing.
All registers shall be selected in consultation with the Architect. Different spaces shall require horizontal or vertical face bars, and different width of margin frames. These shall be procured only after obtaining written approval from Architect for each type of register.
All registers shall have a soft continuous rubber/ foam gasket between the periphery of the register and the surface on which it has to be mounted. The effective area of the registers shall not be less than 66% of gross face area.
Registers shall be adjustable pattern as each grill bar shall be pivotable to provide pattern with 0° to + 45° horizontal and deflection downwards. Bars shall hold deflection settings under all conditions of velocity and pressure.
Bar longer than 45 cm shall be reinforced by set-back vertical members of approved thickness. All volume control dampers shall be anodized in Mat black shade.
Supply & Return Air Diffusers / Disc valves:
Supply & return air diffusers shall be as shown on the Drawings and indicated in Schedule of Quantities. Mild steel diffusers/ dampers/disc valves shall be factory coated with rust-resistant primer. Aluminium diffusers shall be powder coated & made from extruded aluminium section as specified in schedule of quantities.
Rectangular Diffusers shall be steel/ extruded aluminium construction, square & rectangular, diffusers with flush fixed pattern for different spaces as per schedule of quantities. These shall be selected in consultation with the Architect. These shall be procured only after obtaining written approval from Architect for each type of diffuser.
Supply air diffusers shall be equipped with fixed air distribution grids, removable key-smudge volume control dampers, and anti-smudge rings as required in specific applications, and as per requirements of schedule of Quantities. The extruded aluminium diffusers shall be provided with removable central core and concealed key operation for volume control damper.
Supply air diffusers shall be provided with volume control/ balancing dampers within the supply air collar. Diffusers for different spaces shall be selected in consultation with the Architect, and provided as per requirements of schedule of Quantities. All diffusers shall have volume control dampers of extruded aluminium construction anodized in mat black shade.
Linear Diffuser shall be extruded aluminium construction with removable core, one or two-way blow type. Linear Diffuser shall be extruded aluminium construction multislot type with air pattern controller provided in each slot. Supply air diffusers shall be provided with Hit & Miss volume control dampers in each slot of the supply air diffusers. Diffusers for different spaces shall be selected in consultation with the Architect and provided as per requirements of Schedule of Quantities.
PART 7
DRAIN PIPING The drain piping shall be medium class galvanized steel as per IS 1239/1979. Pipe crosses shall be provided at bends, to permit easy cleaning of drain line.
The drain line shall be provided up to the nearest drain trap and pitched towards the trap. Drain lines shall be provided at all the lowest points in the system, as well as at equipment, where leakage of water is likely to occur, or to remove condensate and water from pump glands.
Drain valves for main lines up to 300 mm dia shall be 25 mm in size and for line sizes above 300 mm dia the drain valve size shall be 40 mm.
PART 8
INSULATION
Duct Acoustic & Thermal Insulation SCOPE:
Scope of this article covers supply & application of insulation as specified. Acoustic insulation for Duct & Plenums: Unless plenums are acoustically insulated, provide acoustic lining with 12 mm thick Fibreglass boards having density 48 Kg/cu.m. and stuck with CPRX cold compound covered with RP tissue paper. The insulation shall be carried out upto a distance of 5M from outlet of indoor units. Insulation backed by 30 G perforated aluminium sheet with 3/32” dia. Holes at 3/16” staggered centers shall be mechanically attached to internal of ducts with 50mm long GI bolts, washers & nuts. Space bolts at maximum 300mm centers and at least 75mm from all corners. Aluminium sheets along periphery shall be minimum 75 mm in excess of the insulation and turned in to avoid the fibers entering the air stream. Method of applying insulation –
Apply a thin layer of cold compound.
Fix up fibreglass slabs & cover with R.P.tissue.
Cover up with perforated aluminium sheets as explained above. Thermal Insulation For Exposed ducts
Clean the duct surface & apply two coats of hot bitumen at 1.5 kg/sqm for two coats.
Stick insulation slabs, which is either 50 mm thick TF quality expanded polystyrene of minimum 16 kg/cum density or equivalent u value Polyurethane. Hold at 1000 mm center with 1 mm dia galvanized steel wire or PVC strapping & blind the surface with hot bitumen at 1.5 kg/sqm.
Wrap 500 g polythene faced hessian & covey with 0.63 dia 20 mm mesh galvanized steel wire mesh.
Apply one more layer of hot bitumen.
Apply 12 mm thick cement plaster 1;3 n two layers of 6 mm thick each mixed with water proofing compound & finished smooth.
The finished insulation for under floor will be covered with one layer of 3 mm tar felt fixed with hot bitumen & held in position by 1.0 mm Galvanized steel wire & for Exposed to weather will be additionally cladded by 26 G Al sheet.
For Ducting above ground level
All supply air ducts are insulated with 19 mm thick closed cell nitrile foam class O fire rating material or equivalent with necessary adhesive SR505. Return Air ducting is done similarly with 16 mm thick material.
Insulation of Suction Line: Suction piping shall be insulated with elastomeric nitrile rubber class „O‟ pipe sections of 12 mm thickness. The joints are to be sealed with black monsoon tape and provided with necessary protective covering.
Piping Insulation :
All refrigerant and condensate drain piping shall be insulated in the manner specified herein. Before applying insulation, all pipe work and fittings should be brushed and cleaned, and dust, dirt, mortar and oil removed. All MS pipes should be provided with a coat of zinc chromate primer,
followed by two coats of cold setting adhesive compound. Thermal insulation should then be applied as follows:
Pipe Size (mm) Thickness for expanded polystyrene (T F Quality) mm
10 to 40 25
50 to 100 50
Above 100 65 All insulation work should be carried out by skilled workmen specially trained in this kind of work. All insulated clad pipes shall be labeled (S,R or RR) and provided with 300 mm wide band of paint along the circumference at every 1200 mm distance for color coding. Direction of fluid shall also be marked.
PART 10
ELECTRICAL PANELS & CABLE Scope: The scope of this section comprises of fabrication, supply, erection, testing and commissioning of electric control panels. Work shall be carried out in accordance with the Specifications, Local Rules, Indian Electricity Act 1910 as amended upto date, and rules issued there under, Regulations of the Fire Insurance
Company and relevant BIS Codes of Practice. The control panels shall be manufactured by a reputed manufacturer and shall be IP 55. Construction Features: The Control panel shall be sheet steel cabinet for OUTDOOR installation, dead front, floor mounting/ wall mounting type. The control panel shall be totally enclosed, completely dust and vermin proof and shall be with hinged doors, Neoprene gasket and padlocking arrangement. Steel sheets used in the construction of panel shall be 2 mm thick and shall be folded and braced as necessary to provide a rigid support for all components. Joints of any kind in sheet metal shall be seam welded, all welding slag shall be grounded off and welding pits wiped smooth with plumber metal. All panels and covers shall be properly fitted and square with the frame, and holes in the panel correctly positioned. Fixing screws shall enter into holes tapped into an adequate thickness of metal or provided with wing nuts. Self-threading screws shall not be used in the construction of Control panels. A base channel of 75 mm x 75 mm x 5 mm thick shall be provided at the bottom for floor-mounted panels. Minimum clearance of 200 mm shall be provided between the floor of Control panel and the lowest unit. The control panel shall be of adequate size with a provision of 25% spare space to accommodate possible future switchgear. Switches shall be arranged in multi-tier. Knockout holes of appropriate size and number shall be provided in the Control Panel in conformity with the location of cable/conduit connections. Removable sheet steel plates shall be provided at the top to drill holes for cable entry at site if required. Every cabinet shall be provided with Trafolyte or engraved metal nameplates. All panels shall be provided with circuit diagram engraved on PVC sheet. All live accessible connections shall be shrouded and minimum clearance between phase and earth shall be 20 mm and phase-to-phase shall be 25 mm. All equipment such as meters and indicating lamps etc. shall be located adjacent to the unit with which it is associated and care shall be taken to achieve a neat and symmetrical arrangement. Facility shall be provided for termination of cables from both above and below the control panel. Where cables enter from below, cable boxes shall be fitted at the rear and arranged in tiers to facilitate making connections to the upper and lower units. Clamps shall be provided to support the weight of the cables. All power wiring inside the control panel shall be colour coded and control wiring ferruled for easy identification. Circuit Compartment: Each circuit breaker, contactor and relay shall be housed in a separate compartment and shall have steel sheets on top and bottom of compartment. Sheet steel hinged lockable door shall be duly interlocked with the breaker in the “ON” position. Safety interlocks shall be provided to prevent the breaker from being drawn out when the breaker is in “ON” position. The door shall not form an integral part of the draw out portion of the panel. Sheet steel barriers shall be provided between the tiers in a vertical section. Instrument Accommodation: Adequate space shall be provided for accommodating instruments, indicating lamps, control contactors and control fuses etc. These shall be accessible for testing and maintenance without any danger of accidental contact with live parts of the circuit breaker and bus bar. “ON” lamps shall be provided on all outgoing feeders. Bus Bars and Bus Bar Connections :
The bus bar and interconnections shall be of aluminium and of rectangular cross section suitable for full load current for phase bus bars and 50% for neutral bus bar and shall be extendable on either side. The bus bars and interconnections shall be insulated with heat shrinkable sleeve and shall be colour coded. The bus bars shall be supported on glass fibre reinforced thermosetting plastic insulated supports at regular intervals to withstand the force arising from in case of short circuit in the system. All bus bars shall be provided in a separate chamber and shall be shrouded throughout, all connections shall be done by bolting and additional cross section area to be provided to compensate for the holes drilled in the bus bars. All connections between bus bars and breakers shall be through solid strips of proper size to carry full rated current and insulated with insulating tapes. Cable Compartments : Cable compartment of adequate size shall be provided in the control panels for all incoming and outgoing cables entering from bottom or top. Adequate and proper supports shall be provided in cable compartments to support cables. Labels : Aluminium Anodized labels shall be provided on all incoming and outgoing feeder switches. Circuit diagram showing the arrangements of the circuit inside the Control Panel shall be pasted on inside of the panel door and covered with transparent plastic sheet. Cable alley and bus chamber shall be identified on all panels. Rubber Mat: Rubber mat shall be provided to cover the full length of front of all panels and rear of panels where backspace shall be available for working from the rear. Materials: All materials shall be of the best quality complying with the BIS (Bureau of Indian Standards) specifications. Materials used shall be subject to the approval of the Client and samples of the same shall be furnished where required. Air Circuit Breakers: The Air Circuit Breakers shall be sheet metal enclosed flush front, draw out type, and shall be provided with a trip free manual operating mechanism with mechanical “ON” -- “OFF” indications. The circuit breaker shall be suitable for continuous rating and of capacity as called for. It shall be possible to switch “ON” and “OFF” the Circuit Breaker without opening the circuit breaker compartment door. The operating handle and the mechanical trip push button shall be at the front of the breaker and integral with the breaker. Cradle: The cradle shall be so designed and constructed as to permit smooth withdrawal and insertion of the breaker into it. The movement shall be free from jerks, easily operable and shall be on steel balls/ rollers and not on flat surfaces. Protective Devices: C. T. operated IDMT Relays for short circuit and earth fault operation shall be provided for all air circuit breakers. Suitable under voltage tripping mechanism for voltage less than + 10% of full rate voltage shall be provided. Selector Switch: Where called for, selector switches of rated capacity shall be provided in control panels, to give the choice of operating equipment in selective mode.
Moulded Case Circuit Breakers: Moulded Case circuit Breaker shall be of motor duty and shall be suitable for continuous load, manufactured in accordance with relevant BIS Codes. Starters: Each motor shall be provided with a starter of suitable rating. Starters shall be in accordance with relevant BIS Codes. All Star Delta and ATS Starters shall be fully automatic. Starters contactors shall have 3 main and 2 Nos. NO/ NC auxiliary contacts and shall be air break type suitable for making and breaking contact at minimum power factor of 0.35. For design consideration of contactors the starting current of connected motor shall be assumed to be 6 times the full load current of the motor in case of direct-on-line starters and 3 times the full load current of the motor in case of Star Delta/ Reduced Voltage Starters. The insulation for contactor coils shall be of Class “E”. Operating coils of contactors shall be suitable for 220/ 415 + 10% volts AC, 50 cycles supply system. The contactors shall cut out when voltage drops to 90% of the rated voltage. The housing of the contactors shall be heat resistant and having hing impact strength. Each starter shall have thermal overload protection on all three phases. Over Load Relays: Contactors shall be provided with a three element, positive acting ambient temperature compensated time-lagged thermal over load relays with adjustable setting. Relays shall be directly connected for motors upto 35 HP capacity. C. T. operated relays shall be provided for motors above 35 HP capacity. Heater circuit contactors may not be provided with over load relays. Current Transformers: Current transformers shall be of accuracy class I and suitable VA burden for operation of the connected meters and relays. These shall be resin bounded and epoxy coated. Single Phase Preventers: Single phase preventers shall be provided only incase single phasing prevention feature is not built in the over load. Single Phase preventers shall be in conformity with relevant BIS standards. Single-phase preventers shall act when the supply voltage drops down to 90% of the rated voltage or on failure of one or more phases. Time Delay Relays : Time delay relays shall be adjustable type with time delay adjustable from 0-180 seconds and shall have one set of auxiliary contacts for indicating lamp connections. Indicating Lamp & Materials : All meters and indicating lamps shall be in accordance with BS 37 and BS 39. The meters shall be flush mounted type. The indicating lamp shall be of low wattage. Each main panel shall be provided with voltmeter 0-500 volts with three way and off selector switch, CT operated ammeter of suitable range with three nos. CTs of suitable ratio with three way and off selector switch, phase indicating lamps, and other indicating lamps as called for. Each phase indicating lamp shall be backed up with 5 amps fuse. Other indicating lamps shall be backed up with fuses as called for. Toggle Switch: Toggle switches, where called for, shall be in conformity with relevant BIS Codes and shall be of 5 amps rating. Push Button Stations: Push button stations shall be provided for manual starting and stopping of motors/ equipment as called for Green and Red colour push buttons shall be provided for “Starting” and “Stopping” operations. “Start” or “Stop” indicating flaps shall be provided for push buttons. Push buttons shall be suitable for panel mounting and accessible from front without opening door, Lock lever shall be provided for “Stop” push buttons. The push button contacts shall be suitable for 6 amps current capacity.
Conduits: Conduits shall be of mild steel and shall be Hard drawn, stove enameled inside and outside with minimum wall thickness of 1.6 mm for conduits upto 32 mm diameter and 2 mm wall thickness for conduits above 32 mm diameter. GI pull wires shall be installed in the conduit while laying the conduit. Cables: M. V. Cables shall be PVC insulated aluminium conductor and armoured cables conforming to BIS Codes. Cables shall be armoured and suitable for laying in trenches, duct, and on cable trays as required. M. V. Cables shall be termite resistant. Control cables and indicating panel cables shall be multi core PVC insulated copper conductor and armoured cables. Wires: 415 volts grade PVC insulated copper conductor wires in conduit shall be used. Cable Laying: Cable shall be laid generally in accordance with BIS Code of Practice. Cables shall be laid on 14 gauge perforated MS sheet cable trays, and cable drops/ risers shall be fixed to ladder type cable trays fabricated out of steel angle. Access to all cables shall be provided to allow cable withdrawal/ replacement in the future. Where more than one cable is running, one dia spacing shall be provided to minimize the loss in current carrying capacity. Cables shall be suitably supported with Galvanized saddles when run on walls/ trays. When buried, they shall be laid in 350 mm wide and 750 mm deep trench and shall be covered with 250 mm thick layer of soft sifted sand & protected with bricks, tiles. Special care shall be taken to ensure that the cables are not damaged at bends. The radius of bend of the cables when installed shall not be less than 12 times the diameter of cable. 1.1 KV cable shall be buried 600 mm below ground level. Wire Sizes: For all single phase/ 3 phase wiring, 415 volts grade PVC insulated copper conductor wires shall be used. The equipment inside plant room and AHU room shall be connected to the control panel by means of insulated copper conductor wires of adequate size in exposed conduits. Final connections to the equipment shall be through wiring enclosed in galvanized flexible conduits rigidly clamped at both ends. An isolator shall be provided near each motor/ equipment wherever the motor/ equipment is separated from the supply panel through a partition barrier or through ceiling construction. PVC insulated single standard copper conductor wires shall be used inside the control panel for connecting different components and all the wires inside the control panel shall be neatly dressed and plastic beads shall be provided at both the ends for easy identification in control wiring. The minimum size of control wiring shall be 1.5 sq.mm PVC insulated standard soft drawn copper conductor wires drawn through conduit to be provided for connecting equipment and control panels. All the switches, contactors, push button stations, indicating lamps shall be distinctly marked with a small description of the service installed. The contactors and overload relays shall be provided for different capacity motors as per manufacturer‟s recommendation. Earthing: Earthing shall be provided as per IS: 3043-1987 and shall be copper strips/ wires. The main panel shall be connected to main earthing system of the power supply. All single-phase metal clad switches and control panels be earthed with minimum 3 mm diameter copper conductor wire. All 3 phase motors and equipment shall be earthed with 2 numbers distinct and independent insulated copper wires/ tapes.
All switches shall be earthed with two numbers distinct and independent copper wires tapes as follows :
i. 3 phase switches & control panels upto 60 amps rating.
2 Nos. 3 mm dia copper wires.
ii. 3 phase switches & control panels upto 63 amps to 100 amps rating.
2 Nos. 4 mm dia copper wires.
iii. 3 phase switches & control panels 125 amps to 200 amps rating.
2 Nos. 6 mm dia copper wires.
iv. 3 phase switches, control panels, bus ducts, above 200 amps rating.
2 Nos. 25 mm x 3 mm-Copper tapes.
The earthing connections shall be tapped off from the main earthing of electrical installation. The overlapping in earthing strips at joints shall be riveted with brass rivets & brazed in approved manner. Lugs of adequate capacity and size shall be used for all termination of wires. Lugs shall be bolted to the equipment body to be earthed after the metal body is cleaned of paint and other only substance, and properly tinned. Drawings: Shop drawings for control panels and wiring of equipment showing the route of conduit cable shall be submitted by the contractor for approval of Client & Consultant before starting the fabrication of panel and starting the work. On completion, four sets of complete “As-installed” drawings incorporating all details like, conduits routes, number of wires in conduit, location of panels, switches, junction/ pull boxes and cables route etc. shall be furnished by the Contractor. Testing: Before commissioning of the equipment, the entire electrical installation shall be tested in accordance with relevant BIS codes and test report furnished by a qualified and authorized person. The entire electrical installation shall be got approved by Electrical Inspector and a certificate from Electrical Inspector shall be submitted. All tests shall be carried out in the presence of the Client‟s engineers. Painting: All sheet steel work shall undergo a process of degreasing, through cleaning, and painting with a high corrosion resistant primer. All panels shall then be baked in an oven. The finishing treatment shall be by application of synthetic enamel paint of approved shade. Measurement of Electrical Control Panels: Panels shall be counted as number of units. Quoted rates shall include as lumpsum (NOT measurable lengths) for all internal wiring, power wiring and earthing connections from the control panel to the starter and to the motor, control wiring for interlocking, power and control wiring for remote start/ stop as well as indication as per the specifications. The quoted rate of panel shall also include all accessories, switchgear, fuses, contactors, indicating meters and lights as per the specifications. Power, Control cabling & Earthing:
All cables shall be laid in trenches, on wall & ceiling as per IS 1255-1950 with proper spacing between cables to minimize losses. Mount cables on MS supports when run on walls/ ceiling or in trench.
Take adequate care to ensure that cables are not damaged at bends. The radius of the bend of the cables when installed shall be sufficiently large to ensure that undue stress is not caused on the insulation. Seal end with bushes for cables passing through pipes. Similarly seal all opening in walls & ceilings in a manner approved by the architect. Provide 1100 V PVC sheath armoured copper cables for all power and control wiring min. 1.5 sq. mm.
Earthing shall be carried out with 10 G copper as per IS 3043- All the cabling & earthing is to be included on lumpsum basis & the same will not be measured.
PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS
Since activities of all the departments are closely interlinked; substantial
improvement in productivity and efficiency of the yard can be achieved by utilizing
benefits of Information Technology for seamless integration of activities of various
departments. This can be made possible by setting up Local Area Network of
computers, which would enable Online sharing of Information amongst various
departments. A dedicated Local Area Network connecting all users, based on high
bandwidth fiber optics backbone, is therefore considered essential.
Scope of Work: The scope of work involves supply, installation, testing and commissioning of
Local Area Network (Passive) at BANK OF INDIA BUILDING, ANDHERI covering the under
mentioned jobs: -
General
a) Project Management: This includes, network design, project planning
& scheduling, and project monitoring by periodic reviews.
b) Data connectivity between all the mentioned locations with future
expandability options of the Network.
c) Selection of correct brands.
d) Laying of cables and installation of all passive components.
e) Installation and commissioning of the Network as per design.
f) Proving connectivity through all redundant paths
g) Network Management.
Technical
a) The scope of work will cover the design, supply, delivery, installation and commissioning of
Local Area Network with Passive networking components (fiber optic backbone, Cat 6 Structured
cabling system).
b) The proposed system should be scalable for future upgrades to higher speed network operations
and the entire installation should adhere to the CAT6 standards following latest EIA/TIA
guidelines and specifications. The structured cable network should support CAT6 standard at 1000
Mbps speed.
c) The vendor should supply and install all associated components like stacking cables that may be
necessary to carry out the complete job as per the functional requirements specified in this tender.
d) The Vendor is required to quote only Laser Grade Fiber for delivering Gigabit Bandwidth across
backbone.
e) The vendor is required to produce test reports for all the cables (end to end) with cable signal
tester and has to be duly submitted to BANK OF INDIA BUILDING, ANDHERI on completion
of the installation.
f) Vendor is required to provide a detailed network installation document containing complete
information on the installed components, numbering scheme used, color codes etc. and trouble
shooting procedure for the network problems in future.
g) A detail site study has to be conducted by all vendors to assess the requirement.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Passive Components
It is to be ensured that high-end Gigabit Standard components are to be used to provide
end-to-end connectivity. Following factors are to be considered while quoting for
Passive:
(a) Gigabit speed and latest product line
(b) Laser Grade Fiber Optic Cables and components to support higher distances
on Gigabit for Multimode Fiber.
(c) Support for latest technology full Convergence
(d) Support for high bandwidth and future scalability
(e) Inter-Operate with all high-end technology
(f) 20 to 25 Years Warranty
(g) Good vendor support and infrastructure
(h) High investment stake in similar and other industries.
(j) Manufacturing site/distributors in India to control
(k) Proof of Concept and TCO / ROI into account.
Specifications for LAN Cabling Systems: The LAN cabling system that shall
accommodate BANK OF INDIA BUILDING, ANDHERI infrastructure requirements
in excess of ten years. Product specifications, general design considerations, and
installation guidelines are provided in this written document. Quantities of
telecommunications outlets, typical installation details, cable routing and outlet types
for the specific facility (facilities) also form part of this document. If the bid
documents are in conflict, the written specification shall take precedence. The
successful vendor shall meet or exceed all requirements for the cabling system HUB
Rm. deibed in this document.
The BANK OF INDIA BUILDING, ANDHERI cable infrastructure project
requires structured cabling system, or equivalent single-manufacturer solution. If all
requirements are complied with, a 20/25 -Year Performance Warranty should back the
cabling system. The performance warranty shall be facilitated by the Vendor and be
established between the OEM supplier and BANK OF INDIA BUILDING,
ANDHERI.
33.
34. Scope: This document defines the cabling system and subsystem components to include cable,
termination hardware, supporting hardware, and miscellaneous required to furnish, and to
install a complete cabling infrastructure supporting voice, data, and video. The intent of this
document is to provide pertinent information to allow the vendor to bid the labour, supervision,
tooling, materials, and miscellaneous mounting hardware and consumables to install a complete
system. However, it is the responsibility of the vendor to propose any, and, all items
required for a complete system whether or not it is identified in the specification,
drawings and bill of materials attached to this specification.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Contractor IBMS 3 of 32 Client
DESIGN PARAMETER
SERVER ROOM CONNECTIVITY-Internal Server Room Connectivity from Network rack to Server
Rack.
SUB-SYSTEM CONNECTIVITY – Connectivity from Central Communication Room (SERVER RM.) to
Telecommunication Outlet (TO) at work area side.
General:
Each subsystem, as stated previously, provides a specific function in the typical BANK
OF INDIA BUILDING, ANDHERI cable plant system. The campus subsystem provides
the interconnection between buildings. The vertical subsystem provides the
interconnection from OSP Rm. to SERVER RM. (Central Communication Room). The
horizontal subsystem provides the interconnection to the work area & the work area
subsystem provides the interconnection to the user/device (phone, terminal, pc, etc.).
Each subsystem consists of the transmission media (wire and cable), intermediate and
main cross connects, terminations, Racks, Rooms, conduit, tray, vaults and entrance
facilities.
In the past, it was typically not possible or economically justifiable to pre-install
subsystem wiring for the entire life of the telecommunications wiring system. The useful
life of a copper based system was expected to consist of one or more planning periods
which normally spans five to seven years. With today‟s rapid advancement toward
greater than 1000 Mbps network transmission speeds, fiber only network devices and
fiber only network interface cards (i.e. FDDI and ATM), serious consideration must be
given to the cost impact of extending the life of the wiring subsystem with fiber. The
actual length of the planning period should be based upon the application requirements,
stability, and growth of the customer organizations.
35. Topology:
The wiring system is an arrangement of components in an ordered structure, or the
„physical topology‟ of a network. There are three basic physical topologies commonly
used for communications on campuses and within buildings. They are the bus, ring, and
star (including hierarchical star). The bus and ring are most often used for data
applications, while the star topology can support both voice and data applications.
Depending on communication requirements, a complete transmission network may use
one, a variation of one, or a combination of topologies.
Additionally, one other term may used to HUB Rm. deibe topologies, “logical”.
“Logical” topology refers to how devices operate, or communicate with each other in the
network. This Design document does not address logical topology within it‟s scope.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Contractor IBMS 4 of 32 Client
However, when planning the physical cable plant, the logical topology of the network
should have been understood.
Star Topology:
The star topology provides point to point connections from one centrally (functionally)
located facility (point) to multiple remote devices. When drawn, the lines from the central
facility to the remote devices resemble the light rays from star, hence the name. The star
configuration is applicable to the individual units of transmission media, such as
individual fibers, twisted pairs or coaxial conductors. Depending on the physical
characteristics of a site and the facility architecture, transmission media units terminated
at different locations, may be part of the same cable over a portion of the distance, or may
use individual cables on the entire distance. Figure
Figure: Typical Star Topology
_________________________________________________________________________________
Contractor HVAC 5 of 32 Client
5)The hierarchical star topology is nothing more than the hierarchical connection of
multiple stars. It is highly flexible in meeting a variety of application requirements. The
hierarchical star is sometimes
referred to as the Universal Transport System because of its ability to be logically
configured into any non-star topology, through the use of active and passive components.
Figure : Hierarchical Star Topology
Accommodation of Non Star Topologies
The following topologies can be accommodated by using the star configurations in the
following methods.
Bus Topology
In a bus topology, all devices (rooms) are connected serially, one after the other. Figure 7
illustrates how a bus topology can be accommodated by the star wiring configuration.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Contractor IBMS 6 of 32 Client
Figure : Bus Topology
Ring Topology
Figure - Ring Topology
_________________________________________________________________________________
Contractor IBMS 7 of 32 Client
In a ring topology, all of the rooms, or devices, are connected in a circular fashion. There
is no physical break in the link between all locations. Figure 8 illustrates how a ring
topology can be accommodated by the star wiring configuration.
Recognized Media
The following media have been chosen due to the wide range of services they support:
1) Cat-6 UTP (unshielded twisted pair) cable
2) Optical fiber cable
Optical Fiber Cable may be either 62.5or 50/125 micron Multi-Mode graded
index, or Single Mode depending on the specific application.
These media are no longer recommended for new installations in general purpose
buildings nor for retrofit projects (except if required for specific applications),
they are therefore being moved to maintenance mode and are included in this
revision for the purposes of sustaining support only.
Each media type has individual characteristics which make it useful for specific
applications. A single types shall use the same facility architecture with the same
location for cross-connects, mechanical terminations cable type may not satisfy
all the user requirements of a site. When more than one type of cable is used, all,
inter-building entrance facilities, etc.
Cable Routing
General
This section covers general routing guidelines for copper and optical fiber both
within and between buildings. When planning the routing and support structure to
carry copper cable, care must be taken to avoid areas where sources of high levels
of EMI and RFI are present.
Optical fiber cable should be routed in UL approved inner-duct, or conduit. It
should be routed in separate conduit, and kept separate from UTP and other cables
in the cable trays whenever possible.
Building Components
Building cable pathways are the shafts, conduits, raceways, and floor penetrations
which provide routing space for cables. Building and electrical codes specify
safety and fire prevention standards which must be adhered to. Within a building,
the cabling system should be routed in conduit and/or overhead cable trays.
Reference EIA/TIA - 569 for detailed information on Horizontal and Work
Station (i.e. individual office or cubicle) Pathways and pull box specifications.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Contractor IBMS 8 of 32 Client
Outside Plant Components
There are three approved methods of distributing inter-building backbone cables: conduit,
direct burial and tunnel. The most appropriate method depends on the specific conditions
for each inter-building run.
Tunnels provide a flexible and inexpensive method of routing cable. If available, they
should be used for all inter-building cable distribution. Access to underground tunnels is
usually good and most tunnel systems provide adequate routing options. If cable is being
placed in a steam tunnel, special cable physical specifications may be required (heat and
steam resistant). Specific conditions should be discussed with the cable vendor.
Raceway Distribution is an underground system.
Raceway Designing
Sufficient conduits/ Raceway shall be installed in each room to handle the
communications cables required. The actual size and number of Raceway shall be
determined by a review of the cable requirements and growth. A minimum of 20% extra
space will have to be considered for maintenance purposes.
Bending radius shall conform to industry standard for telecommunications and the initial
fill rate of 4% and not to exceed 60% for any Raceway. The following are general
guidelines for Raceway capacity and bending radius:
Table: Raceway Capacity
Raceway Size (mm) Cable Size (amount)
38H X 100W 4 Pair Cat-6 (28 Nos.)
4 Pair Cat -5E (31 Nos.)
4 Pair Cat -5 (33 Nos.)
45H X 100W 4 Pair Cat-6 (33 Nos.)
4 Pair Cat -5E (36 Nos.)
4 Pair Cat -5 (38 Nos.)
_________________________________________________________________________________
Contractor IBMS 9 of 32 Client
Cable Trays:
Sufficient cable trays or ladder rack shall be installed in each room to handle the
communications cable required. The actual size and number of cable trays/ladder rack
shall be determined by a review of cable requirements and growth. Cable trays shall be of
a minimum width to accommodate at least 50% growth capacity and 4" deep and of a
ladder type. The cable tray sections shall be bonded to each other and grounded to the
same ground potential every 30. Cable trays should be installed at the same level
throughout the building, if possible, due to cable restrictions. Cable trays should be
divided for copper and fiber services when inner duct is not used. (Note: This is for fiber
within the communications room only; all other fiber shall be in inner duct.)
Cable Trays shall have a minimum of 12" clearance from any obstruction.
All cables installed in the cable tray shall be dressed and tied down in the same bundle
feeding each of the zones being supported. Cable tray bend radius shall meet the bend
radius.
Cable Tray Size (mm) Cable Tray Size (amount)
300W X 50H 4 Pair Cat-6 UTP (100Nos.)
4 Pair Cat-5e UTP (150Nos.)
4 Pair Cat-5 UTP (200Nos.)
HORIZONTAL CONNECTIVITY FOR DATA VOICE:
36. General:
The Horizontal Subsystem refers to all communication cables from SERVER RM. to the
TO. For data network applications, the horizontal system terminates at the point of
connection on the end node or user side of an active electronic equipment connection
such as a wiring concentrator.
37.
38. Distance Limitations:
As long as copper cables are in use, the maximum length of the horizontal subsystem
shall be 100-meters (330-feet). This is the cable length from the electronic media in the
HUB Rm. to the Station Equipment. In establishing maximum distance, an allowance for
the Work Area Subsystem of an additional 3 meters (10 feet) from the
Telecommunication Outlet to the Station Equipment must be made.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Contractor IBMS 10 of 32 Client
HUB Rm, s shall be located to meet the 100 meter limit of all locations requiring
communications services. This 100 meter requirement is defined as 90 (297 ft) meters
from patch panel to T/O, 7 meters in the HUB Rm. /SERVER RM. and 3 meters at the
work area. This 90 meter distance must consider all transitions up and down of the cable,
as well as total cable distance, not radius, from the T/.O to the HUB Rm. typically, the
cable will travel from floor to tray level, app. 10‟, at each end. This leaves app. 277‟ feet
available, from the center of the HUB Rm, to the farthest T/O, following the actual cable
path.
While large centralized HUB Rm, s are desirable from a maintenance standpoint, they are
only suitable for buildings whose service areas can be reached within these limits. This
limits the total area covered to app. 2,65, 000 sq. ft., or a total building footprint of about
2,69, 442 sq. ft. This assumes a SERVER RM and a minimum 2‟ corridor at the
perimeter walls. A second HUB RM. should be added if the 100 meter limit cannot be
adhered to. Service areas for two or more can be overlapped to provide redundant cable
paths for critical applications.
39. Media
The Horizontal subsystem shall be supported by UTP, or Optical Fiber (when
environmental and bandwidth requirements exceed UTP capabilities). When utilizing
UTP, a minimum of 4 Nos. of 4 Pair Cat-6 UTP shall be used. Due to the varying
applications supported by this system, emerging technology standards, and the
desirability of applications independence, it is required that the 3 no. of 4 Pair cable can
be split into 1 nos. X 4 pair cable, all Category 6. For example, 1000BaseT and proposed
Twisted Pair/ Physical Media Dependent (TP/PMD) specifications require 1 network
connection per 4 pair cable, to minimize the effect of cross talk. Use of multiple cables
will facilitate more efficient support of different technologies within the same.
To Note that:
Many users require four or more data network connections.
Handling and administration is easier if all cables are the same type.
All connecting and terminating hardware must be Category 6 to prevent inter-
connection of Category 6 services using Category 3 components.
40. End to End Rating:
All horizontal wiring components must meet or exceed Category 6 performance specifications as detailed
in ANSI/EIA/TIA-568A and ISO 11801. When specifications differ, the more stringent specification is to
be met. Additionally, the following performance specifications are to be met.
The installed link, at 90 meters, must provided the following headroom beyond the minimum specified in
the standard:
_________________________________________________________________________________
Contractor IBMS 11 of 32 Client
NeXT (near end cross talk) performance shall provide headroom of at least 8dB, typical, with all
four pairs active (power-sum) at both 100 MHz and 155 MHz.
ACR (Attenuation to Cross Talk Ratio) shall provide a separation, between NeXT and Attenuation
of at least 10dB, typical, at both 100 MHz and 155 MHz.
Applicable Documents: The cabling system HUB Rm. deibed in this specification is derived in part from
the recommendations made in industry standard documents. The list of documents below have bearing on
the desired cabling infrastructure are incorporated into this specification by reference:
a. This Technical Specification and Associated Drawings
b. ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-B Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard –
March 2001
c. ANSI/EIA/TIA-569-A Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways
and Spaces - February, 1998
d. ANSI/EIA/TIA-606 Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure
of Commercial Buildings - February, 1993
e. ANSI/TIA/EIA-607 Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for
Telecommunications - August, 1994
If a conflict exists between applicable documents, then the order in the list above shall
dictate the order of precedence in resolving conflicts. If this document and any of the
documents listed above are in conflict, then the more stringent requirement shall apply.
All documents listed are believed to be the most current releases of the documents, the
vendor is responsible to determine and adhere to the most recent release when
developing the proposal for installation.
All user outlets will be identically wired with UTP Cabling system conforming to
Category 6 UTP Cabling system TIA / EIA 568-B.1 standards. The UTP Cabling
system shall confirm to the full Category 6 Cabling system. Cabling systems
confirming only to draft versions of Category 6 standards are not acceptable. Each user
outlet shall be provided with one data circuit via one Category 6 cable to the outlet. The
horizontal cable shall be terminated on modular jack panels, placed in wall mounted /
floor mounted racks provided with lock-able doors. Factory-crimped workstation and
equipment cords shall be provided.
The inter-building backbones shall be installed with outdoor, gel-filled, loose tube,
optical fiber cables, fiber type and count as HUB Rm. deibed above. All fiber
terminations shall be carried out with SC-Style Connectors, color-coded as per TIA /
EIA standards for SM and MM fibers. All terminations shall be placed on rack-mount
fiber optic enclosures capable of terminating OSP rated cables.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Contractor IBMS 12 of 32 Client
Type Unshielded twisted pair cabling system, TIA / EIA 568-B.1 addendum
Category 6 Cabling system
Networks Supported 10 / 100 Ethernet, 155 Mbps ATM, 1000 Mbps IEEE 802.3ab Ethernet, and
proposed Cat 6 Gigabit Ethernet
Cabling System and Component Specifications
Cable
Type
Unshielded Twisted Pair, Category 6, TIA / EIA 568-B.2
Material:
Conductors 24 AWG solid bare copper
Insulation Polyethylene
Jacket Flame Retardant PVC
Approvals UL Listed
ETL verified to TIA / EIA Cat 6
Operating
temperature
-20 Deg. C to +60 Deg. C
Frequency tested up
to
Minimum 300 MHz
Packing Box of 305 meters
Delay Skew 25ns / 100m MAX.
Impedance 100 Ohms + / - 15 ohms
Performance
characteristics to be
provided along with
bid
Attenuation, Pair-to-pair and PS NEXT, ELFEXT and PSELFEXT, Return
Loss, ACR and PS ACR
_________________________________________________________________________________
Contractor IBMS 13 of 32 Client
UTP Jacks
Type PCB based, Unshielded Twisted Pair, Category 6, TIA / EIA 568-B.2
Approvals UL
TIA / EIA 568-B.1 ETL Verified
IEEE 802.3ab Zero-bit Error, ETL verified
Warranty 25-year systems warranty; Warranty to cover Bandwidth of the specified and
installed cabling system, and the installation costs
Performance
characteristics to be
provided along with
bid
Attenuation, Pair-to-pair and PS NEXT, ELFEXT and PSELFEXT, Return
Loss, ACR and PS ACR for 4-connector channel
Durability
Modular Jack 750 mating cycles
Wire terminal 200 termination cycles
accessories Strain relief and bend-limiting boot for cable
Integrated hinged dust cover
Materials
Housing Polyphenylene oxide, 94V-0 rated
Wiring blocks Polycarbonate, 94V-0 rated
Jack contacts Phosphorous bronze, plated with 1.27micro-meter thick gold
Approvals UL listed
Performance
Characteristics to be
provided with bid
Attenuation, NEXT, PS NEXT, FEXT and Return Loss
UTP Jack Panels
Type 24-port, Modular, PCB based, Unshielded twisted pair, Category 6, TIA / EIA 568-
B.2
Ports 24
Port arrangement 1-port each
Category Category 6
Circuit Identification
Scheme
Icons on each of 24-ports
Port Identification 9mm or 12mm Labels on each of 24-ports (to be included in supply)
Height 1U (1.75 inches)
Durability
Modular Jack 750 mating cycles
Wire terminal (110 block) 200 termination cycles
Accessories Strain relief and bend limiting boot for cable
Materials
Housing Polyphenylene oxide, 94V-0 rated
Wiring blocks Polycarbonate, 94V-0 rated
Jack contacts Phosphorous bronze, plated with 1.27micro-meter thick gold
Panel Black, powder coated steel
Approvals UL listed
Termination Pattern TIA / EIA 568 A and B;
Performance
Characteristics to be
provided along with bid
Attenuation, NEXT, PS NEXT, FEXT and Return Loss
_________________________________________________________________________________
Contractor IBMS 14 of 32 Client
Faceplates
Type 1/2/4-port, White surface box
Material ABS / UL 94 V-0
No. of ports One/Two/Four
Workstation / Equipment Cords
Type Unshielded Twisted Pair, Category 6, TIA / EIA 568-B.2
Conductor 24 AWG 7 / 32, stranded copper
Length 7-feet
Plug Protection
Warranty 20/25-year component warranty
Category Category 6
Plug
Housing Clear polycarbonate
Terminals Phosphor Bronze, 50 micron gold plating over selected area and gold flash
over remainder, over 100 micron nickel under plate
Load bar PBT polyester
Jacket PVC
Insulation Flame Retardant Polyethylene
Specifications for Fiber Optic Cabling Systems
Fiber optic Cable
Cable Type 6-core, Multimode, Laser Grade, Armored, Indoor
Fiber type 50 / 125, Laser Grade, 250 micron primary coated buffers
No. of cores 6
Cable Construction
Attenuation
@850nm 2.5 dB / KM
@1300nm 0.7 dB / KM
Bandwidth
@850nm 600 MHz-KM
@1300nm 1200 MHz-KM
Network Support
10 / 100 Ethernet 2000m
155 Mbps ATM 2000m
1000 Base SX 650m
1000 Base Lx 2000m
Tensile rating 1200N
Maximum Crush
resistance
3000N
Operating Temperature -40 Degree C to +60 Degree C
Armor Corrugated Steel tape Armor
_________________________________________________________________________________
Contractor IBMS 15 of 32 Client
Fiber Optic Connectors
Connector Type SC-Style, Simplex
Operating temperature -40 Degree C to +85 Degree C
Durability & color
MM connectors 500 cycles, Beige
SM connectors 220 cycles, Blue
Ferrules Pre-radiuses SERVER RM.Namaric Ferrules
Attenuation Not more than 0.75 dB per mated pair
Fiber Optic Patch panels
Fiber optic patch panel 19-inch, Rack mounted Fiber optic patch panel
Height 1U, 1.75 inches
# of fibers 6, 12, 24 or 48
# of OSP Cables for termination Minimum 2
Grounding 2 Nos. of earthing lugs, pre-loaded
Cable Management rings Front and rear cable management rings, pre-loaded
# of 6-port / 12-port adapter
plates
4 / 4 Max.
FIBER OPTIC ADAPTER PLATES
Fiber Optic adapter plate 6-port, SC-Style, SM & MM
Attenuation Max of 0.75 dB per mated pair
_________________________________________________________________________________
Contractor IBMS 16 of 32 Client
CABLING INSTALLATION SPECIFICATION:
1) UTP/STP CABLE :
a) The Horizontal UTP cables shall be routed through the under-floor trunking system to the work
area furniture locations and through ceiling for Third floor brought up through a junction box in to
the wire managers of the modular furniture system. The cables shall be routed up through the
furniture and terminated at the work/Desk area outlet, fitted with a flush faceplate above the desk
level.
b) Each run of cable between the termination block and the information outlet shall be continuous
without any joints or splices. Proper planning and care shall be taken to avoid parallel runs of
power /UPS cables in the work area, not to enter the modular furniture along the same riser of
power cable, to route away from fluorescent light ballasts and high-intensity discharge devices and
sources of high levels of EMI and RF power and equipment, such as transformers, UPS and not to
share the same conduit, channel or sleeve with electrical apparatus.
c) Contractor shall observe the bending radius and pulling strength requirements of the 4-pair UTP
cable during handling and installation. The vendor shall ensure that the maximum pulling tensions
of the specified distribution cables are not exceeded at any time during the placement of the
facilities. Failure to follow the appropriate guidelines may require the vendor to provide the
additional material and installation necessary to properly rectify the situation. This shall also apply
to any and all damages to cables during the implementation.
d) The cables should not be exposed at any location along the run from the HUB Rm, s to the TOs.
The cables should not be too tightened with cable ties to affect the electrical characteristics &
transmission performance.
e) Fiber optic cable shall be protected from physical damage by means of inner duct. Installed fiber
cable shall be protected from future installation sharing the same conduit or raceway. Inner duct
shall be orange colored unless otherwise noted. Care shall be taken to ensure bending radius is
maintained and pulling tension is not exceeded while installing fiber cables.
f) The cables shall be dressed and neatly organized in the trays and at the Patch Panel location, using
Velcro ties and arranged properly prior to termination. The cables shall be clearly marked at the
outlet end as well as the Patch Panel end using self laminated cable markers, few centimeters away
from the termination point to enable easy identification and trouble shooting during maintenance
of the Network.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Contractor IBMS 17 of 32 Client
2) TERMINATION:
a) RJ45 Jack Panels mounted on the closed Racks in the Communication room shall be used for
termination of all UTP circuits in the TOs. The cables shall be terminated in these Panels in order
of sequence as per numbering.
b) Fiber Cables shall be terminated using SC field terminable connectors with pins and fitted to
bulkheads in the Rack Mount Fiber Panel.
c) The termination, including the data outlets and the Horizontal UTP at the Patch Panels shall be
carried out as per TIA/EIA standards and MANUFACTURER recommendations. All UTP
terminations, including outlets and patch panels shall be carried out by SERVER RM. certified
technicians only. Proper care shall be taken to keep the PVC jacket as close to the termination
point as possible and to avoid untwisting of individual pairs for more than 13mm and to maintain
the overall twisting of pairs.
d) Terminated outlets shall be covered till the time of commissioning protecting the same from
external dust particles that tend to hamper the pin contacts.
e) All Fiber terminations shall be carried out using appropriate tools by manufacturer SERVER
RM.certified technicians only.
f) Fiber terminations shall be started only after as SERVER RM. training that all civil related work
has been completed in the equipment rooms and the place is dust free.
g) Fiber cores once terminated shall be fitted on to bulkheads in the patch panels and protected with
dust covers. Terminated fibers shall never be left unprotected.
h) All safety precautions shall be taken while handling fiber cable, components and termination tool,
so as not to cause damage to personnel and property.
3) ACCESSORIES:
a) The Contractor shall provide any necessary HUB Rm. anchors, clamps, tie wraps, distribution
rings, miscellaneous grounding and support hardware, etc., necessary to facilitate the installation
of the distribution system.
b) The contractor shall be responsible for grounding at all installed distribution frames and protector
locations ensuring proper bonding to any existing facilities. The contractor shall also be
responsible for ensuring ground continuity by properly bonding all appropriate cabling, closures,
cabinets, service boxes and framework. Provision for grounding shall be provided in the server &
hub rooms by BANK OF INDIA BUILDING, ANDHERI approved Contractor.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Contractor IBMS 18 of 32 Client
c) Fire stop devices shall be used where cables pass through fire barriers. When the cable tray
penetrates a firewall, the opening shall be sealed after the cables are laid in place. Detailed
information on fire stopping is included in the BiCSi Manual, Section 8 and ANSI/TIA/EIA-569.
d) Bonding and grounding of all horizontal pathways shall comply with electrical codes.
4) PATCHING & ORGANIZATION:
a) Contractor shall provide fiber jumpers and UTP Patch cords for data circuit patching at the
SERVER RM. & HUB Rm.‟s. The cross connect patch cord shall be installed according to BANK
OF INDIA BUILDING, ANDHERI cross connect schedule. All patch cable must be kept tidy and
tied with “Velcro”. Contractor is responsible to install a minimum of one patch cord for data
connection per work station. All patch cords need to be factory terminated and tested, and no field
termination is allowed.
b) Patch Cord Organizers shall be provided for routing of patch cables between the resource and
distribution side of the panels as well as for the active equipment.
c) Cord organizers shall be of open type. Patch cords shall not be bundled using cable ties. Only
Velcro ties shall be used to bundle each set of 12 patch cords.
d) Patch cord layout shall be designed such that there is NO more than 6-inch (150 mm) slack at
either end.
FIBRE OPTIC CABLING
a) Backbone cables shall be installed separately from horizontal distribution cables.
b) Where cables are housed in conduits, the backbone and horizontal cables shall be installed in
separate conduits or in separate inner ducts within conduits.
c) Where backbone cables and distribution cables are installed in a cable tray or wire way,
backbone cables shall be installed first and bundled separately from the horizontal distribution
cables.
d) Fiber slack shall be neatly coiled within the fiber termination panel. No slack loops shall be
allowed external to the fiber panel(s).
e) Each cable shall be individually attached to the respective termination panel by mechanical means.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Contractor IBMS 19 of 32 Client
f) The cables strength member(s) shall be securely attached with the cable strain relief bracket in the
panel.
g) Each fiber cable shall be stripped upon entering the termination panel and the individual fibers
routed in the termination panel.
h) Each cable shall be clearly labeled at the entrance to the termination panel. Cables labeled within
the bundle shall not be acceptable.
i) Dust caps shall be installed on the connectors and couplings at all times unless physically
connected.
j) Wherever multiple core cables are terminated, the cables shall be properly glanded off, the
armoring, if any, properly earthed and the cable sheath carefully stripped back. Each core shall be
properly identified by cable markers agreeing with the numbers on the terminal and drawings.
k) All cables shall be delivered on robust cable drums with cable ends treated to form an effective
seal. When a cable is cut from a drum, the cable left on the drum shall immediately be sealed off
to prevent the ingress of moisture.
l) In all cases where the cable is to be buried in the ground, the work of trenching, backfilling, laying
of protective tiles will be carried out as per existing DOT//Equivalent IS specification as
applicable.
m) All buried cables shall be suitably tagged with colored polythene tapes 150 mm wide buried at a
depth of 150 mm giving identification of cable type by color and legend.
n) Each cable run in open ground shall be marked approximately every 100 Mts. along the cable run
with an additional marker at each change of direction. The concrete used for all cable markers and
posts will be of grade 20.
o) The cables shall be properly spaced from power and telephone cables.
p) Where cable passes through cable holes and ducts etc, they shall be sealed at all points to prevent
vermin and water access to other parts of the installation.
q) Cables shall be of approved manufacture and shall be delivered to site with the makers seals intact
and bearing the makers original guarantee. Seals shall be retained for inspection and record in case
of later faults. Short lengths of cable may be delivered out of seals provided approval is obtained
beforehand. Unless agreed upon the cables shall have been manufactured not more than 18
Months before delivery at site and the date of manufacture will be indicated on all consignments.
The permission of the inspector shall be obtained prior to installation of any cable or removal of
wrappings. Manufacturers test certificate shall be submitted for all cables.
r) Cables shall not be installed with a bend radius less than that laid down by the cable manufacturer.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Contractor IBMS 20 of 32 Client
s) Outdoor metallic structures where erected shall confirm to “BS 5493”/Equivalent IS specification
for the “Protection of Iron and Steel Structures from Corrosion”
t) Galvanizing shall be to a hot dip process in accordance with BS 729/Equivalent IS specification.
Galvanized work shall be etch primed before painting.
LABELING:
a) The Contractor shall carryout labeling of the entire cabling system as per ANSI / TIA/ EIA – 606
referred above.
b) The labeling scheme for racks, cables, patch cords, outlets etc. shall be proposed by the Contractor
and approved by BANK OF INDIA BUILDING, ANDHERI & Elmark to installation.
c) All labeling shall be carried out prior to final testing of the installed system, to avoid any
mismatch in labeling.
d) Labels should be computer generated/printed. No Handwritten labels and markings with sketch
pens or permanent markers are permitted to be used.
e) The cables shall be labeled at either end using self laminated cable markers approved by
Consultant. The labels for the faceplates and patch panels shall also be laser printed and approved
by Consultant prior to installation.
f) The labels shall clearly indicate unique port and faceplate number for all TOs. The numbering
schema shall include HUB Rm. and floor details the TO is served from.
g) The backbone fiber and voice cables shall be labeled for the destination of the cable at either end.
All Racks, Panels and Accessories shall be labeled for ease of identification and troubleshooting.
The termination fields shall be labeled using proper color coded labels to indicate horizontal,
vertical, resource & system fields.
h) All patch cords shall be labeled at either end using self-laminated wrap around labels. These shall
be field printable using portable equipment, if required.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Contractor IBMS 21 of 32 Client
i) The fiber links shall also be clearly identified for destinations at either end on the cable and on the
fiber front panel. The fiber cores shall be labeled in pairs as A & B for maintenance of transmit
(tx) and receive (rx) polarity
j) Contractor shall provide sample of the labels that he proposes to use for the various areas in the
project as part of the bid document.
TESTING:
a) After installation, Contractor shall carry out approved method of cable testing to verify operational
integrity of the horizontal connection from station cable to the network equipment as per
Consultant & Customer Wiring Infrastructure standards.
b) All the installed UTP links shall be tested using test equipment such as FLUKE DSP4000 or Omni
Scanner 350 for conformation of channel performance per CAT 6 standards. The test equipment
shall have a valid calibration certificate and shall perform testing to Level III accuracy as per TSB
amendments. The Headroom available as installed, based on worst case NEXT or ACR, shall also
be made available as part of the results.
c) The entire implementation shall focus on the performance of the channel as a whole system. The
installed system shall meet or exceed guaranteed channel performance values as below:
d) 100% of all installed UTP links shall be tested for compliance. All test result must be audited by
cabling manufacturer, AE and to be submitted to Customer at the completion of work.
e) All voice backbone cable pairs between SERVER RM. and HUB Rm, s. shall be tested for pair
continuity and polarity using continuity tester.
f) All voice resource circuitry shall also be tested from the PBX-TJF by the telecom vendor and
provided for onward cross connection at the SERVER RM. and HUB Rm,s.
g) All installed fiber links shall be tested using Power Meter testing at 850nm and 1300nm for MMF.
h) The power meter shall have valid calibration certificate with factory made reference patch cords,
with the required connectors. No adapters or converters shall be permitted in the circuitry for
power budget measurements, either during reference or test measurement. 50 micron fiber patch
cords shall be used for reference and for test measurements when testing 50 micron fiber.
i) Two-way Power Meter testing shall be carried out on all fiber cores, with the source and the meter
being swapped between the ends of the fiber. The bi-directional as well as the average loss shall be
reported in the documentation.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Contractor IBMS 22 of 32 Client
j) Power Meter that can record and directly print or that provides PC downloadable test result format
shall be used.
k) The test reports shall comply with power budget calculations computed using cable length, type
and number of connectors as per standard references.
l) Fiber cores found to have attenuation above the limits specified shall be tested using OTDR and
the profiles analyzed for faults.
m) All faults shall be rectified at the cost of the contractor, including replacement of
cables/connectors.
n) Copies of all test reports (CAT 6 for UTP, wire map and length for multi-pair, power meter/OTDR
for fiber) shall be provided as per documentation requirements.
o) Customer / Consultant reserves the right to request random testing of UTP and Fiber links already
tested by Contractor for cross verification. Contractor shall provide necessary test equipment and
manpower required for such testing at no additional cost.
p) If more than 10% of the random tests are found erroneous, Costumer Project Manager shall order
for re-testing of 100% of the installed links all over again, at no additional cost.
q) Any faults/mismatches shall be rectified at the cost of Contractor for installation and material and
testing carried out again and reports submitted.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Contractor IBMS 23 of 32 Client
OUTDOOR IT SERVICES
1) Outdoor Duct Bank:
a) The Outdoor IT duct system consists of provisioning the Service provider links to the Campus
from outside and to service the security gates and future buildings in the Campus from the
SERVER RM. all related work pertaining to outdoor ducting system is under the scope of civil
contractor at site.
b) However, IT cabling system contractor shall ensure that the communication duct bank and
manholes are installed as per BiCSi Customer-Owned outside Plant Manual with applicable
federal, state and local codes.
c) The underground system shall provide isolation from power systems, heat and magnetic sources
and have protection from moisture, mechanical damage, corrosion, and flame.
d) The duct bank system shall accommodate primary and secondary data carriers and voice carriers.
The primary data and voice carrier access and the secondary data and voice carrier access to the
SERVER RM. shall be via separate duct banks. Growth capacity for both shall be 100%. Routing
may be shared with the site duct bank provided the capacity is maintained from end to end,
without sharing individual conduits with intra-site services.
e) Maintenance holes shall be sized and equipped to provide for safe installation and efficient use.
2) CABLING RELATED COORDINATION:
a) Contractor shall provide recessed information outlets, at a height of 4feet from finished floor level
for wall phones. The phone instrument shall be mounted so as to hide the wall socket and
provision shall be made for storing the cord behind the instrument.
b) Contractor shall carry out the necessary coordination for routing of regular and conferencing
phone system cabling within the conference room furniture and making them functional.
c) Contractor is responsible for equipment acceptance at site from Customer and mounting of all
LAN/WAN related equipment as per Customer guidance. However, configuration of the
LAN/WAN equipment shall be carried out by Customer.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Contractor IBMS 24 of 32 Client
DOCUMENTATION
1) SUBMISSIONS:
a) Contractor shall submit final documentation drawings upon completion of work. These drawings
shall be “as-built drawings” and shall reflect details “as installed” at the time of commissioning
and handover.
b) On completion of the implementation, the vendor shall provide three sets of hardcopy and soft
copy (in CD format), of all drawings as per drawing list provided with the RFP.
c) In addition, Contractor shall provide Numbering and Cross-connect details (MS-Excel
spreadsheet), Patching and Port Connectivity details (MS-Excel spread sheet), UTP/STP test
reports (in the format provided by the test equipment software) and any other drawings and details
that is required for successful sustaining of the installed system.
d) Floor layouts (A1) covered by respective HUB Rm,s shall be laminated on hard board and affixed
to the walls of the HUB Rm,s for reference during sustaining.
e) Schematic connectivity layouts indicating backbone connections of data and voice shall be
laminated and affixed in the SERVER RM.
f) Documentation shall also include random test reports, Test Plan Snag list and rectification details
and final testing of the same for future reference.
g) Documentation shall include as installed details, drawings in hard and soft copy (AutoCAD), rack
elevations, schematics, system design, manuals and all relevant manufacturer contacts and
escalation paths.
h) Details of contact sheet for local office, copy of warranty/sign-off sheet for the Project shall also
be submitted at the time of handing over.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Contractor IBMS 25 of 32 Client
2) ACCEPTANCE:
ACCEPTANCE REQUIREMENTS.
Customer shall accept the IT systems from Contractor when the following requirements have been
met.
All the systems have been successfully completed and all testing requirements have been fulfilled.
All punch list items corrected and accepted.
All submittals, documentation submitted and approved
All training conducted to the authorized site IT operation staffs.
All Warranty and Performance Guarantee certification completed.
3) WARRANTY & SUPPORT:
GENERAL WARRANTY
All products shall be covered by a comprehensive warranty as mentioned in the contract
documents from the date of handing over to Customer for material and workmanship.
4) CABLING SYSTEM WARRANTY:
1) The installed cabling system shall be inspected by the manufacturer representative during the
implementation and after completion and approved for quality of implementation. Any defects
identified shall be corrected at no additional cost to Customer. The cabling system shall be
supported with a registered Product and Application Assurance Warranty from the manufacturer
for a period of minimum of 15 years or as per manufacturer terms, whichever is more.
5) SUPPORT:
Contractor shall furnish the following information as part of their bid Submission:
a) Local support infrastructure for maintenance support of the system during warranty and post-
warranty.
b) 24-hr call back/ on-line support during warranty and post warranty.
c) On-site support service for the system.
d) List of spares / items that will be kept on site during warranty by the contractor for uptime of the
system/service along with unit rates for the same.
e) List of recommended critical spares and unit cost for post-warranty period.
Comprehensive warranty option for the System.
Availability of BANK OF INDIA BUILDING, ANDHERI with terms and conditions of
service.
Methodology for calculating potential buy back/ upgrade /
exchange options, if any for the future.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Contractor IBMS 26 of 32 Client
All the above information shall be provided on a separate
attachment as part of the bid submission
Terms and Conditions for Structured Cabling.
Active Components: The Central core Switch will be located at the proposed of the Distributed/Access
Switches shall be connected to Core Switches on Gigabit fiber optic.
Cable length Estimation and permissible difference: Vendors are required to estimate various cable
and pipe/cap-on length. On successfully installing the components for structured cabling system, the
actual lengths will be measured. The ND (MB) will allow only up to 10% difference on the higher side
between the estimated lengths and actual (consumed) length. Therefore it is in vendor‟s interest to
correctly and precisely estimate the lengths.
Structured Cabling system Design: The Open cabling system should have a sub-system approach and
will consist of some or all of the following sub-systems.
a) Work area sub-system
b) Horizontal Sub-system
c) Server room sub-system d) Backbone subsystem (vertical) to connect equipment on different floors together.
The system proposed should conform to the following:
a) The latest EIA/TIA commercial building telecommunication cabling standards.
b) Cable used should be UTP with minimum Category-6 specifications c) All cords (patch cords or any other data cables) will be as per EIA/TIA standards of CAT6.
Work Area Sub-system: Vendor shall provide the cord (cable) to connect the Personal computers to the
Information Outlets in conformance with EIA/TIA Standards for CAT6 performance. These cords will be
supplied in required lengths and will have strain relief boots.
Horizontal System: The vendor should provide the horizontal cables adhering to minimum of Category
6 performance. The Information Outlets required for some locations will be Surface mount type for
single connection and will be located wall/partition.
Server Room Subsystem (from Jack Panel to active devices): Vendor shall provide the necessary
cables to connect the Jack Panel (wherever necessary and applicable) to the active devices conforming to
EIA/TIA Standards for CAT6 performance. These cords will be supplied in required lengths and should
have strain relief boots.
Backbone Sub system: The Backbone cabling system will follow Star topology.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Contractor IBMS 27 of 32 Client
Cable management and Labeling System: The vendor should provide a cable management system
(Cable Managers) where active network components are installed for easy management of the network
cables. All the cables must be ferruled at both the ends & the vendor will do the labeling as per the latest
EIA/TIA standards. All the Information Outlets and the Panels will have labels/identification conforming
to the latest EIA/TIA labeling scheme. Detailed information of the proposed Labeling scheme should be
included in the offer.
Structured Cabling Warranty with certification: Vendor is required to provide
Warranty from the original Structured Cabling System Company for passive
products and the performance of the network for a minimum period of 20/25
years. certification for 20/25 years should include at least the following:
a) Performance warranty
b) Link and Channel Warranty
c) Application Assurance
While the can wait for up to 6 months for certification from the manufacturer of structured cabling
components, an interim, detailed certification from the vendor doing the structured cabling should be
submitted to the without any delay. The manufacturer‟s certification should be submitted within a period
of six months from the date of acceptance of all equipment. A certificate from the system integrator (that
is, the vendor himself) in lieu of original certificate from structured cabling system company is not
acceptable.
_________________________________________________________________________________
Contractor IBMS 28 of 32 Client
NETWORK RACKS–
Network Racks
1
9U (600W X 600D) MM Closed wall Mount Rack with 3
Nos.1U Horizontal wire Manager (One Way), 1 Nos. Horizontal
Power Strip with Standard Accessories, Hardware to mount the
Passive & Active Equipment (Pkt of 100)
_________________________________________________________________________________
Contractor IBMS 29 of 32 Client
APPROVED MAKES OF MATERIAL
Structured Cabl ing System : Systimax, Amp, Clipsa l
Network Racks : WQ ; Valrack ; APW
APPROVED VENDERS
1 . ) Net logic Systems Ind ia Pvt . Ltd.
No. 53/2474 , Ground floor , Radheshyam
C.H.S.L. Gandhi Nagar ,Opp. MIG Club
2
21U(600W X 600D)MM Floor Mount Closed Rack with front
Glass door, Fan tray on top, Perforforated Rear Doors, Casters,
Openable entry at the Bottom for the cable, Cable basket for
cable dressing, 5 Nos. 1U Horizontal wire Manager (One Way),
1 Nos. Vertical Power Strip with Standard Accessories &
Hardware to mount the Passive & Active Equipment (Pkt of
100)
3
42U (800W X 800D)MM Floor Mount Closed Rack with front
Glass door, Vertical wire Management Systems, Fan tray on
top, Perforforated Rear Doors, Casters, Openable entry at the
Bottom for the cable, 5 Nos. 1U Horizontal wire Manager (One
Way), 2 Nos. Vertical Power Strip with Standard Accessories
& Hardware to mount the Passive & Active Equipment (Pkt of
100)
4
42U(600W X 1000D)MM Floor Mount Closed Rack with front
Glass door, Fan tray on top, Perforforated Rear Doors,
Keyboard tray with shelf, casters, Openable entry at the Bottom
for the cable, 2 Nos. 1U Horizontal wire Manager (One Way),
Heavy shelf with sliding Keyboard Tray, Catilever shelf, 2 Nos.
Vertical Power Strip with Standard Accessories & Hardware
to mount the Passive & Active Equipment (Pkt of 100)
Bandra (E) , Mumbai -51.
Phone : 022 -6521 2565 / 66
Fax : 022 -2645 9905
2.) TechTeam Technologies Pvt Ltd
Office No.3, Jay-Abhilasha, Jayraj Nagar,
Borivali (West), Mumbai - 400 091
T : +91-022-28338580
F : +91-022-28338589
3.) Infonet Network Systems Pvt. Ltd. A/31,
Nand Dham Industrial Eastet, Marol Maroshi Road,
Andheri (E), Mumbai -59
Phone : 022 - 66027900
Fax : 022 - 66758844
_________________________________________________________________________________
Contractor IBMS 30 of 32 Client
DEVIATIONS FROM GENERALCONDITIONS OF CONTRACT
All devia t ions fro m general condi t ion of contrac t sha ll be f i l led in hereby the
bidder .
SECTION CLAUSE NO. DEVIATION
The bidder hereby cer t i ficates that the above mentioned are only devia t ions from
genera l condit ions o f cont rac t o f enquiry.
DATE Signature And Seal o f Bidder
DEVIATIONS FROM TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
All deviat ions from spec i ficat ion shal l be fi l led in hereby the b idder .
SECTION CLAUSE NO. DEVIATION SPEC. NO.
The bidder hereby cer t i f ica tes that the above mentioned are only deviat ions from
technica l spec i fica t ions of this enquiry.
DATE Signature And Seal o f Bidder
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
Contractor
LIST OF APPROVED MAKES /BRAND OF VARIOUS BUILDING MATERIALS
Unless otherwise mentioned specifically, any one of the following approved
makes or brands shall be allowed to use. Other makes or brands of the building materials
bearing I.S.I. manogram on the material itself will also be allowed to be used.
The Contractors should distinctly understand that it will not be their prerogrative
to insist on using a particular make/brand from the following list. The final selection will
have to be done with the approval of the Architects.
S.NO. MATERIALS APPROVED BRAND
1. Marble Mosaic and other „NIMCO‟, „NITCO‟, „RAWAL‟,
cement tiles (Light) terrazo „BHARATI‟, TILES.
(White or Green Cemenet)
2. A. Glazed Tiles
(a) Whiteglazed tiles „JOHNSON‟, „KAJARIA‟,
„SOMANI‟, „NAVIN‟.
(b) Coloured tiles -----------Do--------------
(c) Printed tiles -----------Do--------------
(d) Ceramic tiles „BELL‟, „KAJARIA‟,
„REGENCY‟, JOHNSON, NITCO
COTTO, SOMANY.
B. Vitrified Tiles NITCO, KAJARIA, ASAIN
3. Floor Hardners „BESTONATE‟, „HARDONATE‟,
„IRONITE‟.
4. Water Proofing Compounds „IMPERMO‟, „ACCOPROOF‟,
„SUPERSEAL‟.
5. Flush Doors Shutters „ANCHOR (Solid Core) Mysore
Board, „BHUTAN‟. KALPATARU.
6. A.C.Sheets „EVEREST‟/CHARMINAR.
7. White Cement A.C.C. (Silvicrete) Birla White
„AMBUJA‟, „J.K.‟.
8. Steel Windows & Doors „GODREJ‟, „BONDRITE PROCESS
S.NO. MATERIALS APPROVED BRAND
9. Rolling Shutters, Rolling grills „SWASTIK‟, „HERCULES‟.
Sliding & folding grill doors.
10. F.R.P. Door. „ADVANCE MARKETING‟.
11. Door Closers „EVERITE‟, „TANILSONS‟,
„FALCON‟.
12. C.I.Rainwater soil and „T.D.SULEKHA‟,
„NAREALWALA
waste water pipes and „P.M.PVT. LTD.‟.
fittings.
13. S.W.Pipes „NAVROJI VAKIL‟,
„KHANAPURA‟, „CASHIMIRA‟,
„BURN & CO.‟, BHARAT.
14. R.C.C. Pipes Indian Hume Pipe Co. Premier.,
Pranali Hume Pipe Industries ( P )
Ltd, Shreeji Pipe Industries.
15. Water Pipes and fittings As per I.S.I. standards wherever
(C-Class) available otherwise as per -
Hydraulic Engineer‟s requirement.
16. Building Hardware „SHALIMAR (I.S.I. Mark)‟, „CIEF‟.
17. Oil paints, Distempers and
other paint materials (1st
quality brand of - one of the
following makes)
„A‟ Plastic Emulsions & „ASIAN‟, „JENSON‟, GOODLASS‟
Synthetic Enamels „NEROLAC‟, „GARWARE‟,
„NICHOLSON‟.
„B‟ Dry Distemper „JENSON‟, „NICHOLSON‟,
„GARWARE‟, „SHALIMAR‟/
„C‟ Oil Bound Distemper „ASIAN‟, „JENSON-NICHOLSON‟,
„NOBLE‟.
S.NO. MATERIALS APPROVED BRAND
„D‟ Water Proof Cement Paint „SAND-TEXMATT‟
2 Coats cement paint + 1 coat COLOURCEM SUPEREME ,
sand texure. SNOWCEM PLUS, NEROCEM.
.
„E‟ Wood Primer „ASIAN‟, „JENSON-NICHOLSON‟,
„GOODLASS NEROLAC‟.
„F‟ Metal Redoxide Primer „ASIAN‟, „JENSON-NICHOLSON‟,
„GOODLASS NEROLAC‟.
„G‟ Aluminium Paints „ASIAN‟, „JENSON-NICHOLSON‟,
„H‟ Anti-Corrosive Bitumenous „ASIAN‟, „JENSON-NICHOLSON‟,
Paints.
„I‟ Wood Preservatives „SHALIMAR‟, „GARWARE‟.
„K‟ Water Proofing INDIA WATER PROOFING,
LEAK
PROOF INDIA LTD., OVERSEAS
WATER PROOFING.
18. W.C. Pans „HINDUSTAN‟, „PARSHURAM‟,
„PARRYWARE‟ & „NEYCER‟.
19. Other Sanitary ware like „HINDUSTAN‟, „PARSHURAM‟,
wash basins, sinks and urinals „PARRYWARE‟ & „NEYCER‟.
(White or coloured foot
Operated if required)
20. Soil Treatment Agencies „PEST CONTROL INDIA PVT.
LTD., „BEE „N‟ PAST CHECK‟.
21. Plastic Cover Blocks M/S. ABYANKAR & CO.
22. Aluminium Doors & Windows M/S. JUPITAR, M/S. AJIT INDIA
PVT. LTD., M/S. CRYSTAL
CORPORATION, M/S. LEO
ALUMINIUM.
23. Decorative Texture M/S. TERRACO.
S.NO. MATERIALS APPROVED BRAND
24. Structural Glazing M/S. HINDUSTAN PILKINGTON
& TRIVENI.
25. Thermocol Shalitex Board Heavy Duty Thermocol,
Shalimar Tex product.
26. Expansion Joint Sealant Chocksey Chemicals, Roff, Pidilite,
Polysulphide I.C.I. Asian.
27. Silicon Sealant G.I.Silicon.
28. Cement 53 grade & ACC, BIRLA GOLD, BIRLA
43 grade SUPER, GUJARAT AMBUJA,
RAJSHRI & L& T.
29. Stoneware Pipe Grade „AA‟ of locally I.S. 651 - 1980
& specials available make
30. C.I.manhole covers Best locally available I.S. - 1726
frames & gratings. P & I-VII &
I.S. 5961 - 1970
31. C.I. S & S „LA‟ I.S.I. marked IISCO or I.S. 1536 - 1976
„KESORAM‟.
32. C.I.Specials for „IISCO‟ or equivalent I.S. 1538 - 1976
„LA‟ class pipes. approved make.
33. C.I.Soil quality „BIC‟, „HEP‟ or equivalent I.S. 1729 - 1979
pipes & specials. locally manufactured.
34. C.I.Nahani traps Best locally available I.S. 1729 - 1979
„P‟ or „S‟ traps. or Calcutta make.
35. M.S.Galvanised „Zenith‟, „G.S.T.‟, I.S. 1239 - 1979
pipes “Heavy” „TATA‟.
grade confirming
to I.S.1239.
S.NO. MATERIALS RELEVANT I.S. NO WITH
LATEST REVISION
36. Mallcable G.I. I.S.I. marked of „R‟
specials. brand or equivalent.
approved.
37. C.I.Sluice Valve „KIRLOSKAR‟, „IVC‟ I.S. 780
38. C.I.butterfly Crawley & Ray -
Valves.
39. G.M.fullyway “Leader” I.S. 778 - 1980
gate valves.
40. Bib cocks, stop L & K or equivalent I.S. 781 - 1977
cocks of crutch approved.
handle.
41. C.P.fancy head “Driples”, “Jaquer” I.S. 8931 - 1978
long body bib. “Gem”, “Metro”.
42. C.P.flush valves “Nelson”, “Jaquer” I.S. 9758 - 1981
for W.C. and or other approved.
urinals.
43. a. C.I.non return “Kirloskar”, “Bandco”
or reflux valve
horizontal pattern.
b. -do- vertical HBD of Bombay.
of commissioning.
44. C.I.Foot Valves HBD of Bombay or I.S. 4038 - 1979
45. Sanitaryware “Hindustan Sanitary I.S. 42556 P & I-IV
ware, Parryware or
Neycer.
46. W.C.Seat “Commender” or “Patel” I.S. 2548 - 1980
S.NO. MATERIALS RELEVANT I.S. NO WITH
LATEST REVISION
47. C.P.brass waste “Techno”, “GEM”, I.S. 2963 - 1979
coupling bottle “Jaquar”.
trap „P‟ or „S‟
trap shower.
48. C.I.high level AI I.S. 774 - 1971
10 litres capacity
chain pull tank.
49. PVC 10 litres high “Commander” “Everlas” I.S. 231 - 1974
or low level tank. “Easyfloor” flushflo
or equivalent.
50. S.S.bed pan All India Trading
Centre Bombay or
other approved.
51. Mirrors “Atul Glass Works”
or best locally.
52. C.P.grade rails Best locally available.
towel rods etc.
53. C.P.liquid soap “Homacol” or equivalent.
dispenser.
54. a. HDPE pipe “Supreme”, “Garware”, I.S. 4984 - 1978
“Finolex”, “Hasti”.
b. HDPE moulded ----------- Do ---------- I.S. 8008 P & I-IV
55. R.C.C. NP2 class Indian hume Pipe Co. I.S. 458 - 1971
pipes or best locally available.
56. Fire Fighting “Firex”, “AsiaFire” or I.S. 5290 - 1977
accessories & approved by local fire I.S. 2878 - 1976
extinguishers. Brigade authorities. I.S. 2171 - 1976
S.NO. MATERIALS RELEVANT I.S. NO WITH
LATEST REVISION
57. Fire Pump “Kirloskar” or HBD
Pumps of Bombay, or
other approved equivalent.
58. Hydropneumatic Custom built by HBD
System. Pumps Bombay.
APPROVED MAKE FOR ELECTRICAL WORK
Sr.
No
Item Description Makes / Brand
1. H.T. Switchgear. Siemens,Schneider, ABB, Crompton Greaves,
2. L.T. Switchgear. Siemens,Schneider, ABB, Crompton Greaves,
3 Circuit Breakers
(Moulded case).
L&T, Siemens, Havell's, Indo Asian, Schnider, MDS, ABB.
4 Miniature Circuit
Breakers
Siemens, Merlin Gerin, Standard, Hager, Legrand
5 TPN / DP Switches /
Isolators.
L&T, Siemens, Schneider.
6 Rotary CAM type,
Selector switch.
Siemens, Thakoor, Kaycee,
7 Start / Stop push button
stations.
L&T, Siemens, Cutler-Hammer
8 Contactors. Schneider, L&T, Siemens, ABB.
9 Indicating lamp (Neon
Type)
Siemens, Vaishno or equivalent approved by relevant standards
10 Indicating lamp (LED)
Siemens, Vaishno or equivalent approved by relevant standards
11 Earth leakage circuit
breakers.
Siemens, Hager, Legrand, Schneider
12 H.R.C. Fuse. Siemens, L&T, Schneider, ABB
13 Power Transformer. Kirloskar, Bharat Bijlee, Emco, Voltamps, Crompton Greaves,
Trinity,
14 Distribution Boards. Siemens, Merlin Gerin, Standard, Hager, Legrand
15. Cables. 1st Category: Tropodur, Gloster, Asian, Polycab, Finolex, Nicco,
Universal, Incab,
16. Socket / Lugs. Dowells, Jainson, or equivalent approved by relevant standards
17. PVC Wires. 1st Category: Finolex, Polycab, Nicco RR Kabel , Anchor,
18 M.S.Black and G.I.
Conduit.
BEC, Vimco, BI, EWC.
19 Rigid PVC conduit and
accessories.
1st Category: Precision, Asian, Diamond.,Modi
20 PVC casing-n-capping
and PVC casing-n-
caping accessories.
Presto-plast, Modi's, Sunplast, Precision, Diamond, Circle Ark,
Alta, Super Plast, Shriplast OR ISI Mark.
21 Screws. Nettle Fold, King Fold, Precision Fastners.
22. Piano switches flush
mounting (5 to 15
Amps.) / wall sockets
& plugs (surface
mounting), Modular
Switches (5 to 15
Amps.) holder pendant
/ batten / angle, three
plate ceiling rose (for 3
core twisted flexible
wire), 30 Amps. D.P.
Ticcino type switch
fuse with indicating
lamp, bell push surface
mounting, flush
mounting.
Anchor, ABB,Siemens,
24. PVC Board. Sunwood, Presto-Plast or ISI marked.
25. Special accessories
concealed / decorative
(plate switches).
Anchor, Precision
26. Storage heater with
thermostatic control.
Bajaj, Spherehot, Racold, Ketco, Crompton, Aqua Therm.
27. Lamps. Bajaj, Crompton, Philips,Wipro,Osram
28. D.G.Set.
Engine. Cumins, Kirloskar, Caterpillar
Alternator. Kirloskar, Stanford, NGEF, Crompton Greaves,AVK
29. Air break starters for
motors.
Siemens, L&T, Crompton Greaves, Cutler Hammer.
30. Terminal block. Elmex, Everest, Jyoti, Phoenix, Connectwell.
31. Meters:
Analog/Digital
Automatic Electric, Meco, Indian Meters
Enercon
32. Energy meters. Automatic Electric, Meco, Indian Meters, Universal.
33. Water level control
equipment.
Minilec, Accent, AGMA22, RDS.
34. Emergency lights. Prolite, Profile, Rider, Tekno-Vision, Kheraj, BPL, Glolite.
35 DWC HDPE – double
wall corrugated pipes
REX or equivalent approved by relevant standards
36 Fire Alarm System Honeywell, Group Schneider, Notifier, Zycom, Equivalent
37 Public Address System Philips, Sonodyne, Equivalent
FIRE FIGHTING
APPROVED MAKES OF VARIOUS EQUIPMENT/MATERIALS
SL.NO ITEM MAKES RECOMMENDED
1.0 EQUIPMENTS
1.1 Pumps KSB, Kirloskar, HBD, Mather & Platt, Grundfoss,
CRI
1.2 Submersible pumps KSB, Kirloskar, HBD, Mather & Platt, Grundfoss,
CRI
1.3 Motors ABB,Kirloskar, Siemens
2.0 APPLIANCES
2.1 Hydrant valves Minimax, Safex, Firex, Shah Bhogilal, Monsher
2.2 Hose reel Minimax, Safex, Reliance, Monsher, Shah Bhogilal
2.3 Collecting heads Minimax,Safex,Monsher
2.4 Hose fittings A.K. Dey, Nitie, Minimax
2.5 Canvas hose Jayashree, Newage, Reliance
2.6 Rubber hose Dunlop, Swastik
2.7 Fire axe A.K. Dey, Ashok
2.8 Portable extinguishers Minimax, Vijay, Monsher, Master, Reliance
2.9 Sprinkler Appollo, Kidde, Grinnell, Automatic, Star
3.0 PIPING
3.1 GI & CS (MS) pipes Tata, Zenith, Jindal
3.2 GI & CS (MS) fittings M.J. Patel, Venus. Kirti,
4.0 VALVES
4.1 Butterfly valves
Audco,Intervalves, C&R, Advance, leader,
4.2 Ball valves Leader, Kirloskar,C&R, Zoloto
4.3 Pressure reducing valves Leader, Zoloto
4.4 Air release valve Hawa, Spirax,
4.5 Non return valve Advance, Leader,Audco,,Zoloto
4.6 Strainers Leader, Vibros, Kirloskar, Taylor,IVC, DSE,
Zoloto
4.7 Gate valve Leader, Zoloto
5.0 CONTROLS & INSTRUMENTS
5.1 Pressure gauge H.Guru, Feibig, Venus,
5.2 Thermometers H.Guru, Feibig, Venus, General, Scientific,
5.3 Flow switch Rapid cool or equal
5.4 Pressure switch Indfos, Switzer
5.5 Tamper switch Siemens, LT
6.0 MISCELLANEOUS
6.1 Hardware Tata, GKW, Fittight, Sundaram fasteners
6.2 Anchor fasteners Hilti, Shakti
6.3 Paint Asian, ICI, Nerolac, Burger
6.4 Welding rods Advani-orlicon, ESAB,Sechron, Universal, sunanre
6.5 Vibration isolators
&Flexible connections
Dunlop, Resistaflex, Kanwal
NOTE:
1. For all the Equipments & materials, technical submission must be made even
though the make appears in approved make.
2. Bidders can suggest an alternative make however the same must be mentioned at
the offer stage only, for evaluation & primary acceptance.
7.0 MV SWITCHGEAR
7.1 ACB L& T, Siemens, C&S, ABB
7.2 MCCB ABB,Siemens, Merlin Gerin, MDS
7.3 MCB/DB/RCCB Merlin Gerin, Hager, MDS, Load Kontact, Siemens
7.4 SF unit Siemes, L& T, ABB, GE
7.5 HRC fuses L & T, GE, Siemens
7.6 Starters and contactors Siemens,. Telemecanique, L&T
7.7 Panel fabrication To CPRI specs.
APPROVED MAKES OF VARIOUS EQUIPMENT/MATERIALS FOR HVAC SYSTEM
Air cooled Chiller Package Climaveneta / Carrier /Trane
Air Handling Unit Nutech / Carryaire / HPS
Centrifugal & Axial Fans Krugar /ABB
Propeller Fans GEC / Equivalent
Pumps Kirloskar / Grundfoss / Equivalent
Hi Wall Split A/C units /Window
AC
Bluestar / Carrier / Hitachi / LG/ Daikin
Ductable Splits Blue star/ Carrier / Hitachi / LG / Voltas
G. S. Sheets SAIL / Jindal / Equivalent
Pipes Jindal / Tata / Equivalent
EPS slabs Beardsell / Lloyd / Modifoam
Closed cell elastomeric Nitrile Armacell / Equivalent
Glass wool insulation Kimmco / Owens coring / UP Twiga
Room Thermostats Siemens / Johnson Controls / Sauter.
Filters Airtech / Dyna / Equivalent
Grills & Diffusers, Jet Nozzles Dynacraft / Cosmos / Equivalent
Motors Siemens / Crompton / Kirloskar / ABB
Fire Dampers / VCD Carryaire / Cosmos
Electrical Accessories L & T/ Siemens/ GE / Group Schneider.
Toggle switches/ Selector switches Kaycee / equivalent
Ammeter/ Voltmeter Automatic Electric / Equivalent
Indicating lamps L & T/ Siemens/ GE./ Equivalent
Power & control cables CCI/ Universal / Equivalent
NOTE:
3. For all the Equipments & materials, technical submission must be made even
though the make appears in approved make.
4. Bidders can suggest an alternative make however the same must be mentioned at
the offer stage only, for evaluation & primary acceptance.
